u- ' ^^ ' ' r,;.;^'' '<^^;v" ^^^^\, ^ ^ ^* .^ IN MEMJOmAJA J. Henry Senger Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/firstbpokingermaOObranrich FIRST BOOK IN GERMAN CONTAINING THE ACCIDENCE AND SYNTAX OF THE AUTHOR'S GERMAN GRAMMAR, NEW INDICES, AND LODEMAN'S EXERCISES By If. C;-^! BRANDT^ HAMILTON COLLEGE, CLINTON, N.Y. Sagton ALLYN AND BACON !N MEMORfAM Copyright^ 1884, by G. P. Putnam's Sons, * » ,'» -3 Coi>yright^ 1888, by AUyn &> Bacon. PREFACE. AT the suggestion made by several teachers, Part I. of the Grammar and Lodeman's Exercises with the complete English-German Vocabulary have been here bound together for use in secondary schools, whose younger pupils had been first put into one of the many short grammars. I should have liked to include the chapters on Accent and on Word-Formation from Part II.; but there are practical objections to this. The indices of the Grammar are added to this unchanged. PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION OF THE GRAMMAR. npHIS is the first thoroughly revised edition. Of the criti- -^ cisms of this work, I have been able to accept and embod}^ especially those of Prof. A. L. Ripley, of Yale College, and of Prof. George O. Curme, of Cornell College (Iowa), to both of whom I express my sincere thanks. The strictures made upon my classification of nouns and upon the standard of pronunciation I do not think well founded. The classification of nouns is historical and scientific. If the standard pronunci- ation should finally settle upon M, jh (§ 375) for g and not upon h (surd stop), nothing would please me better. " Hard " g, except after n, is a bitter pill for a North German. To the IV PREFACE. objection that the work is too concise, let me sa}^ that I have worked hard to make it concise. The Accidence and Part II. were once as large again as they are now. The first contained too much syntax, until, following the excellent method of the French grammarians, I resolved to separate entirely inflection and syntax. I have in this edition transferred several para- graphs from Part I. to Part II. Part II. is a historical founda- tion broad enough for Part I. to rest upon. It is not intended to be a minute historical reference-grammar for teachers and specialists onl}^ The word-index has been very much enlarged. With the demand for the traditional list of irregular verbs, "which no grammar should be without," I have complied so far as to include all the irregular verbs in the word-index (see introduc- tory remarks on page 271). I wanted to make the German- English vocabulary cover all the sentences and words, but found that it would swell the book too much. It is complete only for Part I. (see page 271). The list of reference-books has been omitted at the sugges- tion of Professor Ripley. It ma}' not be out of place to enumerate the distinguishing features of the grammar: (1) the complete separation of in- flection and syntax ; (2) the historical treatment of the latter, which should make it a welcome aid in the reading of 16th, 17th, and 18th century Literature ; (3) the attempt to treat German grammar with regard to the present stage of Germanic philol- ogy ; (4) the scientific analysis of German sounds and accent. The Author. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAET I. SECTION 1. PAGE ACCIDENCE 1-47 Pronunciation with Alphabets 1-5 . The Articles 6-7 Declension of Nouns 7-17 Declension and Comparison of the Adjective 17-21 Numerals 21-23 Pronouns 23-30 Conjugation 30-47 Weak Verbs 35-37 Strong Verbs 37-43 Anomalous Verbs 44-47 SECTION 2. SYNTAX. SPECIAL SYNTAX 51-130 Articles 51-55 Nouns 56-74 Gender 56-62 Singular and Plural 62-64 Cases 64-74 Adjectives 74^80 Numerals 80-82 Pronouns 82-96 Personal Pronouns „ 82-85 Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns QQ vi TABLE OF CONTENTS, PAGE Possessive Pronouns ., 86-88 Demonstrative Pronouns 88-91 Interrogative Pronouns 91-93 Relative Pronouns 93-95 Indefinite Pronouns 95-96 Verbs 97-118 Classification of Verbs 97 Auxiliary Verbs 97-99 Modal Auxiliaries , 99-102 Voice 102-104 Tenses 104-110 Moods 110-112 Infinitive 113-116 Participles 116-118 Gerundive 118 Adveeb 119 Pbeposition 119-130 Conjunction 130 GENERAL SYNTAX 131-154 The Simple Sentence 131-135 The Compound Sentence 135-147 Coordinate Sentences 135-137 Subordinate Sentences 137-147 Substantive Clauses 137-138 Adjective Clauses 139 Adverbial Clauses 140-147 Word-order 147-154 Abbreviations and Symbols 265 Subject-Index 266-270 Word-Index and German-English Vocabulary 271-286 Exercises for Translating into German, prepared and arranged to accompany the Grammar by A. Lodeman 1-87 FIRST PART. FIRST SECTION. ACCIDENCE. THE GERMAN ALPHABET. 1-2. German type. German script. Name. German type. Gennan script. Kame. ^ a ^ -^ S c ^-^ ® b ^yli^y (g e ^ f @ g 3^ t ^ ! S \ all bay tsay day (b)ay ef gay hah e yot kah el '..' . c* V . dt X X t U u 5' /^ c/ oh pay koo tay (t)oo fou(l) vay Ix ipsilon tset Ue uU iu ah-umlaut (h)ai(r) oh-umlaut oo-umlaut ^ „ ^ au-umlaut (-oi) cX C tsay-hah tsay-kah es-tsay-hah (::.8h) PEOJSrUNCIATION^. [3- PRONUNCIATION. The German sounds are here only very inaccurately represented by English words and letters. A fall analysis is found in the second part, p. 160. The following description, with a few key- words, will suffice for the beginner ; biit it is lacjint to be only a popular description. As soon as tlie ^udent beg^ns> ^ read, be ought to study Part II., p. 160-174. * 3. ,fi\es'.m':Mn^. father: ^(dtx,^al, S^i}U a, not in Eng., bttt SiEiilai^ to SOotcii a as in Sc hand, land: 'Slann, £ant>, 4. 6 = Eng. b, but surd ( =^) at the end of words: Sube, §aube, Sieb, Saub* 5. if = Eng. k : Sari, Sade, Siicfer* 6. ^^ not in Eng., but in Scotch as in loch, A single guttural sound. Two kinds : 1. Palatal (forward) after palatal vowels, viz. : e, x, o, u, a, ti, m, and in the suffix ^(^en, e. g,, i^, SCac^ter, 33lec^, mod)te, tuij, ©eriic^t, melc^, SBatd^en, SKamad^en* 2. Back- guttural after the other vowels, a, 0, u, m, e. g., ac^, ^a&j, Soc^, Suc^, Saud^ (betrog in N. G.). In S::^arfrei'tag and in foreign words = k: E^ara'fter, S^or; also like f^ in foreign words: e^ampa'gner, (^angie'ren, finance* 7. b = Eng. d, but surd (= t) finally: bu, boc^, 35at>, lub. 8. c, long, similar to Eng. a, ay, as in pay, pate, rate ; short, like Eng. e, as in met, e: gel^n, 33eet, ttJert; e: rec^t, SBette* 9. f = Eng./: l&offen, ipafen, fii^ren, gtagge. 10. g = Eng. g, but surd (=^) finally: glauben, ^^lagen, graben; but 2:ag, 3ug, fragte, trug, 23alg. IL ]^ = Eng. /i if it stands initially : iputtt), ipofe, ipafe* After a vowel and after a t it is silent : ^e^n, fe^(e)n, fa^, t^un, a^ot, S^al See the dropping of ^, p. 159. 12. i similar to Eng. i : bin, flnbe, brtnge, I or ie = Eng. ee uifeet : 'oitx, ftegen, mir, 'tit, 3gel, Siber* 24] PRONUISrCIATION. 3 13. I similar to Eng. y: {ung, Jagen, S^gi** 14. f , if = Eng. k: ^a^e, Sacfe, ipalen. 15. I similar to Eng. I : Sage, kc^ett, too^, ©aal, kit)* 16. m = Eng. m ; SUJolc^, @aum, f(^n?tmmen. 17. n = Eng. n. 1. Initially, finally, and before a den- tal: ?lagel, nun, fein, feni^en, gant, gunb* 2. In the stem-syllable before t, and combined with g like Eng. ng in sm^, smgrer ; 3lnfattg, ©anger, ginger, 33anf, fenfen, 6linlen; but an^ge^fommen, ttn^jge^euer* 18. B = Eng. o, oa, in hold, foal : Sole, Soot, tot, rot, Soo^, lo^, ^l^on (clay), o not in Eng., but short Sc. o; e, g.: SBo(^e, So(^, (Btod, 9lo(l (not at all like Eng. stocky rock, but see p. 164). 19. ^ = like Eng.p; ))Iagen, ^appt, 2:rapper, ©alo'p))* |jf = p +/; 5)funt), 9la))f, ®um))f, tapfer* In Eng. only in accidental juxtaposition, e. g., " a cap for him," " stop for me." p^ in foreign words only =/; ^^^ilologie', Xtk^xa'p)^. 20. q always followed by n, similar to Eng. qu: quer, Dnafl, Duart, fcequem* 21. X unlike Eng. r. 1. Trilled: Slegen, Slac^e, fern, f5urt, treu* This is the standard r. 2. Uvular or guttural in K G.^ very much like the guttural (^, but sonant. 22. f, ff, §, § = Eng. surd s: ipaug, ^aufe, Staffer, glu§, SJZn^e, fein ; but initially and after a vowel it begins surd and ends sonant, as in N. and M. G. Standard unsettled. But see p. 175. 23. f c^ = Eng. sh (surd) : fc^iden, f(!^en!en, l^afc^en, ©(i^tange. 24. f}, f)j = fc^t, fc^^i initially in the standard pronuncia- tion and in S. and M. G. But in the middle and at the end of words, in N. G. also at the beginning of words = Eng. st, sp; \6^t, f^p: ©tein, ©trage, ©tu^l, ©pag, fprtefen; st, sp: ^a% toiifte, berften, SBurft, SSefpe, ^afpeln. N. G.: ©))ie^, ©toct. 4 PEONtJNCIATION. [25- 25. i, «) = Eng. t : ^t, ^atte, Zi^at, Sfla^t. 26. it = Eng. 00 in too : iput, SCut, Slume, Suc^, S3u^le, u = Eng. u in j9w^ ; Sutter, (lu^en, ©utoen* 27. t) = Eng./ in German words: SSater, grei^el, ijteU ti = German It) in foreign words: ^ita'x, i^inbijie'ren, SSafa'n^* 28. HI like Eng. v dento-labial : SBettcr, SBaffer, marnen. After f ^ labio-labial like u after c|, but not quite like Eng. w : (B6^m\kx, (S(imeig, (B6^mUt. But see p. 170. 29. y in foreign words and ^§, ^f = Eng. x : 2llexant)ev, 2Ba4^, guc^^, giic^pn, fe^^* ^ = ii^ which see. 30. J, ^ = Eng. ts, as in ca/s, ra^5 : 3««9^ S^^^flr SBarac, c in foreign words before e, if'f^/azzz ts : cerebral, Safu'r, Sifa'be, S^Ho'p; but the spelling is unsettled: 3^9^'^^^/ 3^^^^^^/ 2t^ti\VL'x^ 31. Modified Vowels (TTmlauts). tt long = Eng. ai in fair: SSater, 0lat)er, jla^Iem* a short = Eng. and Ger. c : ^ant>e, 2Cant>e, fatten. B not in Eng. It has the lip-position of o, the tongue- position of c: long in Vo]t, lofert, ^er^bge; short in Setter, ^Mc, (Serotte. ii not in Eng. It has the lip-position of n, the tongue- position of i: long in SWii^le, Sutler, ^ii^teln; short in SJZiitter, Siinbe, Siittel. ^ = ii^ as in S^a'tt, S^pre'jfe, only in foreign words. 32. Diphthongs. ai (rare) and ci = Eng. i in find: ^ai\tx, ^ai, (eife, mi^, Weiben* an = Eng. ou in house : blau, ipau^, 'Man^. au and ctt similar to Eng. oi in exploit : Wd\x\t, lauten, S3eute, leute* 37J PEOKUNCIATIOIT. 5 ftuantity of Vowels. 33. Vowels are long in an open syllable, e» g.y 2;a^ge^, jo^gen, 33u^4cr. They are also indicated: 1. By doubling, but only in the case of a, e, o: ®aal, ©eele, 50^oo^» 2. By I) after the Yowel and after t : ipa^n, ^%m, i|n, 3;l)ran, Z^^x. 3. By c after i: Uefc, ZiiXf ^ieL 4. a and e are generally long before r, rt, rt) : t»ar, rar, l)er, njert, tverDen, jart, 5>fert), Short in fertig (< Sci^rt), aSarte, (S^arte, §era, ©(^mera. 34. The vowels are short before more than one consonant: 35. 6 counts as a single consonant ; it becomes ff medially (see '* Rules," § 12), 6. g., ^lug — gluffe^, gluffe ; flief en — flo§, gefloffen. The vowel remains long before inflectional endings, e.g.y lokn, hl^, gelobt (but ge'^abtf gentoc^t); also in a closed syllable, when the stem- vowel stands in an open syllable under inflection, e. g., Xag, J^a^^ge^; B«9' Bu^ge^* But see p. 175. Since ^ cannot be doubled, there is no telling the quantity of the pre- ceding vowel from the mere looks of the word: 6.^., long in S3uc^ — S3u(^e<3; Xuc^ — 3:u($c^ ; brac^ — hac^en; but short in 23ad) — S3a(^e5 ; lac^em wac^en. As a rule, shortness may be expected. 36. The division into syllables differs somewhat from the English custom. The " Rules " § 26 show how words are divided at the end of a line. The following examples will illustrate sufficiently; ^^^Betl^ fuc^^te, be^^c^rettf S3ee^re» ijer^lrrett, ge^irrt, SSafsfer, (Stra^fe, lo^fc^en, roster, ^tn^gcr (but see 17), ^e^xe, SBci^jen; ^it^je, ^ar^))fen, :6e=^o5^ac^tcn, nati^fa^gen, be^glau^ I>i^gen» 37. German orthography is now regulated by the government, and the student who is to write German should provide himself with the official, 9JcgeIn unb SBorterwers aeic^ni§ fur Me beutfd)e 9Jec^tf^relBung tn ben preu^ifji^cn ©(^ulen. 33erltn. It is a small convenient guide of 46 pages, with a quite full word-list See 361, 2. THE AKTICLES. [38- THE ARTICLES. 38. The definite article is ter, Me, tia^ + the ; the indefinite, cin, eine, tin + one, an, a. The definite article declines: maec. fern. neuter. common gender. Sing, N. Ux tie ta^ Plu, tie G. te^ ter beij ter D. ^em feer tent ten A. ten Me U^ tie e indefinite article declines: Sing, N. etn eine em G. etne^ einer etne^ D. einem einer einem A. einen eine ein 39. The articles are unaccented. The definite article is the weakened demonstrative pronoun, which has chief stress. It retains the short original forms of the same. The indefinite article is the weakened numeral ein^ which also has chief stress. To mark the demonstrative pronoun and the numeral, they are some- times printed spaced or with a capital letter : ^ux Slnen ©d^ritt; fo bifl t)U fret, F. 4563 ; but ©^ ttjar einmal ein ^onig, F. 2212. ^er Wla^x !ann ge'^n (Sch.). (£<5 t^ut mh Un' fc^ott m^i bag \^ tid^ in b e r ©efeHf^aft \i\)\ F. 3470-1. 40. Owing to their lack of accent both articles suffer aphseresis and apocope, and contraction with the preceding word, most frequently with a preposition : bent andba^ are, according to good usage, combined with the following prepositions : an, auf^ ki, bur(^f fiir, l^inter, in, uOer, urn, nnter, ijon^ ijor, and ju; e. g., ant, an^, auf^r in^, um^, ^om, etc. In general, contractions with dissyllabic prepositions are rarer in the classics, common in the spoken language, which allows the contraction of ben whether dative plu- ral or accusative singular masculine with the above and also with other prepositions. Some such are even in the classics : in = in^n, F. 2429, win ©eJTel/" Lessing's Nathan, „in 'BaCt," „m ^o'pf," t,m S^ag." Sn, uin contain 43] DECLEl^SION OF NOUl^S. 7 long (see 389,5) consonants and the article is not absent, as is generally explained. In conversation is heard: um ^xm, »Ott Saunten, aufn ^elbern, tttit^n ^anbettf burc^^tt 2Balb» The apostrophe in auf^^ iikr^^, etc., is not at all indispensable. 2)er, dative singular feminine, combines properly only with ju into jur* 41. Attractions of the definite article, especially of the neuter, to pre- ceding words other than prepositions are common in the spoken lan- guage, e.g., M ttJitt'i3 S3u^ f^oXtn,'' „tx ^at ftc^'^ S3ein gckod^en*" wSBinbV^ g)ferb ^aug an" (G.). „Unb ^a^'^ ^ujTen »erlcrttt« (F. 4485). 1. The aphaeresis of „ein" common in the spoken language is also found in the written, e. g., «aBarf auf ^nen ^i\x\ji bie ^anbf(^u^^"(Uh.). Bold abbreviations are these in Chamisso's, ,/^ t»ar mal ^ne ^a^enfontgin*" The dropping of ein before mai is not unusual : „%^ war xaoX ein ^aifer ;" «^U(^ tt)ar mal ein 5r^t« (Bii.). Notice fo'tte for fo eine. The early N. H. Q. (16th century) etm for eittem (comp. M. H. G. eime for eineme), einn or ein for einen occur still in some South German dialects. In M. H. G. the aphae- resis of ""ein" is unheard of, while the definite article is much more pliant than in the present classical language. Apocope of the same is still allowable in certain S. G. dialects. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 42. There are three systems of Declension, the Strong {Vowel, Old), the Weah (Consonant, n-Beclension or Jfew), and the Mixed. The strong declension {see 43, 1) has (e)g in the geni- tive singular ; the weah has (e)n in all cases, singular and -plural, except in the nominative singular ; the mixed has (e)0 in the genitive singular, (e)tt in the whole plural. General Rules. 43. 1. Feminine nouns never vary in the singular. 2. The only case-endings are (e)^ for the genitive singular and (e)n for the dative plural. 3. e in the case-suffix ought to stand in nouns ending in \, ?r \^, a, ^ i, ii* 6 DECLEl^SION OF NOUNS. [44- e is always dropped after el, en, em, er, c^en, lein. In other cases it is optional. If tlie genitive singular has t^, then the dative singular has e as a rule: ipaufe^, ju §aufe* a. Distribution of nouns among these declensions according to gender: 1. The bulk of feminine nouns belong to the n-declension. No neuters at all. 2. To the strong declension belong mainly mascuhne and neuter nouns, and a few feminines. 3. The mixed declension includes a few masculine and neuter nouns. Strong Declension, 44. We distinguish for practical reasons four classes, according to the formation of the plural : 1. No sign unless it be umlaut: ba^ SEunter, Me SEunter; Ux aSater, tie Sdter. 2. -t without umlaut: ter Sag, tie Sage; ta^ So^, Me Sofe. 3. -e with umlaut : ber ©o^n, tie ©o^ne ; tie ^raft, tie ^rafte. 4. -er always with umlaut: ta^ Sat, tie Satcr; ta^ ^au^, tie ipaufer* 45. FmsT Class. — a. No sign: Sing. N. ter (Spakn tag ®ewerk ter Sngel G. teg ©jjateng teg ©eujerbeg teg gngelg Plu. D. ten ©paten ten ®emer6en ten Sngein All other cases singular and plural like nominative singular. b. With umlaut: Sing. N., D., A. ter gaten ter Sruter G. teg %attm teg Sruterg Plu. N., G., A. tie Saten tie Sriiter D. ten gat en ten Sriirern 48] DECLEJS^SION" OF NOUKS. 9 46. To this class, which never take e in the G. and D. sing., belong: 1. Masculine and neuter nouns in -el, -n, -en, -d^en, -lein, -fel, e. g., ter §eBel, Der Mttcx, t)er 23ot)en, ter ipopfen, tia^ ^punticben, Da^ ^tolein, ra^ 3^atfeL 2. Neuters of the form (53e-e, e. g,, ba^ ®etrette, Oefcbmetbe* 3. The names of kindred in -er: SSater, Sruber, 2;o(^ter, ^Ulutter, ©d^mager, all with umlaut. Also l:er ^dfe» 4. Certain nouns, if they take -n in the nominative singu- lar, as they may according to usage: ter gelfen, tier SSrunnen, tev Zxop\m, ter (Sc^reden (these so generally). The following not so frequently in the written language: ^er gun!e(n), 23al!e(n), griei?e(n), ©et)an!e(tt), ®efaae(n), (53Iaube(n), §aufe(n), 5^ame(n), (Same(tt), @d)at)e(tt)- 47. 1. 5ltem (Dbem), SSrobeni/ Stbatrtf SSrofam stand isolated. The plural, if it occurs, is the -e of the next class. SBrofamen, 1, is more common than SBrofame. See 501. 2. All nouns sub 4, except ^riebe, ©efaEc, and ®eban!e, were weak in M. H. G., and are not yet fully established in the strong declension. Since usage is unsettled, they might all be put under the mixed or weak declension. 48. 1. The nouns of this class that take umlaut, besides the names of kindred in -er, are :ber 5lpfel + apple, ^dtx + acre, SBoben + bottom, soil ; ^abeitf thread (bie %ahtn + fathoms), ®arten + garden, ^a^n, harbor, + haven ; jammer + hammer, JBaben ( ?), shutter, shop (store) ^ 9JJangel, . want, S^agel + nail, Dfen + oven, stove ; ©attcl + saddle, er ^u^ ter Sraut ^w. N..A.,a (Stammc ^ii^e Sraute D. ©tdmmett ^ii^eit Srauten 53. To this class belong : 1. The majority of strong masculine nouns, mostly monosyl- labics : ter ©efang + song, ®e6rau(^ use, SaU + ball, (53aj^ + guest, @o^rt + son, etc. 2. A number of feminine nouns : bie 9lttgfi + anxiety, 5lxt 4- axe, 33an! + bench + bank, Srunft, heat, lust ; Sruft + breast, gauj^ + fist, grui^t + fruit, ®an5 + goose, ®ruft vault, §attt) + hand, S^dwi + hide, ^luft + cleft, ^!unft in compounds as in Sinfunft + income; iayx^ + louse, Suft air, Suft desire, ^a^t + might, ^Wagb + maid, servant ; ^au^ + mouse, 5la(^t + night, 5^a^t seam, ^lu^ + nut, ®au + sow (Sc^nur string, ©tabt city, S3ant) wall (of a room), SBurfi sausage, Z\xn\t guild ; 3lu^fluc^t evasion, Slrmkufl cross-bow, ®efdjtt?ulfl + swelHng. 54* Only two modern neuter nouns belong here, the last of which is of doubtful gender, viz.: ^a^ glo§ raft (429, 1); ter or r^a^ (E^or + choir, chorus. 55. No neuters belong here really except 0. H. Q-. men, ba^ 9J?eer, bie Mtixt, now according to 2d Class, ^er and ba^ S|or, borrowed from church Latin '* chorus," has joined the group sub 2. %hxama, pi. Dramen ; Z^tma, pi. ZUmm ; 3ttbii?i't)uum, pL 3ttt)iiJtt)uen. ©lobu^, ^i^t^mn^* But these are also found with -^ in geni- tive singular, and then come under the mixed declension. 3. Nouns whose foreign plural ended in -ia take -ten; <&tiit)ium, pi. ©tnMen ; ©i^mnaftum, pi. ©i^mnaften. The ending of the singular may have been lost, and they have -^ in geni- tive singular, as 2lt)iJc'rB, 3^artici')>, Semitta'r^ SKinera'I, Sofftl, pL 16 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [65- 2l^i)erBien, goffiUen, etc. Notice 5)ri'ma5, fxima'ttn ; Wi\a^, Sltk'n^ ten; ,^rifi^, ^rifen* On the whole, there is a great deal of ir- regularity, and therefore freedom, in the inflection of foreign words. Declension of Proper Nouns. 65. 1. The names of nations and peoples are inflected both in the singular and plural. Those in -er (except Sater and 5)ommer, where -er is not suffix, denoting origin) go according to 1st Class (strong). All the others go according to the jt-dedension : Der hamburger, ^e^ ^amburger^, etc., D. pi. Un ^amburgem* But ter ^a6^\t, De^ @adjfen; Der fxtn^t, u^ $)reu^en, etc. 2. Certain geographical names (see 147), which always have the definite article, are treated like any common noun, e.g., t)er Difeein, De^ ^^nn^, laC^ gtc^telgebirge t)e^ -e^; ta^ Sp§/ ^^^ (JlfaffeS; tie ©^n^ei^, ter S(^tx>ei3, etc. 3. Names of persons are uninflected if preceded by the arti- cle (an adjective or title between article and name makes no difference), e.g.,t)Z^ ^arl, te5 ^aifer^ ^arl, tern grogen grietrid). If the title follows the name, or if the name in the genitive, modified by an adjective, stands before the noun upon which it depends, then the name takes -^, e. g., U^ 3^etd) Sut)tt)ig^ te5 grommen, U^ gropen griecrid)^ ^enerale. 4. Names of persons, places, and countries without an arti- cle take a genitive in -c^x ®oet^e, ®oet^e^; Snglanti, Snglant'^; ^Unna, ^Inna^* But names of males ending in a sibilant, if inflected at all and an apostrophe is not preferred, and femi- nine names in -e, form a genitive in -m^,e. g., Sfflax^n^, gran^en^, Wlaxkn^, ©op^ien^. Surnames in a sibilant certainly prefer an axx)strophe, e.g., 9J^ufau^' 5)oI!^mard^en, Dpiid' S5er!e, (3an^' 3:ot. Names of places in a sibilant are constructed with i)on : tie 3letc^^frei^eit ^on ^o'ltjlanj, i^ie Sefefligungen ^on ^axi'^. 69] DECLENSI0:N^ of AJDECTIVES. 17 66. A dative and an accusative in -en of names of persons are liardly in use now, as e.g., (Sc^illcrn, ©oet^ettf ^lopfiotfen. Christian feminine names retain them more easily than masculine, e.g., ^ajl bu 3)krien 9efprod)en ? See 68, 3. Such genitives as 9)?utter^ 2:ob, 2:antett^ ©e^itrt^tag are hardly proper. 67. Plurals of names of persons are formed in various ways. The general rule is : -e for masculine and -e(n) for feminine names, e. g,, ipetttric^e, ?0^arieu ; but also Srun^tlte, Slifakte* -5 forms the plural of masculines ending in a vowel and of feminines in -a: 5lnna^, §ugo^. 68. 1. Here also belongs the plural of surnames denoting the mem- bers of the family, formed by -^ if ending in a consonant not a sibilant ; by -(e)n if ending in a vowel or a sibilant (occurs only in familiar lan- guage however), e. g., ©teinbruggettf the Steinbriigges ; ©ul)Iing^/ the Suhling family ; ^M^* Other endings for the plural, generally of for- eign names however, are -ne, -nen t Sato, Satone; ©cipionen/ Dttone, and Dttonen ; but the first n belongs to the stem of course. Compare L. Scipio, Scipionis, This ^ was perhaps originally a G. sing. 2. Biblical names retain foreign inflection : S^angelium 2)lattjaet, itt Scftt e^rijlOf lariat |)eimfuc^un9» 3. It should be borne in mind that the rule in the classical writers before Goethe's death is not the rule now. Lessing wrote be0 Sutf)cr5, bed SJlelanc^t^on^ ; Goethe, Seiben be^ jutiQen SBert^er^. The dative and accusa- tive in -en are the rule in them, the exception now, |)al)en 8ie ^arlcn gcfc^riekn, 2Bil^cImen gefu(^t ? DECLENSION OF THE ADJECTIVE. 69. The adjective is inflected according to two sys- tems of declension, the Strong and the Weak. It is inflected strong when there is no limiting wordy before it ; lueah, when there is an article or demonstrative pronoun. It is uninflected in the predicate. 18 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [70- 1. Strong : masc. fern. neuter. common gender. Sing. N. guter gute gute^ Plu. N. gute G. gute5 guter guted G. guter D. ^utern guter gutem D. guten A. o;\xitXi gute gute^ A. gute 2. Weak: masc. fern. neuter. Sing. N. t>er gute tie gute ta^ gute A. t)ett gutcn bie gute ba^ gute All other cases, sing, and pZit., guten. Notice that the nominative and accusative singular of the feminine and neuter forms are alike. 70. After ein, letn, and the possessive pronouns the adjec- tive is strong in the nominative singular of all genders and in the accusative singular of feminine and neuter, since it is like the nominative. The whole pi. is weak. Sg.'^. ein grower Dic^ter, eine rote ^trfc^e, tin l^errltcbe^ (^et)t(^t G. eine^ grofen !Di(fcter^, etner roten ^irf^e, eine^ ^errltc^en ©ebtc^te^ D. einem grogen ^ic^ter, einer roten ^irfc^e, einem ^errlid^en ®et)i^te < A. einen grogen 2^ic^ter, eine rote ^irfc^e, tin ^errli(^e^ (Setic^t. 71. Adjectives ending in -cl, -er, -en as a rule drop the c of these suflBxes when inflected, sometimes however the e of the case-ending -en, e.g.y ebcl, ebler, cblc, eblc^; magerr ntagrer, magre, magre^; cigen, eigner, eigne, cigne^ ; but ^eitern and ^eitren, eblen and ebeln. Those in -er like to retain both e's: :^etterer, l^eitere, l^eitere^. Note therefore: ©in magrer Dc^fe, cined tttagern or magren £)dbfen, etc. ; ber l^eitere or '^eitre |)immet, bc^ ^etterettr '^eltreit, or :^eitern ^immel^, etc. ; mein etgnc^ |)au0, meine^ eigenen or cignen ^aufea, etc. For |o(5^, :^o:^er, |o|er ^e^eg see 490, 3, h. 72. The genitive singular masculine and neuter, -i^, is now so regu- larly replaced by -en, that this should perhaps appear in the paradigm. Though strictly according to rule, -e^ has become the exception ; -en has prevailed since the 17th century. Voss, Klopstock, and Grimm opposed it. Goethe favors it. Sinr fein, the possessive and the demonstrative pronouns never allow -en for -e^; never f einen 2)^anne^, biefen S3uc^e^. 75] COMPARISON^ OF ADJECTIVES. 19 COMPARISON OF THE ADJECTIVE 73. Adjectives are compared by means of the inflectional suffixes -er and -(e)ft, e, g, : (ositive. comparative. superlative. iung iiinger iiingfl fdsbrt fdjbner fc^i3nft rei* reii^er reid)i^ Those in -el, -en, -er lose this e before the comparative -er ; but retain it and lose the e of -ejl in the superlative, e. g,, mager, magrer, magerft; tjunltl, bunfier, bunfelft* e in -eft is as a rule retained after ti, t, ^, fe, 3, rc^, §, and ft, but not necessarily, e, g., lautefte, gemiffefte, fii^ejle* ©ropte alone is classical, but in the spoken language fii^te, ^etpte, !ur3te, etc., are heard. „§od)" retains the former ^ in the comparative ^o^er, and ^ in na^e becomes 6^x tidc^ft* See 490, 3, b. 74. The umlaut generally takes place, but it is very diffi- cult to tell when it does not. A not small number are doubt- ful, e. g,, bla^, gefunt), fromm, etc. No umlaut in : 1. Those with the stem- vowel au, e.g,, lau, Blau, etc. 2. Foreign ones: 6rai), noBel, etc. 3. Participles: Befud^t, genjantt, etc. 4. Deriva- tives : flraf6ar, f(!^atf^aft, langfam, unglauBIid), etc. 5. Sunt, Manf, t)um))f, falf(^, flac^, fro^, ^o^l, ^ol^, fa^I, liar, la^m, la§, lo^, matt, morfd^, platt, )jlum|), rafd^, ro^, run^, fanft, fatt, fc^laff, fdjlan!, fcbrojf, (larr, ftol^, flraff, toG, ^oE, wa^r, s^i^m, gart. 75. The comparative and superlative forms are dechned just like the positive. Examples : ©rbgerer ©pag, cjrogereg or gr5geren ©page^, etc. ; ber gro^ere ©pag, ^e^ gro^eren @pa§e^, etc. ; tin grbgerer ®|jag ^larfte^ 3Baflfer, ba^ flarjie SSaffer, eitt Harfte^ ffiaffer. ©Dlerer ^O^antt, ber eblere mam, ein et)lerer 9Hann; eitelfter Surf^, ber eitelfle Surfcb, tin eitelfter 33urfc^. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. [76-^ §eifrer (Banger, ber ^eifrere ©anger, etn ^eifrerer ©anger, G. eine^ l^eifreren ©angers, etc. ; ter ^etferfte ©dnger^ 76. 1. Irregular Comparison. By the use of different stems : Positive. Comparative. Superlative. gut + good beffer, adv. kg + better beft + best ijiel me^r + more meift + most mel^rer me^rfl gering or menig minter mintefl ®ut and i)ie( are never compared regularly. SRe^rer and me'^rji are due to double comparison. „?!}^e^rft," tbougli occurring in Goethe and Schiller, is not classical. SHefcr and mtnber are really not adjectives, but are used adverbially and substantively. „33ag„ (me^r, very, much) is now archaic. „To^ k§ ^e^t it)n ^er tinfe ^ann'' (Bii.). giirtag (onward); „Bag" also means fe^^r, ftarl: „X)ad mac^t, er t^i ft(^ kg ^erijor'' (Sch.). „Urtt) mart) nicbt me:^r gefel)n" (G.). SJlorgen ein me^rere^ = to-morrow (I will write) more. 2. Defective and Redundant Comparison. a. There is a class of adjectives derived from adverbs and prepositions : Adv. or prep. Comparative. Superlative. (auger) auger augerft (Winter) Winter ^interjl (inner) inner innerjl (ntet)er) nieter (rare) niet)erfl (ob[er]) ober okrft (unter) unter unterjl (^or, fort) ijorter Dor^erjl; For the derivation of these adverbs, see 551, 3. The superlative suffix -ft is added to the comparative. This is due to their former full comparison, as for instance, O. H. G. pos. Idntaro, comp. hintaroro, superl. hintarSst. The pres- 77J NUMEEALS. 21 ent comparatives ^tntere, oBere are not even now felt as real comparatives ; duf er has a spurious umlaut ; „oberfte" and „\oxUx\k" are colloquial ; „^ort)er'' comes from „fort/' O. H. G. fordar ; compare Eng. further, which has nothing to do with far. Comparative. mtttler (e^er, adv.) + ere Positive. (mlttel) + middle (e^e, conj.) (lap + late) (fiir) (ftoer, adv.) Superlative. mittelft erft + erst le^t + last giirft (subst.) + first The first compares regularly like an adjective in -eL The positive occurs only in compounds now, and the comparative has the force of the positive. NUMERALS. 77. Cardinals. eitt^, + one ^xozx, + two trei, + three i)ter, 4- four fiittf, + five fecbd, + six fteben, + seven a&i, + eight neutt, + nine ge^tt, + ten elf, ei(f, olf, + eleven gwelf, gnjolf, + twelve treije^n, + thirteen tJter^c^n, + fourteen fiinfae^n, + fifteen \t&i{^)lt^xi, + sixteen awanaig, + twenty cin unt) stpan^ig, -p twenty-one 3met uttD smanjig, + twenty-two Ixtx unt) smanjig, + twenty-three treipig, -f thirty ein unb Iret^tg, + thirty-one ijteratg, + forty fiinfaig, funfatg, + fifty fed)^aig, fec^atg, + sixty fteB(en)aig, + seventy acbtaig, + eighty neunaig, + ninety ^untert (ta^ §unt>ert), + a huD- dred {ixn) ^unbert unt) etn(^), + a hun- dred and one (cin) ^untert unt) imx, + a hun- dred and two (tin) ^unbert (unb) yt^n, + a hundred and ten 22 KUMERALS. [78- (eitt) ^unt)ert nn'ti ^toan^i^, + a hundred and twenty (etn) 6untert tin unt) atx>an3ig, + a hundred and twenty-one (ein) ^un^ert ac^t unD ac^tjig, + a hundred and eighty-eight gnjei^utttert, + two hundred trei^untert fec^^ unt) fieBatg, + three hundred and seventy-six taufent) (^a^ ^aufent), + a thousand (ein) taufent) unt) ein(^), + a thousand and one (ein) taufent) t)xd unb ijierjig, + a thousand and forty-three (ein) taufent) ein^untert or elf^untiert, + a thousand and one hundred ein taufent) ad^tfeunbert brei unb ac^t^ig or ac^tge^n ^unbert ^rei unb ad^t^ig, + one thousand eight hundred and eighty-three brei(mal) ^unbert taufenb, -f three hundred thousand tim ^iUio'n, + a million eine SJlittia'rbe, a thousand millions eine 23ilIio'n, -j- a billion 78. Inflection. Fully inflected are only tim, jttjet, brei, as follows : Masc. Pern. Neuter. N. einer eine ein(e)^ G. tint^ einer tim^, when used substantively. N. ein eine ein, like the indefinite article when used attributively. „^^ war etner bem^^ ju ^eqen ging" (Ch.) ; „dn^ »on beiben/' one of two things. N. gwei G. jmeier D. gnjeien A. gmei N. brei G. breier D. breien A. brei 79. Older inflections were masc. jtr>cen, fern. jttJO. 3»ei, the neuter, has crowded out the masculine and feminine forms, which may still be found in the older modern classics, and still in use in the S Q-. dialects. 3Ba^ imkn rec^t tjl, ift breien ju enge, ^urc^ jweier Beugen 2??unb t»irb attcr»artd bie Sa^r^eit funb (F., I. 3013). Bwecrtf bie mit mir iikrfu^ren 81] PRONOUNS. 23 ♦ ♦ . . (Uh.) 3tt)D ^ofen eine^ 3:u(3^^f cut from the same cloth. «3tt)o Sungfern in ben beilen Sa^ren" (Gellert). The plurals jwcie and breie are iu analogy with the strong noun and adjective declensions From 4-13 the e in the plural represents O. H. G. i when they were ^-stems, fiinfe < fimfi. The only other case in which these numbers are inflected is the dative plural (in -en): auf aHen S3ieren friec^enf aUe SJiere ijon fic^ ftrecfen; mit (Bec^fen fa|ren; su 2)reiett« ^mm, jtDeien are according to the adjective inflection. 80. Ordinals. The ordinals are formed from the cardinals by adding -te to the numbers from 2-19, and -fte from 20 on. (Der) erfle, + first feihfte, + sixth imxit, + second l^^^e^nte, + sixteenth ^ritte, + third S^anatgfle, + twentieth »ierte, + fourth l^unbertfte, + hundredth fiinfte, + fifth taufeti^fte, + thousandth Their inflection is that of adjectives ; jit^eiter, ter imik, eitt jweiter; G. einee jn^eiten* See 438, 1. PRONOUNS 81. Personal Pronouns. Special forms for gender in the Common gender. Bingular. I. II. III. III. Masc. Fern. Neuter. Sing, N. icfi U er fie e^ G. meiner Reiner feiner feiner i^rer feiner (mein) (ijcin) (fein) (fein) (fein, e^) D. mix tir ficD i^m i^r i^m A. mid^ ti(^ ft* ifett fie e^ Plu. N. n?ir fte G. unfer euer — iferer (uitfrer) (eurer) D. un^ iniij ft* i^nen A. utt^ euc^ ft* He 24 PROl^OUNS. [82- The first and second persons and the plural of the third person are of common gender. The singular of the third person has a form for each gender. 82. In the genitive singular the longer forms in -er are common; the others are now archaic and poetic, e, g., „2$er^ip^ meinnic^t'' (the flower). „3c^ UnU ^Eein/' etc. (G.). The length- ened forms eurer, unfrer are not yet sanctioned, though common in the spoken language, and, especially eurer, not very rare in the classics, e. g,, „(2Ci^ ^^) B^t Za\d Surer felbft nic^t ac^tet" (Sch.). ,,'^ann feetiarf e^ unferer ntc^t,, (Sch.). The genitive singular neu- ter „e^" occurs still in certain constructions, generally called an accusative: „(5r i)at eg feiiten $e^( tag ♦ . . ." (Sch.). 3c^ Hn eg mtoe* gg nimmt mic^ 2Bunter. (See 183, 199, 2.) 83. Reflexive Pronouns. For the first and second persons the personal pronouns serve as such, e. g., ic^ fiircbte mtdj, toix freuen ung, i^r fc^eut euc^. For the third person the forms are made up of the personal and the old reflexive pronouns : Maec. and neuter. Fern. Common gender. Sing, G. feiner (iker, pers. pron.) Plu, (ifcver, pers. pron. ) D., A. ftA fic^ W 84. The reciprocal pronoun has no special form ; as such are used ung, eu(^, ftc^, einantier, meaning "each other,'' "one another." Ex.: 3^r |Wai]t cud). STnr [(^elten einant)er nic^t. The Possessive Pronouns. 85. The possessive pronouns are: metn + my; letn + thy; fein,his, its; il)r, her; unfer -f our; euer + your; t^, their; 3^^*^ your ; tcr meine + mine ; ter teine + thine, etc. ; Ux meiuige + mine; ter teinige + thine, etc. They are inflected like adjectives (see 69); but the first 87] PROKOUi^s. 25 group, meitt; Mn, feiit, etc., like the indefinite article (see 38), in which the nominative singular masculine and the nomina- tive and accusative singular neuter are uninflected. e ,g, : Neuter. Feminine. Sing. N., A. meitt Zuii teine 9lid)te G. metne^ Zuift^ Reiner ^iiiitt D. meinem Zu6^t teiner 9lid)te Flu. N., A. mtim ZMtt teine S^t^tett G. meiner ^u(Ser teiner 5^id)tett D. meinen S^ii^ern teitten S'iii^ten For the declension of ^er meine, ter mtinxQt, see the weak adjective, 69, 2. The rest stand uninflected used prediea- tively and when they follow the noun (now archaic), e, g,, 3Bae mdn ifi, ta^ ift Uin nnr) tua^ tein ift, ta^ ijl mein (B.). Du Ibaft ta^ Jperje mein fo gan^ genommen ein (Song). 86. Sucr, (Sure, ©ctncr, ©ctnc are often abbreviated into @nj., ©r., ©e. : ©e, SDZajeftat, ©ttj. SBol^lgeBoren. 3^ro is archaic, e. g., 3^vo ©naben. It is an imitation of the old G. bcro (see 89). It does not occur before the seventeenth century. It stands for mas- culine and feminine singular and plural : ^f}xo ©naben, ©mlnenj, ®ur(i^tau(i^t. 87. The possessive pronouns form certain compounds with m^tn, f^alhtxif tx>itlen/ and gleic^ett. Ex. : metnetwegen, i'^rettDcgen, mtmt^alhzn, \^xt^^ gleti^en, cure^gletc^eti* The compounds with wegen and l^alben are really D. plu. meinen iDegen, betnen ^alben. After n sprang up the excrescent t = ttteinentwegen, beinent^alkn, current in the sixteenth century. These became the now classical meinctwegcn, beinet^alben, though the longest forms are still heard ; also meintl^alknf even ntcint^l^al^en^ occur, but they are not good. SD^einetwtllen < ntementtt)itlen < mcinentt)illen are original accusatives, e. g., urn ntetnen tvtilen = for my sake. The origin of i^re^gleic^en^ etc., is not so clear. ®Iet(^tn is vrithout doubt the adjective used as a noun and governing a preceding genitive, which was at first the genitive of the personal pronoun and became later the possessive pronoun agreeing with gleic&en (M. H. G. ^ne gelichen). But whence d ? Is it the genitive sign -e^ in compound nouns, Siek^^ Brteff Si)?ittag^jhinbe, which was looked upon as a mere connective ? (See 618, 2.) In IVL H. &. was a Gen. mines, dineSy which with miner , stood for 26 PRONOUKS, 188- m%n, almost exclusively before aeUbes. But beinc^glcic^cn is not old enough to connect with M. H. G. dines selbes. Other compounds with the possessive, like meine^teiU, meincrfeit^ (see 652), are clearly genitives. Demonstrative Pronouns. 88. These are : 1. ter, ^ie, bag + the, that ; 2. Vxt\tx, biefe^ Mefe^ + this ; jener, jene, jetted, that, + yon. The first, when used with the noun, differs only in accent and not in declen- sion from the article (see 39). When used substantively (without the noun) it declines : Masc Fern. Neuter. Common gender. Sing.'^. Uv bie tag Flu, tie G. U^m beren teffen teren beg ber teg terer (ter) D. tern ter tern benen A. X)tn tie tag tie 89. The spelling- of ,,be§« for ,,bc^' ' is unwarranted. It implies that it is an abbreviation of ,M\ftn," which it is net, ^2)ero'' is the O. H. G. form retained in certain phrases, as in bero ©naben* T>txtntmo,tn, ^^Ikn, etc., are forms like meiuetnjegen, etc. , but . rarely lose the it before t. For their explanation see 87. Masc. Fern. Neuter. 90. tiefer tiefe tiefeg and tteg + this jener jene jeneg -f yon, that These are declined Hke strong adjectives, and stand adjec- tively and substantively: tiefe geter, tiefeg Sintenfa^, jener Saurn. 3eiteg tort ift mein 35uc^. 91 Another group of demonstrative pronouns, sometimes called " determinative," consists of : Masc. Fern. Neuter. terjenige tiejenige tagjenige, the, that tierfelbe MefelBe tagfelbe, the same terfelMge tiefelbige tagfelMge, the same felber, felbjl (uninflected), felbiger felbtge felMgeg, the same faldj(er) fo^(e) fo((^(eg), + such 92] PRONOUNS. 27 1. The inflection of the first three is that of „ter" and a weak adjective, e, g,, berjenige, te^ienigen, t^emienigen, etc. Their composition is apparent, -ig is the usual adjective suffix (see 525, 1). In the 16th century bcr is still separated from felb-, \i\\-, and earlier the latter were even declined strong, ber jcncr, bcm felkm, but they soon followed the n-declension. „2)er icne," from which wberienige" developed, becomes obsolete in the 17th century. wDerfclMge'' < ,/berfelbe.". Accent : be'rienige, but berfe'lk, 2. ©elBer is a stereotyped form like iJoHer, and felbfl is a geni- tive singular of felB, M. H. G. selhes. The excrescent t appears first in the 16th century. 3. ©old) is inflected like any adjective, even with -en in the genitive singular, e.g,, foI(^enfali^, folc^eu ®IauBen5» It may be uninflected. always if followed by iin and generally if followed by another adjective. An apostrophe after foI(^ is uncalled for. (Sold) ein W^iaxm, folc^ f(^one Slurnen* ^xnt folc^e SSeleiDigung !ann x6) nic^t ijergeffen. 2(U er folc^e^ fa^ . ♦ > . (B.). 92. Interrogative Pronouns. 2Ger -f who ; nja^ -f what ; tvelc^cr + which ; todi fiir dxif what sort of. 1. 2Cer declines : Masc. and fern. Neuter. N. mx xoa& G. iDcffen, ttje^ wejfen, ttjed D. n^em A. mn tra^ Sc§ or ttjef^: n)ea as befTen t bed. See 89. The genitive lengtheneQ by -en like bee > beffen was not yet established in the 16th century, 2Be^ is now archaic, except in compounds, e. ^., we^l^al^, t^e^wegen. For weffentl^alBen, see beffent-, berent^alkn, 87, 89. 2. S3el(^ 4- which, what, declines strong. Before „cin'' it is 28 PROisrouKS. [93- always, and before an adjective it is often left uninflectecl, also in poetry when used adjectively: SCeld) ®etummel ^tragen auf ! (Sch.). aCeld) eln ©efii^I (F. 1011). ffiei^ev mann mx e^ ? 3. 2Ca0 fiir, tua^ fiir ein, what, what kind of. „Sin'' alone is inflected like the indefinite article if used adjectively; like a strong adjective if used substantively: „3Ca^ fiir Serge, roa^ ]\xx SBiiften ♦ . ♦ . trennen un^ ^enn nod)?'' (Le.). S3a^ fiir ein 33aum tjl ta^ ? 2Ba^ fiir Dinte ifl Die5 ? 93. Relative Pronouns. 1. !Der, ^ie, la^, which, + that, who, declines like the demon- strative, but the genitive plural is never ^erer : Reiner ftegte nod). ter nidjt geftritten ^at (Bo.). 2. SBelc^er, trelc^e, trelc^e^, + which, who, that, always declines strong: "Da^ Su^, tt?el(^e^ ic^ gelefen babe. 3. SBer, + who, whoever. The inflection is the same as that of the interrogative: 2Ber e5 (auc^) fei, whoever it be. 4. 2Ba5, + what, whatsoever. The inflection is the same as that of the interrogative : 2Ba^ er (au(^) fagen ma^, no matter what he says. Indefinite Pronouns and Indefinite Numerals. 94. winterer, ant)ere, anbere^, -f other, different : ^er anbere, tic ant>ere, ba^ antere, bte anberen* Declined like any adjective, used substantively and adjectively. 95. Siner, eine, eine^, + one, the numeral with its deriva- tives !eitt, none, and einige, generally only plural " some." Sin- is always strongly inflected and stands only substan- tively. Standing adjectively it is declined like the indefinite article (see 39). With del art. : ber eine, Me einen^ ,^etn is inflected like the indefinite article, but standing substantively is dechned feiner, feine, tm{t)^ : Reiner ttjirl) aU SKeifter geboren (Prov.). 09] PRONOUNS. 29 96. Stiicb-, some; etira^, anything; mv, anybody; toa^, any- thing, something; mel(^-, some, any. Stltd)- and mi6)j- are always inflected strong. The singular of etli(^is rare, having the force of "tolerable," "some": mit etUcfeem Srfotge, with some success. 97. Compounds with {e: iet)er, every, each; {eglicfe, {et)ti?et)er (z= ie^er) stand adjectively and substantively; jetermann, every- body; jemant), anybody; niemant), nobody. 3et)er, jeglic^-, jet) metier, each, every, are declined like strong adjectives. 3 ^9^0^ and jetittJeDer are not common now ; they have the same meaning. 3^^^^ntann has only a genitive singu- lar in -^. S^ntan^ and niemanD decHne: N. {emanD G. iemant)(e)^ D. iemantem, -tieit A. jemanben The accusative and dative are N. H. G., taken from the adjective inflection. Though the classics are full of these cases, the best usage for the spoken language favors no case- ending for accusative and dative. 98. ^an, one, any one. It is only nominative. The other cases are made up from ein- or voir. ?Dlan is old spelling for ?0^ann, from which in M. H. G. it was not distinguished. Its corresponding possessive is fein : 'SHan QlanU i^m ni(^t. '^an lann feinen eigenen ^Ojjf ni^t efen (Prov.). 99. ^i&ii^, nothing, allows of no further inflection. It is itself the genitive of M. H. G. niht = ni-wiht and nio-miht Compare Eng. naught = na-wiht. 9li(^t5, the genitive, stands for the emphatic combination nihtes niht, "not a thing" = gar ntd)t^. 3u ttic^te, mit nidJten, "not at all," show still that ntcbt was once a noun fully inflected: ^Seffer etwa^5 tenn nid)t^ (Prov.). 30 COISTJUGATIOK. [100- 100. As indefinite numerals it is customary to classify atl + all; MU + both; beiDe^ + each or either; o^an^, whole; lauter, " nothing but; " man^ + many; me^r + more; me^rere, several; lit meiflen + most, the majority; Die me^rften (= Die meiften) ; eiit paax, a few, Ht. " a pair; ' famtlid^e, all, altogether; ta^ ubxi^t, t)te iiHgen, the rest; "oid, much, many; menig, Httle, few; eitt njenig, a little. Of these, aU, ganj, mattc^, ^tel, njenig may stand uninflected. Otherwise they are inflected like adjectives: 2?ie( (Btelne gab^^ lint) toentg 33rot (Uh.). Oanj ^Deutfd^Iant) lag in @4mac^ unt> ^d^mer^ (Mosen). Da^ gan^e ®entfd)Iant) foil e^ fein (Arndt). £auter, me^r, ein paar, ein n?enig are indeclinable. CONJUGATION. 101. The verb varies for person and number; for tense (present and preterit) and mood (indicative and subjunctive). From the present stem are formed the imperative and the noun-forms of the verb, viz. , the infinitive, present participle with the gerundive, and the past participle in -(e)t. Accord- ing to the formation of the preterit we distinguish two great systems of conjugations, the " strong ' and the " zveak.*' The strong verbs form the preterit by substituting a different stem- vowel from that of the present, e, g., geben — gab, tragen — trug ; the weak, by adding -(e)te to the stem, e, g., loben — lobte, glauben — glaubte* 102. The infinitive, the preterit, and the past participle ai*e generally given as the " principal parts " of a verb. The infinitive represents the forms with the present stem. Know- ing the preterit or the past participle, one can tell whether a verb is weak or strong. If the preterit ends in -(e)te the past participle ends in ~(e)t ; if the preterit is strong, the past par- ticiple ends in -en, e. g., fagen, fagte, gefagt; faugen, fog, gcfogen. 105] COIfJUGATlOK, 31 The infinitive and the past participle help form the compound tenses. 103. The following paradigms show the various inflections: WEAK. PRESENT. PRETEBIT. STRONG. Ind. x&i lobe er loBt xoxx loben i^r (oBt pe loben Ind, andsvJt^, (obe lobte lobefl lobtefl lobe lobte loben lobten lobet lobtet loben lobten PRESENT. Ind. Sub). finge ftnge ftngt fmge jingen ftn^en fln^t ftnget ^n^txi (tngen 2. sg. lobe (tu) 1. pZ. loben mtr 1 loben @ie Inf, loben Geruiidwe. lobenD Past part. gelobt Imp. 2. sg. ftng(e) (tu) 1. pi, ftngen ttjir 2.i9Z.-lP"^(')^(^^') ( finqen ®ie PRETERIT. /we?. SvJbj. fang fange fangjl fangej^ fang fange fangen fangen fangt fanget fangen fdngen Inf. fingen* Pres.part.t Gerundive, ftngent Past part. gefungen 104. The personal suffixes are: Sg. 1. p. -e, except for strong preterit. 2. p. -(e) ft for both tenses and moods. 3. p. -(e) t for the present indicative. In the pres. subj. and in the pret. ind. and subj. the 3. p. is like the first. PL 1. p. -(e)n for both tenses and moods. 2. p. -(e)t for both tenses and moods ; also for the im- perative. 3. p. -(e)n for both tenses and moods. Th^ retention or rejection of the thematic or connectinjr voweJ -e- is treated later. See 118, 105.. Imperative. The 2. p. sg. ends in -e in all verbs excepting those strong ones that have the interchange of 82 C0NJFGATI02!f. [106- e — i or c — ie in the 2. and 3. p. sg. pres. ind., e. g,, Zxant, j(^aue, kte, Htte, grabe, t)ebe, but fprtd), fn§, nxmm. 106. Infinitive. It always ends in -en except in those weak verbs in which it is preceded by -el, -er : it^antieln, a>antent ; also in fein, t^nn, which are non-thematic verbs. See 449, 2. 107. Participles. The present pari and the gerundive always end in -ent: ^offeut), ^elfent), etn Siebent)er, ein ^u kmeifenter ©a^, a proposition to be demonstrated. They are declined like adjectives. The past participle is formed by the prefix ge-, and the suf- fix -(e) t for weak verbs, the suffix -en for strong ones: liekn — gelieBt, bidttern — geHdttert, tragen — getragen, fingen — gejungen* 108. (^e- does not stand: 1. Before t)et§en, laffen, fe^en, ^elfen, lernen (?), le^^ren (?), ^oren, when an infinitive depends upon them in a compound tense: 3d) ^abc i^n ge|en ^ei§en, fommen lajjen, fagen ^i3ren. For ternen and lebren, gelernt and gelekt are better usage. 2. In the preterit-present verbs (= modal auxiliaries, see 134) which form similar past participles, viz., fbnnen, tiirfen, mbgen, miiffen, follen, mUm, SJian ^at ta^ tt)Ute ^ier nidjt fangen !onnen» See 113. 3. In the past participles of verbs having inseparable pre- fixes, e. g., ijerlaffen, entfagt, ktedt, getad)t, except fveffen < ^cx + effen and verbs in which h and g are no longer felt to be the prefixes be and ge (see 543), e.^., gefreffen, geblieben < bleiben^ geglauM; geglii^en < gleic^en. See gegejjen, 128. 4 In verbs with the foreign ending -i'eren, e, g., ntar|'d)ieren — marfd)tert ; proMeren — proHert. Even when these are com- pounded with separable Germanic prefixes, they take no ge- : au^marf(^iert, cinfturicvt. 5. 2Corren < tper^en never takes ge-, when it is an auxihary in the passive voice, e, g., gr ift geloBt trorten. lllj CONJUGATION. 33 Compound Tenses. 109. These are formed by means of the auxiliary verbs ijdbm, \t\n, trerten ; the last in the future active and the whole passive; ):)ahm and fein in the active voice. As a matter of con- venience the simple tenses of these auxiharies are given here. 110. PRESENT. Ind. i(^ ^aBe er %^i fie ^aBett Subj. l^abe ^abet PRETERIT. Ind. Subj. Imperative. 2. sg, %aU (uu) 1. pL ^aBen trir 2 ^atte ^atteft ^atte fatten ^attet fatten Inf. l^aBen Icitte pttefl ^atte fatten ^attet fatten PRESENT. Ind. Subj. PRETERIT. ( 5aBen (5te Past part. fei feiejl fei feten fetet feien Imperative, %sg, fei (tu) 1. p?. feten mir ( feien @ie Bin Btft jtnt) feiD ftn^ Ind. toax ttjarjl n?ar n?aren n?aret maren Subj. torn n?drefl tr>dre irdren njdret tvdren PRESENT. ic^ mxtt mxU In n)irfl merbefl er n?irb ttjerl^e mir merten tt^erben i^r ttjerbet n)ertet fie tverten n^erben ge:^aBt PRETERIT. Ind. taaxX), murte roaxt^, njurbefl njart), wurte tt)urt)en twurtet tpurten Inf. fein Fres. part, feient Fast part, genjefen Subj. murt)e mMefl n?iirt)e njiirben ttJiirlet ttjiirt)en ive. n^ert'e (tu) mert'en mtr ( trertet (i^r) 1 n?ert)en ^ie iH/. ii^erten Fast part, njotten 2. sg. 1.J9/. 111. 1. -f)akn has contracted forms for the 2. and 3, pers. sing.: ^a|! < Mst < Jiabest ; !^at < M^ < A«&6^. The pret. has undergone the same contractions : ^atte < Mte < habete, etc. The pret. subj. has umlaut due to the influence of strong and pret.-pres. verbs. In dialect the old con- 34 COKTUGATIOiT. [112- tracted forms with a, prevailing through the whole present, are still heard. In M. H. G. hdben as auxiliary has the contracted forms ; as an independent verb, the uncontracted. 2. SBerben is a regular strong verb of the 3, class. It is the only verb that has retained the two pret. vowels, generally the vowel of the sing, prevailing over that of the plural. 2Barb is more common as independent verb ; tt)urbe, as auxiliary. In elevated style warb is preferable. 112. Tlie Perfect is formed with the present of ^aben or fein and the past participle, e, g., t(^ ^abe getragen, I have borne; t(^ Un gefaferen, subj. id) fei gefa^ren, I have ridden. Perfect Infini- tive: gctragen i)ahn, gefa^ren fein, to have carried, ridden. The Pluperfect is formed with the preterit of l^abm or fein: id) ^atk getragen, subj. t(^ I)atte getragen, I had borne; ic^ irar gefa^ren, subj. i&j mxt gefa^ren, I had ridden. 113. The past participles without ge- accompanied by an infinitive (see 108, 1, 2), the modal auxiliaries and weak verbs which followed their analogy, form such tenses as these : 3(^ ^ctk t|n ge'^en f)d^tn, I have ordered him to leave, ©te ^aben einen fRdd mac^en laffen, you have had a coat made or ordered a coat to be made, ^cr ^ndht ^at bie Seftton nic^t lernen fijitneiif the boy has not been able to learn the lesson. (£r ^at e^ nur fagen I)5reit, he has only heard it said. !I)cr 9?ad)bar ^at ben S3ettler arretteren laffen woHen (or tt)olfm arretteren laffen), my neighbor wanted to have the beggar arrested. 114. The Future ind. and subj. is formed with the present of mxUn and the infinitive, e, g., i(^ merbe tragen, ic^ werte fafcren, I shall carry, ride. The Future Perfect is formed with the present of merl^en and the perfect infinitive, e. g., ic^ merte getragen '\^ahm, id) mx'tt gcfa^ren fein, I shall have carried, ridden. 115. The first Conditional is formed with the preterit subj. of mxlm and the infinitive, e. g,, i(^ tt>uri)e tragen or fal^ren, I should carry or ride. The second or perfect Conditional is formed with the pre- terit subj. of ji?erten and the perfect infinitive : id) timU getragen )>abm or gefa^ren fein, I should have carried or ridden. 118] CONJUGATION. 85 Passive Voice. 116. The passive voice is formed by werben and the past participle. The tense of the auxiHary with the past participle of the verb forms the corresponding passive tense. SBerDcn forms its compound tenses with feitt and tr^erlen. Present : i(^ mxU geloBt, I am praised, am being praised. Preterit : i(^ mv'D or rt>mU geloBt, I was praised. Perfect : t(!^ Un geloBt n?ori:en, I have been praised. Pluperfect : ic^ mar ge(o6t moreen, I had been praised. Future : x&) merbe geloBt werDen, I shall be praised. Future perfect : i6:i n?erte gelobt itJOrtien feiti, I shall have been praised. 1. Conditional : id) tt>urt)e gelobt tt?ert)en,I should be praised. 2. or Conditional perfect : i(^ mtoe ^elobt mort)en fein, I should have been praised. IiMPERATiVE : fet (t>u) gelobt, be (thou) praised. feten ©ie gelobt ) Infinitive : ^tUU ti^erDen, to be praised. c^elobt vooxUn fein, to have been praised. Weak Conjugation. 117. The weak conjugation forms the principal parts by suffixing -te or -ete in the preterit: loben, lobk, rcttcn, rcttete; by prefixing ge- and suffixing -t or -et in the past participle: ^dcUf gerettet* For the simple tenses see 103, for the com- pound, 112-115. 1. Verbs of this conjugation are with few exceptions derivative verbs, and most of them can be recognized as such by certain marlcs of derivation, such as suffixes (-cin, -em, -tg€n, -ieren, -jcn, -fc^en) or umlaut. (But there are a few strong verbs with umlaut: Ifigen.. trugen, gcbaren, etc.). 118. 1. The connecting vowel always stands before t, whether per- sonal sufBx (3. p. sg. and 2. p. pi.) or in the participle and preterit, if the stem ends in b or t (t^)j if the stern ends in m and n, preceded by another 36 CONJUGATION. [119- consonant which is not m or n, e.g,, er rebct, i^r melbet, xoix walteten* getrojlet, cr atmete^ i(^ seic^netc. Those in m and n have lost an c before these consonants. Compare them with their noirna : Sttem, !^tx6i^Xi. Those in n are often treated like those in el, er, to which they really belong (see sub 3) : jeic^cnte, regente. But these forms are not elegant. 2. The connecting vowel stands in the 2. p. sg. present ind. also after stems in f, \6). f, \\, i, ^, besides the stem-endings sub 1, e.g., bu rebejl, njaltejlr fd)mad)tej^, rec^neft, reifejl, ftfc|e|l, fpa^e)!, faffefl, njibmejl, kijeft, jlu^efl. 3. Verbs in -citt and -ertt rarely show the connecting vowel e, e. g. , \6) ^anbclte, er '^anbett, gelac^elt, xoxx iDanberten, In the 1. p. sg. present ind. and subj., in the imperative 2. p. sg. they generally lose their own e, e,g,, \^ toanble, tvanbre, [d^meic^le (bu)* 4. In solemn diction and in poetry any verb may retain the connecting vowel. On the other hand, the poet and the people take many liberties in the omission of it (sub 1 and 2). For instance, t)un!te teu(^te geDeuc^t ^uttfte ger>un!t bringen ^xa6:jk Brad)te gebra(^t Strong Conjugation. 120. Strong verbs must have different stem- vowels in the preterit and present, since in this way difference of tense is expressed. But the vowel of the past participle may coincide with that of the present, as in geBen, Qob, gegeben v, fa^ren, fu^r, gefa^ren vi, l)alten, l)ie(t; ge^alten vii; or with that of the preterit, as in fceigen, Bi^, gebiffen i, btegen, bog, gebogen n, glimmen, glomm, geglommen vin. The past participle ends in -en, and has the prefix ge-, e. g., geftoMen, gerufen* For simple tenses see 103. 121. The personal suffixes are the same as in weak verbs. Compare lieBte, IteBteft, (tebte, etc.; fa^, fa^fl, fa^, etc. The imper- ative 2. p. sg. has no ending when the present ind. has inter- change of e-i, ie, e, g., ic^ berge, tu birgft, er birgt ; imp. birg ; brec^en — bridj; effen — 1§* This interchange of e-i, ie occurs in in 3, IV, v; in verbs which do not have it there is no difference of stem- vowel in the imperative and the present, e. g., ^alten — ^alt ; fc^njtmmen — f(^tt>imm^ But often e is added in analogy with weak verbs, always when the verb is either strong or weak, e.g., rufen — rufe vri ; f4(ai\en — f(^Icige vi ; always trebe, ben^ege, ern^cige viii. In the last group there is of course no interchange of e-i, e. g., tu bett?egft, er ben?egt. When the stem ends in t, -tet in the 3. p. sg. is contracted to single t, if the stem-vowel changes. M. H. G. giltet > gilft > gilt* K g,, getten — er gilt; feAten — er ft(^t; raten, rat; but rettet, fc^neitet. Special mention is made of these peculiarities under each class and verb. The preterit subj. always has umlaut and 38 COl^JUGATIOl^. [122- fhe 1. and 3. p. sg. end in e, e. g., id) \oX), bu \a^i, er fal), etc. ; but id? \c\X)t, tu fal)eft, er fa^e* The verbs are best classified according to the ablaut- series, (See 393.) 122. I. Class. Ablaut : ei i, ie i, ie. 1. Division : ei i u The stem ends in p (jf), \, d), t, M* Examples: Bei^en, Big, geMffen ; fc^leifen, fd)tiff, ^efc^liffen ; fdjreiten, fc^ritt, gefd^ritten; weic^en, n?ic^, gen?i(^en; leiten, litt, gelitten* The following verbs belong here : Bet^en, + bite ; Heic^en (intrans.), + bleach, but also weak, always when trans. ; fic^ befleigen, to apply one's self; gletc^erif to be + like, strong since the ITtli century, in the sense of + liken it is still weak, a N. H. G. distinction, M. H. G. only weak ; filei^eii; + glitter, nothing to do with the rare gleifcn < gelihsen, to deceive, or entgleifett; to run off the track < ®eleife, track ; gleiten, + glide ; greifenf to seize, + gripe ; greinen, + grin, rare and generally weak, grinfcn, its derivative, has taken its place ; feifen, to quarrel, is strong or weak, < L. G. ; !netfen, to pinch, L. G. > N. H. G. ; fretfc^en and frei^eu/ to scream, are related, both weak and strong, not H. G. ; leiben, to suffer, + loathe ; ^jfeifeitf to whistle, + pipe < L. pipare ; ret^en^ to tear, + write, draw ; rciteitf + ride on horseback ; fc^letc^en, to sneak ( ^- slick and sleek) ; fd^Ietfen, to grind, + slip, weak in the sense of ** to drag, raze" ; f(|Iei^en, + slit, split ; fc^mei§en, + smite, throw ; fc^neibett, to cut ; [c^reiten, to stride ; fpleifen, + split, L. and M. G. ; jlreic^en, to wipe, cross, + strike, etc., with very varying meanings ; jlreiteitf to strive ; tveid^ettf to yield ; compare ttjeid^r + weak, wicker ; weak, it means to soak, soften. 2. Division : el ie te> Examples : getei^en, g^t'te^, gebie^en ; reiben, rieB, gerteBen* Here belong : Bleiben, to remain ( + leave) ; gebcil^ert/ to thrive, the part, has a doublet, gebie^eitr thriven, gebiegen, solid, pure ; lei^en, to borrow, + lend ; meiben, to avoid ; pretfeUr + to praise, strong only since the 15th cen- tury, < 9)ret^ < M. H. G. pris < O. Fr. pf%s < L. pretium, analogous to Fr. priser ; reiben, to rub ( + rive) ; fc^eiben, to separate ; fd^einen, + shine ; fc^retben, to write ( + shrive) ; fc^reienf to scream (?) ; f^iDeigeit;. to be silent, weak in the sense of "to still a child"; fpeien, to spit, + spew; jleigen, to climb; treiben, + to drive; Jueifen, to point out, in the 16th century still weak ; jei^en, to accuse ( + indict). 125] CONJUGATION^. 39 123. Notice the interchange of b-t in the first division, e.g.^ fc^neiben, f(^nitt, gefc^nitten ; but not in the second, viz., mciben, mieb, gemieben ; jcl;eiben, jc^icb, gefc^teten. (See 416.) When the stem ends in ^ or ^, the 2. p. sg. present ind. is heard merely as ending in ft, whether spelt so or not. The full form -eft stands only in elevated diction, e.g.., bu f(^mei^t, Bei^t, Beflei^t \}i6) ; bu weifeft and toeift, bu preifeft and preift. (See 118, 4.) Notice also the doubling of t and f in fc^reiten, f^ritt ; ftreiten, flritt ; f^Ieifen, fc^Iiff, etc. 124. II. Class. Ablaut : ie (it, (k\x) i, o o, o* 1. Division : ie (au) o 6* The stem ends in p (ff), c^, f. Examples : flte^en, flof , gefloffen ; trtefen, troff, getroffen* Here belong : ijerbrie^ett, to disgust, vex ; fitepen, + flow ( + fleet) ; gief ettf to pour ; friei^en, + to crouch, creep (?) ; gentef en, to enjoy ; ried^en, to smell, + reek ; fc^iepettf + to shoot ; fc^liefen, to slip, rare, supplanted by its derivative fc^litpfen; fc^Ue^ett/ to close, lock ; fprlepen, + to sprout ; triefen, + to drip ; faufen, to drink (of animals); fieben, see index. 2. Division : ie, it, au o 5* Examples: fliegen, flog, geflogett ; tritgen, trog, getrogen; fattgen, fog, gefogen. Here belong- : 1. In tc J ^icgcn, to bend ; Meten, to offer, + to bid ; fliegen, + to fly ; flie^en, + to flee ; frieren, + to freeze ; fUekn, + to cleave, split ; f(^ieBen, + to shove ; jltekn, to scatter ; ijerlieren, + to lose; jie^en (jog, sejogett)), to draw. 2. In ii t fitren (fiefen), + to choose ; litgcit, + lie ; tritgen, to deceive. 3. In an J faitgen, + to suck ; fc^nau^en (fc^meBen), to snort, L. and M. G.; fd^rauben, to screw (+ ?), L. G. > late M. H. G. 2., 3. pers. sg. pres. show archaic forms sometimes Jn cu : fteu^t, freu(i^t, jTeugt. (See 406.) Of those in au only faufen has umlaut, viz., fftuffl, f&uft. The stem ending in ^, the 2. p. sg. may be bu f^lc^t, gcnie^t. Notice the interchange of ^-g in jie^en, 3pg, gejogen, but ^ is silent. (See 416.) Notice also the doubling of f : faufen, foff, etc. 125. m. Class. Ablaut: c, i a fi, 6. 1. Division : i ol VL, The stem ends in n + cons, (t), g, f)* Examples : btnben, knt, gebunkn; fpringen, frrang, gefprungen* 40 COIfJUGATION-. [127- Here belong : binben, + to bind ; bingeitf to hire, originally and still at times weak, the isolated weak past part, bebingt is a regular adjective ; bringen, to penetrate ; ftnben, + to find ; gclingen, to be successful ; flingen, to be heard, resound ; rtngen, to struggle, + wring ; fd^tnben, + to skin, pret. fd^unb; fc^Ungertf to twine, + sling, it also has the force of the now lost fc^Unbettf to swallow ; fd^winbenf to disappear ; fc^tcingen, + to swing , jtngen, + to sing ; jinfen, + to sink ; fpringen, + to spring ; jlinfen, + to stink ; trittfen, +to drink ; winbenf + to wind ; jmingen, to force. 2. Division : i 5 o. The stem ends in mm and nn* Examples: fpinnen, fpann, subj. fpdnne and fpbnne, gcfponnen; fdjn^immen, f^n^amm, f(^mdmme and f(^momme, gef(^mommen. Here belong: begittnett, + to begin; rinnen, to flow, + run; jtnnen, to think ; [c^tt)immen/ + to swim ; fpinnen, -i- to spin ; gcn)innen, + to win. 3. Division : e-i a o» The stem ends in I, r -f cons, except trefc^en* Examples : ^elfen (Silft), l^alf (^iilfe, ^dlfe), ge^^olfen ; n^erfen (mtrft), warf (miirfe), getuorfcn* Here belong: krgett/ to hide, + bury, burrow; Berjleit/ + to burst; brefc^en, + to thrash ; gelten/ to be worth, pass for ; ^elfen, + to help ; fd^elten, + to soold ; (lerbcn, to die (+ starve) ; »erberbett/ to spoil (intrans.) ; »cr^ berbett (weak), to corrupt ; mxltn, to enlist, woo ; wcrbcn, to become, + worth (see 110) ; ttjerfen, to throw ( + warp). 126. Notice the double preterits snbj. (See 464, 3.) Sub 2, rtnnen never haa „r&nne." The 3. division has generally and better u, because you cannot tell „t)alfe" from f/'^ctfe" by ear. fi^ft, pronounced merely ,,\\})i." The participle of effen, viz., gegeffen, has gc- twice, because gecften was contracted into geHcn very early. This is now colloquial. (See F. 2838, 4415.) Notice bu tvittft, er tiitt ; bu titteft, er bittet. 129. VI. Class. Ablaut : a, a-d u ^,0.. The stem-vowel is short before more than one consonant ; also in 6u!^ Example: ba(!en,(ba(l|l),bu!(bule), ^il([din. Here belong : Ibad en, + to bake, in N. G. generally weak ; fa:j>ven, to ride, + fare ; graben, to dig; laben, to Invite, and labcn, + load ; laben (strong). 42 CONJUGATIO]^. [130- + to ]oad, and labcn (weak), to invite, have been confounded since early N. H. G.; they are of different origin ; [(^affeu (fc^uf), to create (weak, "to work ") ; fc^Iagen, to strike, + slay ; tragen, to carry ; n)ac§fen, to grow, + wax ; ttjafc^en, + to wash ; {flt))tn), jlunb, Panb (jliinbe, fidnbe), gepanbcn, + to stand, jlunb is still common in S. G. Here belonged also formerly : ^ekn (^eBjl), 'i)xib, Qt'f^oUn, to raise, + heave; fc^Woren (f(|n)orfl), \6^tonx—\^\x>ox, gefc^woren, + to swear, ^ragen (frcigjl), frug (but never gefragen), ** to ask," are frequently heard ; also jagett (jcigft), jug, **to chase." The forms are still frowned upon by gram- marians because they are "wrong," but the people use them just the same. In the 2. and 3. p. present ind. a is the rule excepting f^affen, f(^affjl, which is under the influence of the weak verb. Notice bu and er trac^ft, bu njaj(^ft (pronounced wafc^t). Isolated participles : gema'^Ien, ground ; maljlen is now weak, mal)len, ma^k, Qemaf)\t, to grind ; ev^al)en, lofty, < er^eBen, er^oBen. 130. VII. Class. Characteristic is ie in the preterit, which is no ablaut, while the past participle always has the vowel of the infinitive. For convenience we make two groups. 1. Division. The seeming ablaut is : a, a ie &, a* a before more than one consonant, ie = short t before -ng* Examples: fangen (fiingft), ften^, gefangen; Braten (Mtft, brat), briet, gekaten. Here belong : Blafen, + blow, + blare (?) ; :6ratett, to roast, fry ; fallen (ftel), + to fall ; fangen (rarer fa'^en),, to catch ; (ge^en)/ Qteng, gegangen, + go, went, gone ; ^alten, + to hold ; ^angeitf + to hang ; laffen, + to let, cause ; raten, to advise ; fc^Iafcn, + to sleep. Umlaut is the rule in the 2. and 3. p. present ind. Notice bu ritjl, cr rat ; bu, er Blcijl ; bu ^aitft (pronounced „^al[t")/ ^r pit ; bu lifteft or bu, er lafjt. The umlaut in this whole class is late ; in later M, H. G. they have it rardy. The " Rules " prefer the spelling i to ie, viz., :^ing, fing, ging. 131. 2. Division : au, ei, 5, u ie an, d, o, u. Here belong : '^antn, '^ieb (6 < tti), ge^aucn, + to hew ; laufcn, Hef, gelaufen, to run, + leap; ^el^en, ^ic§, gejeipen, to call, command, + hight; flopen (jliep), to kick, thrust ; ritfen (ricf)/ to call. 133] C0NJUGATI013". 43 Only fio^en and generally taufen take the umlaut: bu, er flop; bu ISuffl. ©(^eiben, once of this class, has gone into i; „ge^ie^en," according to i, is some- times heard, but must still be rejected as incorrect. Of this class there are a great many isolated participles of verbs that have changed conjugation, e. g.^ fcejc^eiben, modest (but bef* Pret. ind.: ic^ ftant) (ftunt))» Subj.: ftante (ftuttbe)^ Part.: geftant)en» According to yi ; from a stem ''stand." 3. Z^nn. Pres. ind. : i(^ t1;)m, t)u tbuj^, er ftut, n?ir tfeun, i^r t^ut, fie t^un* Subj. : i* t^ue, t>u t^uefl, er t^ue, n?ir t1^m, i|r t|ut, fie t^uen> Imp. sg.: t^u; pi., t^ut, t^un ®ie* Part.: t^uent). Pret. ind. : i(^ t^at, t)u t^atft, er t^^at, n?ir t^aten, i^r t^tet, fte t^aten. Subj.: x&) t|dte, bu t^ateft, er H^att, etc. Part.: get^an^ The full forms with c of these three verbs are not used in the indica- tive. The ^ is merely graphic, and is not pronounced, e. g., i^ gel^e is not ge-l^e, but ge or gc'c. 137. The compound verbs are not inflected differently from the simple verbs. Notice the position of the separable prefix, and ge- in separable compound verbs: \6^ fdjreibe art, f(^rie6 an; imp. fcfereibe (tu) an, id) Ijak angefi^riekn, id) merbe anfc^reiBen* The separable prefix stands apart from the verb in the simple tenses (pres. and pret.), but only in main clauses; ge-, gu- stand betvreen prefix and verb, angefd)rieBett, ansufi^reiben. Ex.: 3^ fd)reik, fd)rieb Den Srief ab, but mii^renD id) ten Srief abf(^rteb (dependent clause). In inseparable compounds notice the 138] ANOMALOUS VERBS. 47 participle has no ^e : ict^ i^erfte^e, i?erjlant), ^aBe ^erftanbeti, mxU ijerfte^tt. (See 108, 3.) 1. Notice a class of inseparable compounds derived from compound nouns. These have ge» They can be easily recognized by the chief stress falling on the first element: ha^ ^^rit'^jlitc!, verb fru'l)ftu(fen, frul)ftucftef gefrii^jlucft, to breakfast; ber 9f{a'tf(%la9, verb ra'tfc^lagen, ratWlagte, geratfc^lagt, to take council. 138. Example of a reflexive verb, e, g., ftd) freuen,to rejoice: Pres. i(^ frcue mi(^, tu freuft t)idj, er freut fid), mv freuen un^, i^r freut eucb, fte freueu ft*; i6> freute mic^, ^abe mi^ gefreut, n?ert)e mic^ freuen, n^er^e mi^ (^efreut i)ahn. FIRST PART SECOND SECTION. SYNTAX 142J SYiTTAX OF THE AETICLE. 51 SYNTAX. 139. For practical reasons we divide the Syntax into Special and General Syntax. The Special treats of the function of the word, inflected or uninflected, in a sentence. The General treats of the combination of words into a sentence, of the word-order, and of the combination of clauses into a compoimd sentence. It is of course difficult to keep these two divisions separate, as in fact all the differ- ent branches of grammar. Thus the separation of inflection and function, of phonol- ogy and inflection, of word-formation and syntax is a violent one. The division into special and general syntax is the custom of French grammarians, who have succeeded best in freeing their grammatical system from the strait-jacket of Latin and Greek grammars. SPECIAL SYNTAX. The parts of speech are treated here in the same order as they are in the Accidence. Syntax of the Article. 140. The use of the demonstrative pronoun as definite article is much older than that of the numeral „m" as indefinite article, //©in" was used where the definite article could not stand ; hence the plural of cin ^am is still Scanner. In O. H. G. the article is still lacking ; its use spread in M. H. G. , so that now it is almost a necessity. Some General Cases of Absence of the Article. 141. Proper names, names of materials always when pre- ceded by nouns expressing quantity and measure, have no article. Ex. : @oet|e erreic^te tin l^o^e^ 3llter. ©chiller ^axh 'otv^ Wtnima^xQ juttg, S3(ei ij^ ttjei(^er aU ®oId. gin 5)futtt) Budfer. 142. No noun preceded by a genitive can take an article: Deg T)en!eng %ciDtn ijl aerriffen (F. 1748). £et alten ©otter Bunt ©ettJtmmel (G.). 52 SYKTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [143- 143. There is no article before nouns (connected by nnX), It^eter, no(^ or unconnected) in certain set and adverbial phrases; in an enumeration of objects belonging to the same class or genus. Ex. : ®e(t unl) ®ut» $au^ mt) ^oU ^it ®ott fiir ^onig unt) 3SaterIan^» 3n @au^ nnX> SSrau^* (Bxnn unt) 35erftanr) i)erlier^ id) fdjier (F. 2504). 5^1*1 trt)if(^ ij^ te^ J^oren Siratt! no* @peife (F. 301). ©on ic^ nttt ©rtp, ^eipel, geter fcbreiBen? (F. 1732). Ura^ne, ®ro§mutter, ^ntttx unD ,^tnb in bumpfer 6tube beifammen fint) (Schwab). 3^^ ^if*' 3« S^tte, ipau^ an ^an^, ie Dttoneju Schiller's Tell and Wallen- stein, Goethe's Gotz and Lassing's M. you Barnhelm are full of examples of the second use (famiharity, etc.). !Die Sitfte be^ (Bofrateu. ^ar'i^ tern gertiinant) gemefen, tt>a^ Dcta^io mix wax . . . (Sch.). Sagt ftd) nennen ben ffiallenfieitt (Sch.) (contempt). I^e^rient fpielte ten '^at^an. 2Jletn greunt) 1))at ^en Sorot »er!auft (painting by Corot). 2)er §erMe^ ift Befc^aMgt* 2. Names of countries and provinces which are not neuter take the definite article. Most of these are feminine and a few masculine, viz., compounds : ^er Srei^gau, 3lfeeingau, ter (Suntgau; also ber ipaag ( + the Hague); ber, ta^ Slfa^. Femi- nines in -ei: Me ZMti\ SQaKadjet'; in -an x tie ^oltau, W SBetterau ; in -mar! : Me Wnmaxl, bie Dftmarl ; bie Sauft^, Me ®d)tt)ei§, Ik ^rimm, tie S!:t'oank, bte ^\al^. Some neuters in -lanb j ta5 Sogtianb, ba^ S3enbtlanb, bie 5^ieberlanbe, pi. 3. Names of oceans, lakes, straits, rivers, mountains, and forests always have the definite article, e, g.^ ba^ SWittelmeer, bie Dftfee, ber SoDenfee, ber Selt, ber (Bum, ber 0l^etn, bie t)om\i, let ^ara, ber @pejfart, bie Sllpen, ber ©{^njar^n^alb* 4. Names of the seasons, months, days of the week, of the streets of a city: „T)tx SBinter ift ein &}xmmann'^ (Clauilius). 3m S^ttuar, U^ ©onntag^, auf or in ber ^aiferftra^e, im grii^Ung. 148. Appellatives have an article as in English : tie 2:^rane quidt, bie @rbe ^at mi^ mieber (F. 784). For exceptions see 141-146. 149. Abstract nouns have no article when they denote a characteristic or state of mind: ?i}lut jeiget au(^ ber 9}?ameluc! ; 54 SY2!n?AX OF THE ARTICLE. [150- @e|or|am ifl m S^riften (Bijmud (Sch.). greut>e war in Zxoia'^ ipatten (id.) ^rieg ijl emig stt)tfd)en Sift un^ 2lrgwo^n (id.). But when they denote an act or motion they are treated as appel- latives. They may also take the article that has generahzing force, e. g,, Der Sot) ift t)er eiinben @oIt> (B.). "tk 2BaM ftet)t ttr uo(^ fret (Sch.). Die ^unft ift lang unt) furj ift unfer Seben (F. 558-9). \Die Sctfd)aft ^orM4 tro^I, aUeitt mir fe:^lt l)er ®IauBe (F. 765). T;a5 war ein ©^up ! (Sch.). 150. Names of materials have the generalizing article, which denotes the whole kind or substance, or an article that singles out a certain kind or quantity, e, g., ^tx SBein erfreut te3 mcn]6^m iperj (B.). "La^ ®olt ift foftBar. "Lit (BtdnhW ift \6^m^v^ out Braun. Without article: (Si(6er unt) ®o(t) :^a6e ic^ ni(^t (B.). Stut ift gefToifeit (Sch.). Sa^ mir ten beften Seeder ffiein^ in purem ©olfe reic^en (G.). 151. Collective nouns take an article except when taken in a partitive sense: 3Ba5 rennt tae SSol!? (Sch.). SBeit t>a^inten war nod) la^ gu§i)oI! (id.). 2Bir ^akn gug^ol! unt) 3fleiterei (id.). 152. All classes of noims qualified by an adjective, by a genitive, by a relative clause, etc., take an article in the singu- lar, excepting names of materials and nouns in the vocative, in the predicate or in certain adverbial phrases. The plural has the definite article or none. Ex. : J)er fleine ®ott t)er SBelt Heibt jlet^ »ott glei(^em ©cblat] (F. 281). Ter ®ott, tcr Sifen wa(^fen Ue§ . ♦ ♦ (Amdt). I^te §auptftaDt ^on gran!rei(^. But ((Btc) fprad^en laut ^od (^oI)en @inne unD ©efii^Ie^ (G.). 9lacb alter ^^eife. (£5 gab fdsbiire 3^iten a(5 tie unfern (Sch.). J:er alte Sarkrojfa (Uh.). 153. The genitive preceding a noun always has the article except a proper name : 3« te^ 'ilD'iarmor^ falte SBangen (Sch.). 3nt)e^ SBalte^ ?IJlitte (id.). Schiller's „an Ufer'^ S^lant)" Goethe would have made a compound, ,,Ufer grant.'' Comp^ „Sergee^ Ifeo^le" and other compounds of Goethe. 158] EEPETITIOK OF THE AKTICLE. 55 154. The definite article stands for an Eng. possessive pronoun, when the possessor cannot be mistaken. There may or may not be a personal pronoun as object in the sen- tence. Ex.: Ser ^opf t^ut mix \o tot^ (Song), ^abt i^r mtr Un ginger Blo^ genommen? (Sch.). (@te) xix^xt xbm leife tie ©d^ulter (H. and D. 4, 63). See 243, 3. 155. 1. In S. Gt. the definite article is always applied to members of the family instead of the possessive pronouns. In N. G., as in Eng., no article is necessary: ®ru§^ ten ^akx unb SJater^ 33ritber 1 (Sch.). 2. As with proper names so names of materials and abstract nouns often have the definite article in the genitive and dative merely to show the case : ber 1Slil6) Saffer 'oox^k^tn* 156. The definite article is used in German for the indefi- nite in English in a distributive sense : Sutter foftet anbert^al^ Waxt l^a^ 9)funD, a pound ; Mefe^ Znd) foftet 90 3)fenttig(e) Die SUe; fiinfmal ba^ 3^^^ or im ^a^xt. This " a " in Eng. represents the preposition " on/' and is not the indefinite article. 157. Sin can stand in German before certain indefinite pronouns and neuter adj. where it does not stand in Eng.: ein jeber^ ein jegltc^er, ein fDld}er, etn man(^er (better mant^ ciner); ein ft^t^, = a fixed sum ; ein me^rere^r = more ; ein njenige^, =: little. 3^ fc^reibe na(^|len^ ein me^reres^. Repetition of the Article. 158. Before each of several nouns of different gender the article must be repeated if it stand at all: Der 3?ater, t)ie 9Jlutter bie gin^eit ijor ^e^ ipauptmann^ $au^ (Song). If two nouns, con- nected by unb, denote different persons the article should be repeated : T)er Dnfel unt) fatl^t be^ ^inbe^ tt^ar M ber 2:aufe ^ugegen (one person). But ber Dnfel unb ber ^ai^t . ♦ ♦ (two persons). Both rules are often offended against by Luther, Goethe, and Lessing, and frequently in the spoken language : 2Benn man ben ^akx unb Did^ter mit cinanber ijergleid)en will . . . (Le.). The article before an apposition is treated as in English. 56 SYNTAX OF THE GEITDEB. [159- SYNTAX OF THE GENDER, 159. The grammatical gender of nouns is threefold, mas- culine, feminine, neuter. As to living beings, the nouns de- noting males are masculine, and those denoting females femi- nine. Ex. : ter gu(^^>, iom, Ux gute 3Kantt, 5^effe, ^uc(^t, Dd)^, Sod; Ik ^u|, 3tege, Safe, fc^bne "SRa^l, W (Ban, (Btnk. 1. Exceptions : nouns denoting the young of animals, diminutives, and ha^ SBeib, ba^ Mm\^ (see 59), ba^ ^rauenjtmmer are neuter. Ex. : ha^ %txkl, %mtn, ^alb, mm^n, ^xauldn. 2. Any grammatical gender is ascribed to the names of the species without regard to sex. Neuter: ba^ ^^ferb, ba^ ^^mm, ta^ ©(^af, ba^ «Rc^. Fem. : bie S^ad^ttgaH, ^meife, S3iene, Wlau^, 0latte. Masc. : ber %i\d), 160. Where the grammatical gender does not coincide with the natural, the following rules may be of service, based on the meanings of nouns and on their derivation. See 159, 1. Gender AccoRDiNa to meaning. 1. MascuHne are : The names of the points of compass, of the winds, seasons, months, days of the week; of mammals (a few small ones Hke Me ^an^, t)ie 3flatte excepted), most of the larger birds, most fish, and stones. Ex. : ter 5^ort) or ^^lor^en; ©ommer; %tixmx, Slugu'fl; 9Hontag, (SonnaBenl); t>er Sfel, Some, Slefant ; kr ©traug, 9lMer, efer, DDer, Sl6e ; tie gid)e, :^attne, Suiie ; Me 9lel!e, 9^ofe, Mbe, 5^effel, ^artoffcl; t)ie Slmeife, ffianje, Siene; tie 9lad?tigaII, @(^mal6e, Serd^e; also tie ^ra^e, Sule^ Die 2ie6e, 2:ugent), Suflent), I^emut, greuntlid)!ett, etc. 3. Neuter are : The names of places and countries except those always hav- ing the article (see 147, 2), collective nouns (particularly those with ®e-) ; most names of materials including metals, of the letters of the alphabet; other parts of speech used as nouns, particularly adjectives not denoting persons (see 169). Ex. : „ta5 fcfeone ©panten/' „eitt fletn '^axi^/' ta^ SSolf, ^eer, ®e^ birge, ®efcl)ug; tae §0(3, §eu, ^d)mala, Dbft; U^ ^x)tn, Slei, ^wpfer, 3tnn; ta^ 2B, g); ta^ Summein, „i:a^3 S^enn uuD ta^s ^Iber/'ta^ ®ute, ta^ SBa^re, ta^ ©d^one* ReiuAEK.— So many rivers are feminine because they are compounded with -aha ( + Lat. aqua) : SGJeicr and SBerra < Wesera(h), Werraha; fcie ©alja(d)). But notice ber Di^ein, SlRain. S)ie ©d^roeij, SEiirfel have the article really on account of their exceptional gender. American rivers are masculine : ber ^ubjon, ber 'iSflof)av>t. 161. Gender according to derivation and endings. 1. Masculine are : Most monosyllables by ablaut, e, g., ter (Spru(^, ©prog, ^ti6!i, @d)irm ; those in -tx, -Ux, -ner (denoting agents) ; in -et (denot- ing instrument) ; all in -ling ; many in -en ; dissyllabics in -z according to the n-declension (denoting living beings) ; in -ic^. Ex.: itx (Bd)xcikx, Mn^Ux, Wt'tner; tcx "Detfel, ^ebel, ter ?5remt)^ ling, (S^iinftUng, @dugling; t)er (^ec^en, £)egen; corresponding to Eng. -om, ^ufen, Sefen; ter ^mU, i'om, 33ote; ®anferic^, SBiite:? rid), gitticb. 2. Feminine are: Many dissyllabics (by ablaut, see 496) in -e ; abstract nouns in -e, mainly from adjectives ; in -ie, mostly foreign; many in 58 SYNTAX OF THE GENDER. [162- -t; all in -ei, -in, -uttg, -l)eit, -feit, -ft^aft; some in -ni^ and -fal; foreign ones in -age (see 163, 5). Ex.: Me ®ro^e, Jpb^e; Ik (Sprac^e, ®aBe: tie ^^^ilofop^ie, ©alari;? terie ; tie ipaft, ^a(^t, ,^raft; tie S^ig^^^i/ Surifterei, S}telotei; tie greuntin, 2el)rerin ; tie Dultung, SBitmung; tie greifceit, grbmmig^ feit; greuntfc^aft; tie SBiltiti^, gaulni^; tie Slamage, Sourage. 3. Neuter are: All in -(^en, -leiit ; most in -\d, -fal, -ni^, -turn ; nearly aU of the form ®e-e or @e- without e; some in -eL Ex.: ta^ ipiintc^en, ^naHein ; ta^ 3f^atfel, UberBleibfel; ta^ ©c^ic!::^ fal, ^abfal; ta^ ©etac^tnic, SSerma^tni^; ta5 ^ouigtum, S^riftentum (only two masc, ter S^eic^tuitt and S^^tum); tai: ©efilie, ©emiilte; ta5 (55eHlt, Q^efc^id ; ta^ Siintel, ©efintel, and the S. G. diminu- tives ta^ 3^itttel, Siibel, etc. On the whole the gender of noans has changed very little in the history of the lan- guage. Ex. of changes are: bie 0i^ %oxma't, formatum or -us; \>a^ fRu^, < V. L. risma (f.) ; ba^ ^reuj, < c/ruc{em) (f ). 2. Examples of nouns that have changed gender in analogy with Ger- man words similar in meaning and ending : ber Biegelf < tegula ; ber 60 SYl^TAX OF THE GENDER. 164- 5)?armor, marmor, n., on account of ber (Stein (see 160, 1) ; ber ^orper, < c&iyus, n. ; ber ^aba'ijcr, < cadaveVy n., on account of ber Seib, ber 2eic^^ nam, and the many masculines in -er; bie 3^uinmer, < numeruSy since bie 3a^l» ©uropa, ©parta, 5lt^en, Zx^sk, now all neuter (see 160, 3}. 3. Nouns in -arium, -orium, -erium^ -arCy became all masculine in analogy with H. G. words in -er, < cere < ari : ber Sllta'r, < altare ; ber teller, < cellarium ; ber 5)faUer, < psalterium ; ber SSet^er, < O. H. G. wiwdri < vivarium ; ber ^iafkx, < It. piasira, f., < V. L. plastrum. 4. Neuter nouns, whose plural ended in -a in Gr. or L., became feminine in German from analogy with feminines in -e, < dy and also through Romance influence : bie S5iBel, < hiblion, V. L. bibUa ; bie Drgel, < orgamim, -a ; bie ^^frunbe, < V. L. provenda (pi.) ; bie 8tubie, < studium ; bie '^xmxtt < prcemivm. 5. Words in -a'ge, masculine and feminine in French, are all feminine in G., e. g., bie SBaga'ge, bie SSlama'ge, bie Soura'ge, etc. ^ie Sd)rift, < scrip- turn, bie 3^ac^t, < pactum, are due to analogy with G. nouns in -t, viz., bie ^va(^t, . (13naben ; bie §errfcf)aften» Compare Eng. thanks, loves (in Shakspere), favors, regards. 172. To the sg. -mam in composition corresponds often -leutc, pi. only, which, in sense really corresponds to 9)Jenf(^, 5j)?enf(^en, without regard to sex. Examples : (Sbelmann — ©beHeute, gentry ; ^Ganbmann, peasant, — lOanbleute, country folk : (£^emann, married man, — (S^elcute, married people ; but the pi (S^emcinner means " married men " ; ^u^rmann — f^u^rleute, driv- ers, carters ; ^aufmann — ^aufleute, merchants, etc. But 23iebermann, hon- 177] SYNTAX OF SINGULAR AND PLURAL. 63 est man ; (S^renmann, man of honor ; (Staat^mann, and a lew more, form only the regular plural in -er» 173. For certain nouns which form no plural, plural compounds are used, some of which have also a singular. — E.g. : \iCi^ %tVitx bie i^euer^Briittflc ber Slob bie Slobeafdttc ber mi bie Olatfd^ldgc ber Dan! bie S)an!raptt9en 174. Nouns only used in the plural are : a. Diseases : 23lattertt; SJ^aferit, Oioteln* h. Certain dates : Djlerm ^Jftngjlenr 2Bei^na(^ten, ^erien, ^aften, iit 2Bo(^ett = in childbed. c. Names of relationship : ©Item; ©e^ritber, brothers, as ©ebriiber ©rimittf the brothers Grimm, but generally only in the names of firms ; ®efd)tt)ifter, brothers and sisters, rarely in the sg. — brother and sister ; other nouns as ©eftlbe, Binfen, a3rieff(^aften, ©infitnfte, etc. 175. Masc. and neuter nouns denoting quantity, weight, extent, preceded by numerals, stand in the singular, but fern, nouns (except SKarf) in the plural as in Eng., e.g,, 6 ®la^ 23ier, 10 ga§ SCein; „att bie treimal ^untierttaufent) ?iKann" (Song of Prince Eugene), 5 gu§ tief, 3 ^ar! 70 5)fenntg(e), 70 x 7 = ftebenaig md fte^en mal (B.). Feminines : 3 5[ReiIen breit, 10 §(af(^en ^^xi^ mixi, 12 ©tutt^en^ The coins, ba^ 3al)r, ber ^onat, ©c^ritt gener- ally stand in the plural, e, g,, 50 5)fenntge ma(^en 5 ®rof(^en, 3 Dufatett, 20 @^rttte lang; yet also sing., „90 3a^r— geMdft gum Sobe"; 7 mmai{t) alt; but gefen mart 176. In older German the plural was used in all genders just as in Enor. That the singular was ever used came from the analogy of masc. nouns and " diu mare" with the neuter nouns, in all of which sing, and pi. would not be distinguished. See 431, 2. The fem. of the n-declen- sion never followed this analogy. For ^ann see 59. Compare the Eng. ** a ten-year-old boy," now colloquial. ** Year " is an old plural just like 3a^r. In the D. pi. the coins, etc. , in 175 almost always have en» 177. Notice the use of the singular in German for English plural in 64 SYNTAX OF THE CASES. [178- such phrases as : unter bem ijterten «nb fitnften ©rabe norblic^er 33reite (Hu.) ; ber erfle unb ber fiinfte ^m tvurbe(n) gefungen; ble brei (Sd)uler miiffen jur ©trafe bte ^anb auf ben SfWunb legcn; 'oitU ^akn ba^ ^^ekn ijerloren, many lives were lost or many lost their lives. SYNTAX OF THE CASES. Nominative. 178. The nominative is the case of the subject and of direct address: 9)letn greunl), tie ^ntm ter SSerciangen^eit ftnD nn^ tin Suc^ tttit fteten Siegeln (F. 575-6). ^it cn&j, $err Doctor, au [pa^tereit ifl e^^renijoll unt) ift Oeioinn (F. 941). Absolute N. 297. 179. Neuter verbs and verbs in the passive voice which govern two accusatives in the active, are construed with a predicate nominative. See 270. Such are : 1. (Seitt, ti?erben, Heiben, biinfen, fd^etnen, l^ei^en (to be called), gelten, n?a^fen, jlerkn, etc.: T)t^ ^tmmel^ f^iigungen ftnb immer bie kjlen (Le.). SlUer ^ob mxh neue^ Seben (He.), ©r mxb ein grofer 5^rinj M^ an fein (Snbe fc^einen (Sch.). 2)a^ atlein mad)t fc^on ben SSeifen, ber ftc^ jebcr biinft ju fem(Le.). These verbs denote a state or transition. Preceded by aU the construc- tion may be called an apposition : ^(tein er jlarb al^ (£§ri)l (F. 2953). 3^ fomme aU ©efanbter be^ ©ertd^t^ (Sch.). Sr gilt aU ein Teid)er ?D^ann, = He passes for . . . 2. Verbs of calling, thinking, making, choosing, scolding, viz., ^enannt, gebac^t, angefe^en, o^tma^t, betrad^tet, ^miit^lt, 9efcl)Dltcn tverbcn, and others: SBil^elm i)on Dranien tt>trb ber ©c^melger genannt, SStl^elm ijon*bef ^iJormanbie, ber (Sroberer. ©r tDarb ein !Dieb gefi^olten, aia ein 3;augemd^t(3 betra(|tet» 3(^ barf mi^ nic^t be^ &lMt^ ;2ieMin9 Welten (Korner). Genitive. 180. The genitive is used chiefly as the complement of nouns and adjectives, bat also of the verb (object). The gen- itive with nouns expresses the most varied relations. The principal ones are briefly given and illustrated below. Ger- man does not differ from other languages. 181] SYNTAX OF THE CASES — GENITIVE. 65 1. G. of origin, cause, autliorsliip, relationsliip : ©a^ 2Bunbcr i]! be^ ©laubene Uel))le^ ttnb (F. 766). ©oet^e^ %ai IBergtf memtti(^t» 3d) benfe betn (G-.). iJunger^ jlerBen. 2)a^ lol^nt ftd^ ber Mxi^t md)t, = It is not worth the trouble. S^ ftnb nii^t allc fret bie i^rer tetten fpotten (Le.). ©ekauc^t ber Beit, [te ge^t fo f(|nett ijon ^innen (F. 1908). 185. After verbs governing an A. of the person the G. of the thing stands as remoter object, such as judicial verbs, those with privative meaning, verbs of emotion ; after many reflexive verbs with meanings similar to the adjectives in 182, e,g., gei^en, ijerllagenj'rcifpre^en, bef(^u(r?tgen, berauben, entlaben, entlaffen, entbinten, iiber^eben; i^erfic^ern, be(el)ren, ma^nen, and others ; fid) freuen, h^k^ nm, erinnern, fc^amen, beflci^en, erfrec^en, ft(^ tne^ren* Ex. ; ©ntlafft tttid^ meiner Sl^nen^jrobe, i(^ iriU eud^ eurer tt)teberum entlaffen (Le.). 2Ber fann mi^ einer ©iinbe jeil^en ? (B.). Semanb be^ Sanbes^ ijermeifen ; eine^ ^txhn^^tn^ anflagen, iiberful^ren, etc. (Sntfc^Iage bi^ aller f(^n)arjen ®ebanfen (Le.). X)u barfjl bic^ beiner SSa^l ni($t fd^amen (Sch.). But many of these gen- itives are supplanted by anff iiber + A., and by A. alone. 186. Certain impersonal verbs expressing feelings, which are construed with the A. of the person feeling and with the G. of the cause and object of the feehng. Ex. : (£a e!elt mt(|, t^ rent, erbarmt, jammert, ijerbriegt mt(^ ; e(3 lo^nt jt(|* ^arob erbarmt ben |)trten be^ alten ^o^en ^mn (Uh.). Unb ba er ba^ 35ol! fal^e, {amnterte t^n beffelMgen (B.). But the nominative supplants here the A. of the person, and the A. the G. in the spoken language as a rule; „e^" was again felt as A. See 183. Ex.: 2)a^ ^ereut mi($, bauert mi(§» 2)er ©erec^te erbarmt ftd^ feinee SSteJe^ (B.). Adverbial Genitive. 187. It expresses place, time, manner, and other adverbial relations. Ex.: Place: linfer ^anb, red^ter f)anb, aller Drten, "everywhere." 3^ moc^te (it is not likely that . . .) biefe^ SBege^ fobalb ntc^t n?ieber fommen (Le.). Time : biefer Za^t, be^ 5lbenbi3, M^ Wtoxg,tn^ in ber ^^rit^e." Manner: trocfnen i^u^e^, dry-shod; |le()enben ^u§e^r immediately; ijer^ niinfttger 2Beife, reasonably. (Bie famen un^errid^teter i^er- JU-, and those with noun, adjective, or adverb: leiD t^un, nJO^l^ mollen, fauer n^ert^cn, guftatten !ommen, mx^ madden, gu tetl n?ert)en, ba^ ^^ort terpen, "to defend,'" etc. 1, na^en, nad^ge^^en, begegnen, gleid)ett, d^neln, pfel)en, entfprccfcon, feWen, entgekn, naifte^en; 2, gefat(en,tan!en, geniigen, Bel)ac|en, l)uli:igen, tnigfallen, fc^metdjeln, laffen (to look), i^ro^en, grollen, fludjen; 3, ^elfen, nii^en, ^ienen, betfte^en, frommen, m^jxtn, fc^aten; 4, gebieten, Befe^k«/P^^«/9^^^^^^J^/f'^^3^^; 5, treid)en, triUfa^ren, miterfte^en, ttJtterftreBen, tro^en ; 6, antmorten, ernjiet)em, gefebren, etgnen, kiftimmen, auret)en, trauen, glauben, ux<^ trauen* 194] SYNTAX OF THE CASES — -DATIYE. 69 Ex. : ^e^ ;0e6en« ungemifc^te greube waxh feinem ©terblic^ett ju teil (Sch.). ©traflofe ^rei^eit fpric^t ben ©Uten ^o^n (id.). X)u rebefl i^m ba^ 2Bort, anftatt il)n anjuflagen (id.). !Dae @te|en n)trb it^m \antx, It is hard work for him to stand. 1. 2)u glet(^|l bem ®et|l, ben bu kgretf|l; ni(^t mir (F. 512). Da^ jn)ing|l bu t^r (ber ^ainx) nic^t a5 mit |)ebeln unb mit k U^x fc^lcigt feinem ®lucfltd)en (id.). 193. After impersonal verbs: e5 al)nt, MkU, ddt, ^tl)t, fcMt, (;ekid)t, e^ graut, graufet, gelingt, Itegt (mir) an dwa^, fommt (mir auf ttwa^) an, fd^au^ert, f^trin^dt, traitmt, ^kmt, and many verbs in 190 can be counted here : T)em 35ater ^raufet^^ (G.). S^ Itegt mir i^iet taran, I care much for it. X)em ^aifer tvarb'^^ fauer bei W wttb 6ei ^alte (Bu.). Dative after Adjectives. 194. These have meanings similar to the verbs in 190, e, g., angencto, al)nlid), eigcn, fcinb, folgfam, Henftkr, gnatig, t)oIi^, 70 SYNTAX OF THE CASES — DATIVE. [195- ttad)teilig, i^erfcun^en, autra^li^* Ex.: I^asJ f!e|t i^m al)nlid^ = that's like him. 3(u(^ mar ^er ^Infang tl)ren Siinf^en l)olD (Sch.). "Lk meiften fint) mix jugetfcan (id.), "devoted." 195. Substitution of preposition + case, both after verbs and adjectives. %m, auff an, gegen, iikr + accusative, ntit and ijon + dative may replace the dative : 3^ jiirtte auf btc^, i(^ glauOe an hi6^, ijertraue auf i^n; ^in freunbll(5& gegen bic Strmen. 2)er Qlnjug (suit) ift fe^r palTenb fiir bid), etc. 196. Verbs with unsettled constructions. With a number of verbs usage is either unsettled or the classics still show two cases, while the spoken language has settled upon one, e. g., now only e^ baud)t mix, but e^ biinft mic^, classics have D. or A. after either, ©laukn with D. only, or an + A.; but F. 3438: 3d) glaub' i§n (®ott) md)t, S^ efelt mir and mi(^. 3)lan beja'^lt ben ^ned)t (person), ba^ 33rot (thing), bem SScider ba^ S3rot. 3(^ rufe bir, I call out to you ; ic^ rufe bid^, I call you, etc. 197. The few reflexive verbs after which the reflexive pro- noun stands in the dative are really transitive verbs, and the pronoun is the indirect object: Sr biltet fic^ etma^ ein, " he imag- ines sometiiing," "is conceited." 3d? ^^^H niir fc^meid)eltt (Le.); but see 190, sub 2: 3^^ ^^n!e mir bie ©ac^e fo. ACCUSATDTE. 198. The accusative is the case of the direct object after transitive verbs, including many inseparable compounds of intransitive verbs with 6e-, ent-, tx-, ^tx-, itx-, Duri^-, l)inter-; liber-, wnter- urn- ijott- tiJte^er-; such as Befa^ren, Befol^en, Be;? feu(^ten, cntfraften, entfd^ettien, erfa^ren, erftnben, ijerfac^en, ^ertreiben, jerftreuen, rur(^fe'geln, Mnterge'^en, iikrfe'^en, umge'ben, ^ollki'ngen, mieber^o'Ien. Ex.: %x fe^t etnen ^JJ^ann n?te anbere me^r (F. 1874). S^crad^te mtr SJernitnft unb 3[Bif7enfd)aft (F. 1851). t)k OJitkn l)af*en mx^ vertriekn (Folk-song). (Soof ^at bte 5Belt umfcgelt. S3. Sta^Ior ^at ben f^aitf! iiBerfe^t. 199. Two accusatives may stand, one of the person and one of the thing, after verbs meaning to ask for, to inquire, 201] SYl^TAX OF THE CASES— ACCUSATIVE. 71 teach, to cause to do a thing or have a thing done, and simi- lar ones, e.g., fragen, le^^ren, {affen, Htten* Ex.: 28er le^rte M(^ tiefe gemaltlgen 2Corte ? (Le.) Se:^re mid) t^un na(ft tieinem 5Bo^(^ cjefallen (B.) (t^un = second ace). SSoHen ®ie ben Slrjt nid)t fommen lajfen ? 1. After fragen, Mtten, uberreben, kreben, the two accusatives stand, as a rule, only when the accusative of the thing is a neuter pronoun, e. g., x^ Vim, frage bic^ etma^, xd^X^, ijieL If the pronoun is lacking, then fragen m^ + D., bitten urn + A., itberrcben ijon or ju + D. or the G. without prep- osition is the prevailing construction : ^afl bu m6) i|m gefragt ? 3c^ ^abe i^tt barum gebeten» Siigen ftrafen, SBunber ne^men govern an A. of the person : ^a^ nimmt mi(^ SBunber, " I wonder at that." 2. But these pronouns, baS, nic^tS, wiel, stand for old genitives which were felt as accusatives. The construction was : 2Bunt>er nimmt mic^ be§ or beffen, wonder seizes me on that account. (See 186.) Sftgen is probably a G. of cause : ^emanb tregen ber Sugen fti-aten. Sernen for Ier)ven, though found in Goethe, is wrong. 200. Notice a choice of construction in certain cases, when the personal object is further defined by another case or prep- osition and case. The verbs that concern us here are such as fdjlagen, treffen, treten, ftec^en, and similar ones. 1. Dative of the person and accusative of the affected part: 3c^ ii^af^e mir tie S^^imlt or meine ^anbe* 2. Dative of the person and preposition + A. : 3(^ h'ete t^m auf ben gu^, fc^Iagc i^m in'g %t\x6^i. 3. Accusative of the person and preposition + A. : SSir fdjlagert i^en geint auf'^ §au|jt. SCnr treten bie ©djlange anf ben ^opf. The choice is between 2 and 3. But 2 is preferable after intran- sitive verbs; 3 after transitives. 201. These accusatives are both object-accusatives, but after verbs meaning to name, scold, regarding, and others of similar meaning, the second accusative is a predicate or facti- tive accusative, while the first is direct object, e, g., after nennen, fd^elten, f^lmpfen, glauben, taufen, ^cigen (trans.). 72 SYKTAX OF THE CASES — ACCUSATIVE. [202- Ex. : 3n tiefiler , anfangli(^, enrltd^, (joffen, fetben, ftlbern, glcifern; 4, the comparatives and superlatives in 76, 2. 1. If they do stand in the predicate, they must be inflected, and the noun may be understood, e> g., bie ;Sicfcrung ill eine fiunbli(^e, not ftiinbli(^» For the adjectives in -en and -em, ^on 4- noun is substituted, e.g., etn S3e^er ijon purem ®olbc. But in poetry the adjective is found: 2)er @tul;l i|l elfenbeinern (R.). 212. The attributive adjective is inflected and agrees with its noun in gender, number, and case : W.\i filler ^oft m\^ frifdem (Sd)aum ^at er mid inol)! gena^;ret (XJh.). It may stand uninflected, however: 1. Before a neuter noun in N. (and A.) (very rarely before a masc. or fem.) : '^}unne ?QZutter ^ai mand giiltm (S)emant) (G.). S^ ift eln putelnarrif(^ 3:ier (F. 1167). Fre- quently in certain phrases like „bar ®elt)", *' cash " ; „anf gut %\M\ Bare : (l)ro§ m^i^i m\^ ml Sift (Lu.). Xa^ 2llter \^ ein ^ofli(^ ?0^ann (G.); ,,freml nnt fremter @toff'' (F. 635.). 2. When it stands after the noun, mainly in poetry; commonly after coins, weights, and measures: Xer §auptmann fii^rtim ©d)ilt) tin 214] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 75 3fto0lein rot ^on ®oIte nn)^ einen Sber mil^ (TJh.). Sin @(^n?arm ^m ®a\kn gro^ um Mn (Bii.). S^t^n gu^ rbeinifd^, fiinf ?>fun^ pmifd)* In prose also, when the adjective or participle has adjuncts: "tovt dn gutarttge^, gertttete^ §antel^i)ol!, fd^ii^elgent) »ott Un iippigen grud)ten tint^ gefegneten gletpe^, trac^fam auf ®efe^e, tie feine 3Bot)l::^ t^ater it^aren (Sch.). 3. Of two adjectives the first stands unin- flected in certain set phrases; when the two express one idea; in poetry, very frequently in Schiller : "Lit grop^erjoglidj kt)ifcbe 3flegierung; t)a5 foniglid) ^reupifd^e B^^^^^"^^* SBel? tern, t)er an ten n?toig alten §au^rat i^m rii^rt (Sch.). £:en falfd) ^errdterifc^en '^at (id.). „3tt He meit unt» Breite 2Belt" (G.). Schiller has ^tranrig pnftrer ^Irgiro^n"; „iT?eItItd) ettle $)o^eit"; „D ungliidfeltg jammer^ol^ ler Zag^^' ; „mit graufam tenfeltfc^er Suft/' etc. 1. Sauter, and generally eitcl, both in the sense of "pure," *' nothing but," also the adj. in -er, 507, 2, are undeclined : 2)a^ ij^ lautcr Unftnn. ©ffet eitel unQcfciuert ^rot (B.). 2)er Joiner !Dom» 213. The attributive adjective is inflected weak after cer- tain limiting words, viz., after the definite article and pronouns declined like it; after ein, lein, and the possessives, excepting the N. sg. of all genders and the A. sg. neut. and fern. Ex. : ber gute ^Ipfelbaum (Uh.); ^ur gliidli(^en Stunt e ; p {enem frokn %t\k; eine^ fdjonen ^aj}e^ ; an einem langen ^tjle (Uh.); fein griineg ^am (id.); eine arme Sauerin (N. and A. sg.); ein feit)ene^ ^(eit) (N. and A. sg.). 214. The adjective is therefore declined strong, when not uiiinfiected (see 218) and when not preceded by any of the above Umiting words, mentioned in 213, e. g,, §oIte (Sefenfud^t, fii^e^ $offen (Sch.). ©tumme fitter toter ©cba^e (Platen ?). Also after the uninflected pronouns n?eld), foIc6, i)iel, menig, me^r, tixoa^, nic^t^, and after uninflected numerals. Ex.: Sr o^i^i ^em treuen ^irten man^ Blanfe^ (Stiid (piece of money) ba^on (Uh.). 5l>eld) reic^er §immel (G.). ©oli^ treffli^er ^Jlonard^ (Sch.) (see 216, 4; 221). 76 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [215- 215. The syntactical distinction between strong and weak inflection of the adjec- tive, though very old, is by no means clearly drawn even now. The oldest inflection of the adjective is the so-called " uninflected," identical with the strong noun declen- sion. When the pronominal endings spread over the adjective declension, forming the present strong adjective declension, the adjective probably was still declined strong even after a pronoun (ind. article). Of this there are traces from O. H. G. down to the nth century. The u-declension of the adjective is a characteristic of the Ger- manic languages. Having less distinctive and fewer endings than the strong, it is natural that the adjective should be declined according to it, when preceded by a word which had the strong endings. This has given rise to the syntactical distinction and to the feeling that two strong forms should not stand side by side. When an adjective be- came a substansive or was used as such, it was always inflected weak, with or without article. This explains 221, 1. In Gothic the present participle and the comparatives were always inflected weak. In O. H, G. appear only a few strong comparatives and superlatives. 216. Unsettled usage as to strong and weak forms. !♦ The strong genitive sg. m. and n. turned weak in the 17th cen- tury, and this is now the prevailing form : w^o^e^ ^)l\it^" (Bii.); blut^gert 9{u^m^ (Uh.). „2Borte fii^eu ^and)^" (Sch.). The pronouns always remain strong, except itntx, jeber, of which a weak form is rare, e. g., jeben ^olU (Uh.) ; jenen Xa^^ (Bii.). This weakening is due to the feeling, that two strong forms should not stand together. Se3 215, 217. 2. After personal pronouns the rule is strictly the strong form, as the pronoun is not a limiting word. But as early as M. H, G. weak forms begin to appear. Usage now favors : after tc|, bu, er (in address), mt^, t)i(| only the strong form, e. g., «bu fiarfer ^oitig^fo^n" (Uh.) ; i^ armer 2)?ann; after mir, bit mostly the strong form ; after wir, t^r the weak (if fern, always), e,g., 2Ber nie fein SBrot mit 2;i)ranen ap ♦ ♦ ♦ ber fennt eu(^ nic^t, i|r ^immlift^en !Wac^te I (G.). In w^cgrit^t i^x, fd)cne 1)amen ! (G.), the comma makes a difference. After un^ and zu^ (A.) strong and weak are equally frequent. After itn^ and eud^ (D.) strong and weak coincide of course : 9J?an foHtc euc^ fd^Ied)te terle ^eijlecfen (arrest) laffett. (£ud^ faulen S3urf(^en ift je^t ber SBrotfor^ fjo^er ge'^dngt. 3. In the vocative the rule now is strong form both in sg. and pi., e.g., Un^crfdydmter ! n)ennbt(^ jcmanb ge^ort ^dtte (G.). t)u, armer ®etft (Sh.). The plural is still found weak, but rarely, as : ;Cieben ^reunbc, c^ ^ab Beffre Beitcn aU bie unfern (Sch.). In O. H. G. the weak form was the rule ; in M. H. G., the strong in the sg. 4. After certain pronouns, pronominal adjectives, and indefinite 219] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 77 numerals, sucli as folc^e, mX^t, citttge, etltc^e, aUe, manege, feine, and others, there stands in the N. and A. pi. very frequently the strong form against the rule, but rarely in the G. pi. This strong form is the older. Even after biefe and jene strong adjectives may he found in the classics. Ex. : ©er SBlutttenpnbler ^at feme f^one Oiofen me^r. So ^a^ bu folc^e ^db^^^erfaulte 23irnett gefauft ? After the G. pi. imkx and breier the weak adjective is fre- quent, hut in the spoken language these genitives are very rare : ber ^nfauf »on imi neuen ^aufern or imi neuer ^ciufer, and not jweier neuen (or -er) ^aufer* 217. If two or more adjectives hold the same relation to the noun, they have the same inflection. If the second adjective, however, he more closely related to the noun, forming a joint idea, then it usually stands in weak form in G. and D., not in N. and A It can often he formed into a compound noun, and has less accent than the first adjective : (£r traftierte Utt^ mit fc^Iec^tem roten Seine (= 9flottt)ein); bie ^olgen ^lutiger l)itrgerlt(|en ^riege {= SSurgerfriege). 1. After certain adjectives like folgenber, oBtger, ertr»a^nter, gebac^ter, etc., the second adjective, as a rule, is inflected weak in all cases : ©enannte^ unumjlop^e 9)rittjipf oMger anerfannte oliaiften So^ ift fein gliitfli^e^." The adjective (or participle) is also uninflected when it is an appositional or factitive predicate : ffiir famen gliicfli(^ an* ^m, ta^ ftni? id) tumm (F. 961). IDer Olaube mac^t felig (B.). 219. Certain adjectives are only used predicatively. Some of these are really nouns, like feint), frennt), ^eil, fi^a^e, not, nii^e, fc^ulD* Others, originally adjectives or past participles, have been restricted to this use, like ^abt^aft, ab^olt), getrojl, anftd)tig, ^erluftig* All of them have not yet become full adjectives; and many, if with adjective form, are of late derivation : abfpenftig, ab^oli?, abmentig, au^fint)ig, ^anbgemein* Ex.: Cttilie 78 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [220- fonnte Dem SJ^atc^en nic^t feint) fein (G.). Sin fd^oner 3Wann, cine fd)one grau! ift ^er X1re!tor ^ludlid) genug^i^rer ^ab^aft ju n^erDen, fo . ♦ ♦ (id.). S)ie ^nec^te mur^en ^antigemeim 1. In O. H. G. the adjective in the predicate is still inflected, though not always. In M. H. G. it is rarely inflected. In N. H. G. roller and ^aibtx are stereotyped strong forms used for both numbers and all gen- ders : ^ie 9^a(^t \\t ^al6er l;iu (coll.) ; ,,be^ ^ad)t^ urn ^alkr 3tt>Hf" (student song). ^oUtx ©d^merjctt unb ^ranf^cit (B.). Substantive Use of the Adjective. 220. The adjective when used as a noun is inflected ac- cording to the rules already given for the adjective proper : ^Qlit ^leinem fangt man an, mit ®ro§em ^oxt man auf (Prov.). "Ln (B6>mxt an meiner 2in!en (Korner). tit Srften merten ^ie Se^ten fein (B.). For gender see 160, 3. No inflection is the rule in certain set phrases: ®(eid) un^ (Sleid) gefedt fid) gem (Prov.). 3ung uni) 2llt, ®ro^ unt ^lein, 9lei4 unr 5Irm, Don ^lein an, t>on 3nng auf; also in the names of languages : Snglifc^, granjbftfcb ; mein geliebte^^ Xeutf^ (F. 1223). SBie feei^t i^ie^ auf Stalienifc^ ? gr ^at i)on .^int) auf 9lorn?egif^ gefonnt. Also of colors: ®vm, 33(au. 221. Usage admits of many irregularities. 1. The weak form in the plural when no article precedes as ©ebtentett, SSeamteUf ©(^onen, 3ungen, or rarely the strong form in the singular like any feminine noun, invariable in the sg. : ber et and tret now and then occur still : '^'^zSjix ^tVi<^tXi 9Runt m^M aHe SBa^rtjett futtt» (Prov.). (Here ,,3meier" shows the case; jmet 3^W3^« SWunt) would not be cleai\) ^^t i)on eln^ Bi^ l)un^ert» 1. To express the year the cardinal is merely added to „tm 3a:^r(e)'' or to ,,itt/' as im 3a|re ^k^ii^n ^unt ert txa Vixi^ cidjtatg, or shorter, in 1813* The cardinal shows the year, the ordinal the month : ®ot^e ftarb ten 22ten SQlarg 1832. ^anno^er, ten (!♦) erften 5luguft 1881 ♦ The ordinals used only attributively, see 211. 2. The time is expressed in various ways. Answering to such questions as: ©ie^iel U^r ifl e^, treld^e '^t\i ift e^ or ^aben njtr ? mie ifi e^ ^Xi ter 3^tt ? we say : ©^ if^ ^molf t^orbet, afcer noc^ nic^t ein^. (E^ ifl zvx SStertel tret or auf t)ret,or txn SStertel n^^ (iiber) 3»ei (all mean a quarter past two). S^ ijl trei Siertel trei or auf 229] SYNTAX OF THE l^TUMERALS. 81 txtx or tin 35iettel ijor Wx, = a quarter of three. SiJ ij^ ^att jtrolf, = half past eleven, on the same principle as i>ierte1^aI6 (see 229). We can say: 20 9Hinutett nac^ i^lxt (past ten), ^mn^iQ m jebtt (of ten). Der Bug fii^rt 3 U^r 20 Wlimtm nai^mittag^ ah. SBir ttJoUen un^ urn funf treffen* 227. Used substantively the cardinals are more frequently inflected, having a plural in -e (see 429) and a dative in -en (see 79): S0 n^aren i^rer funf(e), stvclf(e)* 1. Colloquially tliis -e is very commonly used as far as 19 incl., even when the figure itself be meant, which stands in the feminine singular : !Dtefe 5l(|t(e) x]i m(^t pt gemac^t. !Diefc 5^eun(c) ftc^t fc^tef. ©If if^ bte ©unbc. (£lfe u^erf(^reitet bie je^n ®et)ote (Sch.). 2. !Die 9)?iIIio'n, bie SBiKio'n, bie SDhHiarbe are regular nouns, and, unlike ^unbert and taufenb, stand in the plural after the cardinals, e.g., brei MiU Itonen, but fiinf^unbert, M^ taufenb. ®a^ ^unbert, ba^ 2:aHfenb are common nouns, pL: ^Uttberte + hundreds, STaufenbe + thousands: e.g., ju |)unber^ ten, a hundred at a time ; :6et ^unberttaufetiben bie 2)?enf(^en hxMtn (Le.). 228. ^SSeibe^' corresponds to Eng. "both "in form and use: 3P t>ag 5>fert) an bei^en Slugen Hto ? It may have the defi- nite article before it: Me 6eit)en M^e, "both the cows." 1. The singular Beib- means " either," "each " (of two). S3etbe^ la§t f!^ "^oren = either statement is reasonable ; ba^ Slbenbma^l itnter ^eiber ®c=* jlalt, the communion in either form ; but the masc. and fern, are archaic. 2)eitn ju einem gro^en ^annc ge^ort kibed : ^leinigfetten aU ^leinigfetten unb iDt^ttQe Dtnge aU iwtt^ttge 2)inge ;^u l^eftanbeln (Le.). 93etbe^ has supplanted kibe, heidiu (pl.)» which are still common in the 16th and 17th centuries. Notice beibe^ — unb = both — and. Seibe^, ein loMtc^er ^onig unb mdc^ttger ©(^winger ber Sanje (Bii.). 229. 1. Peculiar are the compounds of the ordinals with ^alB following them and felb preceding them : 55iert(e)'^atB (3 J), neunt(e)'^al^ (8-^), meaning ba^ ijierte nur ^alB or tueniger ein :^aI6, \)Cl^ neunte nur l^al^. ^reije^ntel^alb %0i^ = 12 %(i^ aber ba^ 13te nur ^alk Ags., Icelandic, Danish, and L. Gf. have the same forms, though in the two latter "half" precedes the ordinal. It does not go back to 0. H. G. ©elbanber = er(feI6)l) ber jnjeite, two of them ; felbbretje^^nt, himself the 13th, thirteen of them (G.) ; felbbritt, feIBt)iert gen- erally uninflected. (Selbfl jwanjigfler (Le.). The cardinal is not common, 82 SYNTAX OF THE PEESOKAL PROiq^OUK. 230- but Lessing has wfelb fiinfjigcr/' This composition is more common than l^alb- in the modern dialects. 3. Notice also the cardinals in -er, as in ben fiinftiger 3al)ren — either "from 1850-60" or " from 50-60 years old." It is now classical. This -er occurs in the names of the unit, ten, etc. : ber ^intx, ber B^^ner, etc. See 507, 1. 3u itotit, britt also occur for ju jtpeicn, breien. SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. Syntax of the Personal Pronoun. 230. 1. Du, sg., i^r, pi., are used in familiar intercourse in the family and among intimate friends, in addressing God, in sermons, in solemn discourses and in poetry. Ex. : ^ennft in Da^ Sant), mo Die Sitronen bliilm ? (G.). Sliuler, alter 55ater I In fannft t^en 3:ag ter greil)eit ntc^t md)v f c^ a u e n ; In foUft i^n^oxcn (Sch. ). (Sr^ab'ner ®eift, tu gaBft mix, gabft mix attee, toaxnm id) bat (F. 3218). 2. ^u, 3. p. pi., is used everywhere else, even among rela- tives in some families; also when grown children address the parents: S>o tr>o^tten @le, mnn id) fragen tarf ? 3. This peculiar use of ©te sprang up early in the 18th century. It is due, no doubt, to the use of the singular Sr and ®ie in address, which were the height of politeness in the 17th century. Gv and Sie are due to the use of §ei"r and %xa\x in direct address. In Chamisso's „^eter ©c^Ieint^l" the gray-coat always addresses Peter with „fcer §err," e.g.^ ,/9J2i33C fcer ^crr nieine 3ubnnglid;!eit cntfc^ulbicjeii . . . id) Ijalc einc ^itte an i:^n." §crr, %xan, Sl^rc ©naben, (Sure (Sscellens, ©eine aKajeftat were followed by the "plural of majesty" (see 311, 2): §err 'Doftor wurbcn ba fatcd;tftert (F. 3524). ^iir§ crjle wottctt ©eiiie 9}Zaicftat, ha^ bie 3trme'e er)n' 2tufi(^ulj 33cf)incn rciumc (Sch.). §crr was reduced to mere „ev'' as early as M. H. G., e. g., er Sigfrid ; in the 16th century, „2Bertcr cr ^Jfarrer.'' This form encouraged the use of the pronoun cr in direct address. 4. ^^r, in addressing one person, was early very respectful and has maintained itself in the drama, except in comedy, to this day, and might be called the " stage-address," and is due to Eng. and Fr. influence. See Schiller's DJtavia Stuart. 231. The gradation as to politeness and etiquette now is about as follows : 1. For princes and all persons of high standing, 3^re ©naben, (Sure ©rceCenjr Sure ?0^aie|lat, with the verb in the pi. 2. <3te, addressing one or more persons, verb always in the pi., e.g., biirfte id) (Sie Bcgleiten? 3. 3^r, pL of bu, and %x in the drama addressing one or more persons, 234] SYKTAX OF THE PEESO:t^AL PROKOUN. 83 e.g., (Spat fommt %x, boc^ %x fommt (Scli.). See F. 981, 988. 4. (£r, Sie, addressing one person, now rare. 5. X)u, i^r, as in 230, 1. 232. The genitive of the pronouns of the 1. and 2. persons stands very rarely after nouns. Goethe has it once, „mcin, be$ ©cogno'jlen," " of me the geognost," but it is common as the object of verbs, after adjec- tives and numerals : 3(^ Htt' eu(^, tte|mt cu(^ meiner an (F. 1875). The un- inflected possessive metn, betn are by some interpreted as predicate genitives, e. g., ber 33e(^er ijl bein (Sch.). As it is much more probable that the posses- sive adjectives were used as genitives of the personal pronoun than mce versa, this interpretation is hardly correct. (See 441, a.) 233. The personal pronouns always accompany the verb. In the imperative „(Bk" always stands, but t)U and i^r only for emphasis: ^iebet eure geinte (B.). 93leiktt ©ie gefiiHt^fl. See F. 1908. 1. In poetry, colloquially, and in merchants' letters the pronoun is often not put : S3tn tueber ^^rdulein, mhtx \^m, tarn ungelettet m^ |)aufe ge'^n (F. 2608). See F. 3429. 3^r ©erte(3 (viz., ©c^reikn) ^om 18ten biefe^ (viz., ?D?onat^), ^a^e empfangen. Notice the set phrases bttte, I pray ; banfe, thank you ; gcfd)tt>eige (conjunction, " say nothing of "), before which {(^ has to be supplied. X^ut nlc^t^f ber 3ubc tr>irb ^erbrannt (Le.), no matter, the Jew . . . 2. Colloquially the subject, if a noun, may be repeated in the shape of a pronoun, as in Eng. : ber ^ird^^of, er tiegt tr>ie am Za^t (G.). See 244, 3. 234. The pronouns of the third person have demonstra- tive and determinative force. (Compare the cognate Latin is, ea, id.) Hence if they refer to lifeless objects or abstract nouns, they rarely stand in the G. and D. cases, but they are supplanted by the regular demonstrative pronouns or, if gov- erned by prepositions, by t)a(r), l)in, ^er + the preposition. Ex.: 'Bern 2ieBd)en Mnert ^xu^l 3^ t^td ba»on nite l)oren (F. 2104). ^aht tnd) ^or^er trol)( prapartert (F. 1958). Mdn i(^ glauB', In ^alt\t ntd)t ^tel ta^on (viz., 'oon ttx Steligion) (F. 3418). 1. Also c^ (A.) is thus supplanted, when referring to an individual object : SBo liegt ^axi^ ? . . . 2)en ^^htger braitf (not aiif esS) ba^ ne^^men mir (Arndt). ^m\\'^ ©liicf ! ^er^ ! Sicbe ! ®ott ! id) |abe feinen 9kmcn bafitr (F. 3455-6), ^ennjl bu Conbon? SBefu^e baffelbe iebenfatt(3. 84 CONCOKD OF PKOi;rOU]Sr AKD NOUIT. [2-^5- Concord of Pronoun and Noun. 235. The pronoun of the third person agrees with the noun which it represents in gender and number. The con- cord of the pronoun with the natural and grammatical gender has been treated, see 165, 166; also the neuter sg. e^ repre- senting a plural and any gender, see 168. On the use of „e^"» 236. 1. S^ is the indefinite subject of impersonal verbs denoting states of the weather and other natural phenomena, e. g., e^ regnet, ^onnert, bli^t, fAneit, l)agelt, e^ ^at gegla'tteift, e^ iaolif eg tijlntert, eg ^unfelt, ^cimmert, taut, etc. 2. ©g is made the indefinite subject of verbs, not really im- personal : Sg fc^Iagt elf; eg brennt, eg flopft, flingelt, eg ge^t log, liiutet; also in the passive and reflexive: eg tt)trl) getatt^t, gefungen, gefpielt ; compare rndxi tan^t, mcin x\x\t. Sg ge^t, fpielt fid) l)ier gut =: it is good walking, playing here. S3oMn foE eg nun ge^tt (F. 2051). a. Such an eg is used by poets to give a vague, mysterious, ghostly impression. Schiller's „Xau(^er," Goethe's „^0(i)5ettUeb" and „3^otentanj" are full of them : Unb alg er im tt)t(ltgen ©d^lummer lag, beivegt eg jt(^ unter bem S3ette (G.). The eg (treated so far) except in the passive and reflexive verb- forms cannot be omitted like, for instance, the expletive „eg" sub 3, 5. 3. Sg is made the grammatical subject of a verb, when the logical subject follows later: gg ^ogen tret SurfAe tt?oM iikr ten 9l^em (Uh.). gg fc^ritt il)m \x\\6> 3ur (Seite ter Hiil^ente ®enog (Uh.). SeeF. 3490-1; 3674-77. The logical subject cannot be another pronoun, eg., eg war x^, eg ivaren (Sie, as in Eng. " it was T," " it was you," which is a late construction. a. In ballads and other folk-lore this c8 is not required and inversion is still possi- ble, as was the rule in O. H. G., without c§ at the head of the sentence. For after all, c§ was here used not merely to denote an indefinite subject, but to account for an inver- sion which had no apparent cause. It is an " expletive " and superfluous as soon as any other part of the sentence stands at the head bringing about the inversion. It is ©ftenest translated by "there." German tales begin „(S3 war einmal . . . ", "There 237] SYi^^TAX OF THE REFLEXIVE PROKOUl^. 85 was once . , . " . ®al) ein ^na6' eln 9?6§lein fte:^n (G.). . (F. 3395-8). 242. 1. As fein and x\)x are both reflexive (referring to the subject of the sentence) and non-reflexive (referring to another noun) an ambiguity may arise, which should be avoided by using the demonstrative pronouns instead ; either beffen, beren always preceding, or be[felkn> berfelkn either preceding or following the noun. Ex. : 9^olaub ritt l;interm ^ater ^er mit beffen i e, t a ^, always accented, points out without reference to nearness in time or space. It is generally well translated by "that," also by "this/' and by a personal pronoun. Ex.: © em Bolfc l^ter (tliis) iDirb jeber %a^ ein %t^ (F. 2162). 5lkr, xok id) mid) fe^ne bic^ jn fd)anen, ^aU ic^ »or bem (that) 5)}?enfd)en (Mephistopheles) ein l^cimlic^ ©ranen (F. 3480-1). D glii^lic^ b e r (lie), ben i^r ^ele^rt ! F. 1981). ^er (for her) ^a^^ id) bie f^reube ^erMttert (Bo.). SBe^^e b em, ber S5ottair(en)<3 •S^riften iiber'^aupt nic^t mit bem ffe^tif($en ®ei|l lk% in ml^m er einen Znl ber< felben gefc^rieben (Le.). 1. The genitives be^j beffen/ beren sg. fern., berer and beren, pi., are used substantively as follows : 245] STKTAX OF THE DEMOKSTRATIYE PRONOUi^. 89 a. ^i% is archaic, but occurs in compounds like i>e^l)all), be^wegenr ber^ geftalt, etc., e.g., De^ freut fid) ba^ entmenfc^te ^aar (Sch.). S33ir jtnb ber feine^ wert, ba^ iDtr t)itten (Lu.), We are wortliy of none of those (things), etc. &. 2)effenr beren G. sg. fern, and Gl. pi., are used when they have the force of possessives (see 242). c. The present usage favors berer, G. pi. , referring to persons and bercn, beffen referrinor to things. But the classics do not agree with this. Gen- erally these forms are antecedents of relative pronouns. Ex. : 3e^0 fag' mir ba^ Snbe berer, bie »on 2:roia fe^rten (G.). |>at '^o.^ ^inb f($on Bci^nc? (S^ l^at beren ^ier. !I)ort fie^t man bie ©itter berer (of the gentlemen, lords) von SBebelo^. 2. The lengthened forms in -en and -er sprang up as early as the 15th century both in the article and in the pronoun, Luther has „beuen,'' D. pi., but the short genitives „be§" and ,,bcr.'' In the 18th century they lost -er and -en again, owing, no doubt, to the desire of distinguishing between article and demonstrative, and between the sub- stantive and adjective uses of the latter. Goethe has still ,,unb won bcnen 9!)ienid)cu bie fie befottberS f^a^en." Present usage, however, requires the short forms of the pro- noun, when used adjectively. 3. Notice the frequent emphatic force of the pronoun, e. g,, 3Scin 9Jec§te, baS mit unS geboren x\i, won b e ra ift leiber nie bie %xexen um^ ^uge^n (F. 2518). 2. T>k^ unb ba^, bie^ unb fene^ have the force of ^^irgenb etti,« e.g., 3Bir fmb nt(^t me^r beim crjlen ©lasj, brum benfen n)ir gem an bie^ unb ba^ (Song). Unb er firecfte aU tnabe bie |>anbe nid^t bie ^t|lorifd)ett SJiaterialiert, fnetet er benn in einm fein langen, fein fc^tt)er ju faf^ fenben 9fioman jufammen. For an ba^, tao,^ . ♦ . i i)on bent, wa^ . . ♦ no baranft)a^ . ♦ ♦,bai)onn)a$ . ♦ ♦ should be substituted, tliougli this is done colloquially. »2Bir ba(|ten baran, tx>a^ bu ie^t anfan^en njurbeft" is not elegant, 247. ® e r-, ^ i e-, t> a J e n t g e is generally used substan- tively followed by a relative clause or a genitive. Used adjec- tively it stands for Der, lite, ta^ when a relative clause follows, e.g,y tiejenigert ^tn\6!}Zn, metc^e ♦ ♦ ♦ The best usage accents ^er, tie, t)a^. Used adjectively it has only medium stress. Ex. : 2)ieient9en ber ^na^en, tpeld^e t^re SIufgaBen nic^t gemad^t fatten, ntngten na(f^jt|en (stay after school). 2ie^et biejenigen, n)elc^e eud^ Derfolgen (B.). 248. Der-, bie-, baffelBe denotes identity. It refers to something known or mentioned. It is used equally well substantively or adjectively. It can be strengthened by ,,eben'': ^it aller 2;reue cement)'' tc^ eure ©aben; Der !Durftige foil ftd) Derfelben erfreuen (H. and D. II., 74-5). 1. 2)er ncintlic^e also denotes identity, but is not written as one word. ;r2)erfelM9e" is rarer than berfelk. 2Bar basS ntc^t ber ©ienjlmann (porter), ber bie 5lu^manberer l^etrogen ^at ? 2)er namlt(^e. 2. ©cll^tg without ber is rare, e.g., (Selbige^ tt>eig t^ getotg (Heyse). 249. ©elB, feUer, felBft distinguishes one object from another. It strengthens personal and reflexive pronouns. It is made einphatic by eben, also in the phrase ein(er) unt) l^erfelbe* (Selber and felbft do not differ in meaning, but in use. ©elfcer is 251] SYNTAX OF THE I:N^TERR0GATIVE PROi^OU:^^. 91 never made an adverb as fe(6|l is. (BelBer always follows the word it qualifies, though it need not stand necessarily directly after it: 3t% f^I^^^ or felbft ^ah il)n gefe^en* SBer ameifelt 5^atl)an, la^ ik nidJt (see 309, 2) i:ie e^^rltd^feit, t)ie ®ro§mut felber fein ? (Le.) 2Cer an^txn eine (^ruBe grabt, fdllt \db\t ^inetn (Prov.). 1. ©elbfl lias become also an adverb with the force of «fogar»" and then stands best at the beginning of the sentence, unaccented : ar tie UBerle^ung, aU n?ir ♦ ♦ ♦ folc^e ^Kac^t gelegt in fol4e ^anD (id.). 1. The use of folc^ for the personal pronoun or ber-, bte-, baffelk is not good although found now and then in the classics, e. g., %l^ fte hit SSWoo^^^ littte erreic^ten; fanben fie [ol(^e auf ba^ luftigfle (see 300, 2) au^gefc^miicft (G.). 2. For fold^ etn, fo ein is a frequent equivalent. It is more common in the spoken language than folc^ ein. Lessing and Goethe are very fond of it, e.g,y ©0 ein ^ic^ter ift ®^a!fpere unb (S^affpere faft ganj aflein (Le.). 3c^ fann ntid^ nid^t, xok fo ein SBort^elb, fo ein 2;u9enbfd^wd^er, an meinem SBitten xoax^ mtn unb (?3eban!en (Sch.). „^x %\xx\n"— „fo ein ^Dt)er Sturm," then „jo etn ^urm." Syntax of the Interrogative Pronoun. 251. 2Ber, + "who/' "which/' and ma^, + "what/' are used substantively only: 2Sa^ fiimmert e^ Me ^Wm, ter man tie 3ungen rauibt,in tt>effen 2Balte fie briiflt (Le.). 5^un, n?en lieBen imi 92 SYNTAX OF THE IKTERROGATIVE PROJ^TOUi^. [253- i?on m6> am meiften (irL)o SBa^ ijl Uv langen dim fuqer @inn ? (ScL). 1. Once the genitive after mer and toa^ was common. 2Ber is almost entirely supplanted by welc^er, and wa^ by wao fiir ein« But xoa^ + geni- tive, which generally looks like an accusative, still remains in phrases like )S$a^ 2Bunber(^) (Le.). 2Ba^ be^ Z^nftU, 2Bae ^enfer^* SBa^ i)l SScibc^ bort am gritnen SDalbe (G.)- See 181, 188. 2. 3Bem only refers to persons. Wiien it refers to things or whole sentences n)o(r) + preposition is substituted. 2Boju ber ^dxm ? (F. 1322). SBoran erfennjl bu ben !Dteb, 2Bor before a vowel, tt)0 before a consonant. 3. In the spoken language „toa^" is preceded by a preposition that does not govern the accusative : ju voa^, mit tt)a^; but womit, moju are pref- erable. The classics have it too. Even fur toa^, um toa^, t>ur(| toa^ are supplanted by mofiir, tvorum, njoburcb* 3vi toa^ ble 5^offe ? (G.) 5D^tt iva^ !ann ic^ aufwarten ? 4. SSa^ in the sense of raarum and tr>te is originally an absolute accusa- tive, e. g., 3Ba^ jle^t t^r unb te^t bie ^cinbe in (= in ben) ©d^op (Scb.). 2Ba^ «?irb ba^ ^erj bir fc^n?er (P. 2720). 5. Mark the interrogative adverbs : n)0, + where ; toam, + when ; tt)te, + how ; n?o(r)- with preposition ; waruntf + wherefore, + why, only interrogative. For their etymology see 551. 252. S3 e I d) means -f " which " and singles out the indi- vidual, though etymologically it inquires after the quality. It stands adjectively and substantively: Unb trelc^er i\V^, t)m W am meiflen Uebft? (Sch.). S3e(c^e^ Unge^eure ftnnet i6r mir an^ (id.). In exclamatory sentences welc^ is originally interrogative, often fol- lowed by ein : 2Be(d) ein Subein, welc^ ein ©ingen tvtrb in unferm ^aufe fcin ! (Song). See F. 742. 253. ^Ba^fitr, ma^ fitrein inquires after the nature and qualities of a person or thing, ^a^ fiir always stands adjectively, Yoa^ fiir nn adjectively and substantively. 2Ca^ is separable from fiir ein. Lessing is particularly fond of this separation. 2Ca^ fiir stands before the singular of a noun 256] SYNTAX OF THE EELATIYE PKOKOUN^S. 93 denoting material and before a collective noun; before the plural of any noun. 2Ba^ fvir ein inquires also after an indi- vidual. Ex. : 2Ba^ fitr SBein ijl bici^ ? 2Baa fur SSerge ♦ ♦ ♦ trennen utt^ benn no(^ ? (Le.). 2Ba^ in ^a^lon id) bir fur einen fc^onen <5toff gefauft (id.). Syntax of the Relative Pronouns. 254. There being no original relative pronouns, the other pronouns were used as such or conjunctions like so, dar, da, unde (see below) connected coordinate sentences, one of which later became subordinate. The first pronoun used as a relative was ber, bie, ba§, in O. H, G. aSel^er, irei", toaS developed into relative pronouns gradually. First they were made indefinite pronouns by means of the particle so, O. H. G. so hwelich{so), so hwer{so)^ so hwas(so) >TVl. H. G. swelich^ swer^ swas — whosoever, whatsoever > N. H. G. wcW)er, wer, waS, which can be strengthened by nur, elc^er is preferable after tier^ jenige. The following sentence is bad : 2:ie, tie t)ie WiUiizx Der ^tttt)er tt?ar; ift geftorkn. 1. Of the four relatives ber, meld)-; ttjer, wa^ only tt) e I d)- can also be used adjectively, the other three only substantively. The genitive of ber, bie, ba^ is always beffen, berett; sg. and pi., never berev. Ex.: 2Ber fern ®efe^ ac^tet, ift eben [o mac^ttg aU xotx fein ®efe^ |at (Le.) 5lm SJJontag, an njeld^em 2:a9e Xoxx aheijlen . . ♦ But this is not very elegant. 256. S)er and irelcber will take any antecedent soever. But trer, ma^, having sprung from indefinite and compounded pronouns, require none, ^er admits of no antecedent at all ; ira^ may have any other neuter pronoun, an adjective (pref- erably in the superlative), or a whole clause, e. g. , %ixv ttja^ trein ge^t Uttt> ni^t t^rein (in^ ©e^irn) ge^t, dn priic^ti^ SGort au 94 SYKTAX OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUl^S. [257- tienftett fle^t (F. 1952-3). SlEe^ m^ ift, ift ternunftig (Hegel). SSa^ tu erer6t ijon tieinen Satern 6aft, emirb e^ urn e^ 3U Befi^en (F. 682-3). I)em §errlid^ften, tt»a^ au(^ Der ®eifl empfangen, t)rdngt immer fremD un^ Kemper (Stoff fid) an (F. 634-5). 1. dxt ttjer; ber 3J?antt t»er; ber, mx are impossible. But Goethe has (in the** Walpurgisnacht'^), F. 3964: 'm^ nic^tr roa^ mir ^opc^fett nennen (Le.). SiJon fritter Sugenb an ^atte mir unb meiner (Sc^mejler ber Skater felbjl tm Slanjcn Unterri(^t gegekn, weld^e^ einen fo crnjl^aften 3)lann munberlic^ genug ^atte fleiben foEen (G.). 3. If mx has a seeming antecedent the latter stands after the clause. The antecedent is nothing but the subject of the main clause repeated for emphasis in the shape of another pronoun. If, however, trer and its seeming antecedent do not stand in the same case, the latter is indis- pensable. Ex. : 2Ber ^ec^ angreift befubelt ftd) (Prov.). 2Ber iiber gemiffe ^inge ben S^erftanb ni(5^t uerliert, ber ^at feinen ju ijerlieren (Le.). 233er ijiele^ hingt, njirb ntanc^em etwa^ Bringen (F. 97). But 2Ber ein 5D^al litott, bem glauBtntan ntc^t nnb ivenn er an($ bie SBa'^r^^ett fpric^t (Prov.). 2Ber ha )^a\, bem tvirb gegeBen (B.). The same is true of xt>a§> : 2Ba^ man nic^t wei§, ha^ eBen brauc^te man unb roa^ man n)ei§r !ann man nic^t l^rauc^en (F. 1066-7). %xn1^ ubt jtd^r n^a^ ein 3)?eijler hjcrben toiU (Sch.). For the gender in this illustration see 168. 4. The old short form n^e^ is now archaic except in tot^'^al'b, tot^^ tt) e g e n : SSe^ S3rot ic^ t[ft, be^ Sieb i^ ftnge (Prov.). 257. If the dative and accusative, governed by a preposi- tion, do not refer to a person, too, now rarely la, with that preposition, are generally substituted : ^x&it^ ift B^f^^l; am tt^eni^ften t)a^, too^on bie 3l6ft(^t fo Uax in ^ie ^uc^m leud^tct (Le.). 1. Bo, the oldest relative conjunction, has now been crowded out from the spoken language, though it was very common in the 16th and 17th centuries: 2)ie Unfe ^anb, ha^u ba^ ^aupt, fo er i^m a^gei^auen (Uh.). 35 on aUen, fo t>a famen (Bii.). 258. The relative adverbs to o, " where " and b a (colloqui- 261] SYNTAX OF THE Ii^DEFI]S"ITE PROIS'OUiq^S. 95 ally); ^ a, mann, rotnrtf tr) o, "when"; tr>ie, "as" take the place of a relative pronoun governed by a preposition when they refer to nouns denoting time, place, and manner. Ex. : ^ennjl bu ba^ 2anh too hk Sitroneu Blii^n ? (G.). ^^ 9IM tm 2)ienf^en* lekn ^lugenblicfe, too er bem SBeltgeijl nd:^er ifl al^ fonj^ (Scli.). Sn biefem Slugen* bU(fe, ba mir reben, Ijl fern ^^^ra'un me^r in ber ©c^tveijer Sanbe (id.). «X)ie Strt unb 2Bctfc mie," *' the manner in which." (/rSie" is more forcil)le than ^iii tt)ct(^cr.'") D fc^oner %a^, totm cnbUd^ bcr ©olbat in^ Seben ^eimfc^rt (Sch.). 1. This construction is old only with the demonstmtive adverbs used as relatives, viz., da^ ddr^ danne. 5llltt)0# aUba/ tt)ofelb}l are archaic Syntax of the Indefinite Pronouns. 259. S i n and e i n i g e can precede a numeral generally fol- lowed by a noun. They mean "some," "or so," "odd": tin a6t Sage, a week or so; einige ^lerjig 3^^^/ forty odd years. The order may also be: „ein 3^^^ funf^e^n/' 1. Grimm thinks this phrase has lost Moberr" as if it meant etnen %a^, mv, njel(^, see 254. 51^, n?enn iit etma^ auf I^icft fonnte! " if I could influence you at all (F. 3423). 3Ba^ anter^ fuc^e ju Beginnen (F. 1383). £)te 3^9^ ift to^ immer wa^ uriD tint 5lrt ^on ^rieg (G.). ipier ftnt) ,^irfd)en au »er;^ taufen. SBillfl tu n?el(^e? §aft bu irgent) ma^ ^erloren? 1. They stand generally only in the nominative and accusative. (Sinig is rare in the singular, and for it ivgenb cin is better used. 261. '21 1 (-. The following examples show the many vari- ous forms of aa- : att t)a^ ®elD, aU U^ ®efce^, aM ta^ ®elb, m^ M u^ alle^ ? 96 SYNTAX OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. [262- 1. 5J^tte stood iu M. H. G. only after prepositions as still dow, e. g., ^tx alle bem, "withal." Mix ivirb ijon aEe bem fo bumm (F. 1946). The form atte before the article aud not preceded by a preposition, though very com- mon in the classics and in the spoken language, is not so good as aU or all with strong endings, e.g.^ Wi ber (s5c^merj (G.). ^^IH or aKe in such phrases as ber SQein i)l oSi, " there is no more wine," has hardly been satis- factorily explained yet. 2. Notice the following meanings ; Side ^tunben einen J^eeloffel »oII, " a teaspoon full every hour." The singular in the sense of ''every "is rarer, auf alien %oM, in every case, filler 3lnfang ijl fd)roer (Prov.). SlEe^ ©ing n?a^rt feme ^z\t, ®otte^ £tel) in (Smigfeit (Hymn). The singular in the sense of Eng. " all " is archaic, alien ©inter (Logau, quoted in Grimm's Diet.), all winter. For all day, all night, we say best bie a^nx^-it ^o.&jX, ben ganjen Slag. Notice also in aller %x\x^, " very early," in aEer ©tillCf in alle SBelt 3. The plural of jeber, iebmcber, jeglic^er is rare. It is expressed by ,,alle»^ Even the singular of the last two is now archaic and rare. 262. ^ a n c^ e r does not differ from the Eng. " many " in use and force. Compare txxx manner; manc6 einer, mand)er gute ?[Rann, mant^ tin guter SKann, manege fd)bne Slume. 263. 3? i e I and m e n i 9, denoting the individual and used substantively denoting persons, must be inflected ; if they denote an indefinite number, quantity, mass, they are gener- ally uninflected. T^enn ^iele fint) berufett, akr tt^entge finb auUx^ iVii^Iet (B.). 5>iel no^ %a\i tu ijon mtr ^u l)oren (Sch.). ^va^x mei^ \6ij X)iel, tod) mbd)te i(^ alle^ n^iffen (F. 601). (£^5 ftutiercn i>iel toeri;^ faner in £)eutf*Iant)* 1. S5ielerr -e, -e$ denotes "various sorts," e.g., vteler 2Bein; in composi- tion ijielerlei SSein, '*many kinds of wine." A fuller treatment of the large number of indefinite pronouns and numerals belongs rather to the Dictionary. 265] SYNTAX OF THE VEEB. 97 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. Classification of Verbs. 264. According to meaning and construction the verbs may be variously divided : 1, into independent verbs; 2, into tlie small class of tense auxiliaries and the modal auxiliaries. See 267. Again: 1, mio personal verbs, which can have any person, the 1., 2., or S., as subject; % into impersonal verbs, which have the indefinite subject z^, „e^ recjtiet." See 236. The personal verbs again divide: 1, into neuter or subjective verbs, as ^ie (^onne fcbeint (see 179); 2, transitive or objective verbs, the direct object of which stands in the accusative (transitive proper, see 198) or in the genitive or dative (called also in trans., see 184, 190). As subdivisions of transitive verbs may be regarded: 1, the reflexive verbs; 2, the causative. The reflexives again: 1, into reflexives proper, which occur only as reflexives, e.g., ft(^ gramen, to pine; fid) erBarmen, to feel pity; 2, into both transitive and intransitive verbs used re- flexively, e. g., ft(% it>afcben, ftcfe ijereinen, fid) tot laden* The pronoun is always in the accusative, but see 197. 1. Transitive verbs have often intransitive or neuter force, but there can be no direct object then. 'Da^ 3)ferb jie|t ben SBagcn, but !Die 3Bolfcn jie^en am ^immel. Personal verbs can also be used without a logical sub- ject : ^a$ SBaffer raufc^t, but (£i3 rauf^t m 9^o|re. Also the modal auxilia- ries occur still as independent verbs ; fBa^ foil ba^ ? but SBo^in foU ber ■Die^ gefluc^tet fein ? See 267. Syntax of the Auxiliaries. I. §aBen and fein. 265. S) a^tn forms the compound tenses, active voice: 1. Of all transitive verbs : i(^ l)abt getragen, i^ ^aU Bet)edt, i$ ^ak angeflagt. 98 SYNTAX OF THE VERB — AUXILIARIES. [266^ 2. Of the modal auxiliaries, of reflexive and impersonal verbs proper. Sr ^at ei3 nic^t gemoi^t, ^at fidj gemaf^en, ew hat geregnet, e^ ^at mi6:i gereut 3. Of intransitive verbs which have no direct object, at most the object in the G. or D. Sr l^attt mm gefpottet, er ^at nitr gefc^ai^et, er ^atte gelad)t, gemeint, gefc^Iafen* 4. Of (intransitive) verbs of motion when the mere action within a certain space, the effort, and its extent are to be emphasized, without reference to direction, point of depar- ture or destination. 31. ^on ipumBoltt l)at ^iel geretft, = was a great traveler. T)er (Stallfnedjt l)at eine (Btun^e ^in unt) ^er gerttten* ^r ^atte in SBien je^n 3^^^^ gefa^ren (Le.). T)a^ Samm^en ^at geppft, t)er gtfc^ l)at gefd^mommen. Da^ ^(eine (the little one) ^at Ttoc^ ttie gegangen (has never walked). (Sophie l)at geflettert unt) fi(^ Die (S^iir^e ^erriffen. Der ©c^nelllaufer ^at fc^on Idngft gelaufen (finished running long ago). Good usage favors: Die Ubr 1:)at cinmal gegangen, aBer {e^t fte^t fte ftid. Tie 5i}tii^(e, Me 9Jlaf^ine, Da5 3flar) l^at gegangen, but ift is frequently used. 5. Of ft^cn, fte^en, liegen, anfangen, beginnen, anf^oren. But in S. G. fcin is more common and it is also found in the classics. fflSo ^aU i^r gefej^en, gej^anten ? 3Cann i^at Die (BMt angefangen ? 266. S cin forms the compound tenses : 1. Of all verbs of motion, except some, which take i^aUn, when action simply is denoted. See 265, 4. These take fein when the direction, points of departure, destination and ar- rival are mentioned. These circumstances are often expressed by inseparable and separable prefixes in compound verbs. Ex. : „Der ?0^ai ift gefommen." (Er n?irD gefallen fein, = he proba- bly fell. 2Csir finD fcfcncd ^inaBgeftiegen. £)ie (Seefa^rer finD anf Der 3nfel (B^t gelanDet. Xie (Storc^e ftnD na6)i @iiDen geaogen. Xer (Btattlnec^t i^ in einer (StnnDe :^in unD ^er geritten, == he rode to a certain place (there) and back. "Lit geinDe finD entflo^en, ent^^ laufen, eingetroffen. ffiir finD fd)on me^rerc Tlak nmgejogen (moved). 267] SYKTAX OF THE VERB — AUXILIARIES. 99 2. Of certain verbs denoting a springing into being or pass- ing away, a transition and development, growth and decay, often expressed by er-, ^er-, jer-, and separable prefixes. S^ie ^il&l ift gefroren « gefrteren, but e^ Ut gefroren < frieren, there was a frost). S)a^ ®eit ift gerrlffen. 2)er (B&jim ift gefd)moIaen» „l:er SruDer ware ni^t geftorkn.'' "La^ SSaumi^en ift geti?ad)fen* Xie rcid^en SLcntt fint) im ^riege ^erarmt. "La^ Sidjt ift erlofd^en. 'Die 6(^a(e ift gefprungen (cracked). Xer 2eWing mar eingefc^lafen (had fallen asleep). In the compound verbs it is just this prefix that called for fein* Compare trinten — ertrinfen, fd)einen — er^; fdjeinen, toa6:im — ern^aien, |ungern — ^erl)ungertt, frieren — erfrieren* 3. Of feitt, Heiben, begegtten, folgen, gelingen, gefcbe^en, gliicfcn, for which it is hard to account by meaning, but see 283, 2. Ex.: (£^ ift i^m ttid>t getungen, gegliicft* Da^ ift fcbon atle^ tiagetvefen* (iin fiiper 3:roft ift ii:)m geMieben (Sch.). 4. ^aten has gained upon fciu in German, but not so mucli as English " to have " upon " to be." SoI{5crt and Oc^ccjncn were once generally compounded with I^aBcn. Also the ten- dency to use intransitive verbs as trausitives, so strong in Eng., has increased in Ger- man. While in Eng. one can " run " a locomotive, a sewing machine, a train, a ship, in German fu:^ren, leiten, in ®anv3 tringen, gebrauc^en, or the verb of motion + laften or mad)en, will have to be used. ®er ^utfi^ev f)at un§ fd^nell gefal^reit. ®er ^JoftiUiou ^at ben SBageu ijorgefal)reit. 3)2an fonnte tie ^euerfprft^e nt(J;t in ®ang Bringen. 5. The difficulty as to the use of ^aBen and fein lies after all mainly in the way in which a verb is used, transitively or intransitively, and in the meaning. The student should attend particularly to these points and not be too timid, as in many cases usage is by no means settled. As to the omission of ^aBen and fetn in dependent clauses, see 346. II. Special Uses of the Modal Auxiliaries. This subject belongs really rather to the Dictionary, but the appreciation and trans- ?ation of these verbs is so difficult that a brief treatment of them is given here. 267. 1. ^ 6 n n e n denotes ability ; T)cx i^tfc^ !antt f(^n)immett. |>ter j!e'^^ id), i^ !antt ni^t anhtxQ (Lu.). Possibihty : S'^r fonntet i^r SBerfjeug fein, mic^ ill ba^ ®atn jujte^en (Sch.). Knowledge, '* to know how," its oldest mean- ing: ^am\i bu Stalie'nifc^? Compare fonnen, "to have learnt," then "to be able" ; fennen (< kanjan, causative of fann — fonnen), **to be acquainted with" ; miffen, "to know." 2. © it r fen denotes : 1. Permission and authorization : ^u barfjl au^ 100 SYNTAX OP THE VERB — MODAL AUXILIARIES. [267- ba nur frei erfc^einen (F. 336). D^ne Sagbfc^ein barf nicmanb aiif bie ^agb ge^n* 2. " To have occasion to," " reason for," " need '* : 3)?an barf ben @d)luffel nur jtt)ei Wlal umbret)eit unb ber Spiegel fpringt juriicf, "You need ..." X)u barffl l)inau^ge^en, bie Suft ifl ^ier feljjr [c^led)t, " You have good reason to gc out. . ." This force is the oldest, but rather rare now. 3. ** To trust one's self to" : 2Bev barf tjn nennen unb mx kfennen: 3c^ glaub i^n (®ott) (F. 3433-5). This force has sprung from 1 and 2 and from the verb tar — tiirren + dare, whose meaning was embodied in barf — burfc:u On the other hand, it has nearly given up the original force of " need," '* want," still apparent in 2, to its compound bebiirfen. In some editions of the Bible biirfettf *' to want," and lar — tiirren, " to dare," are still the rule. In later editions l^eburfen and burfen have been substituted for them. 4. The preterit subjunctive (potential, see 284, 3) bitrfte is used for a mild asser- tion : T)k 5^a(^n?elt bitrfte Scbcnfen tragen, biefee Urtcil ju untcrfd)rclben (Sch.), *' Posterity very likely will ..." T)(i^ bitrfte ju fpat fein, " I fear very much, that is too late." Etiquette admits such redundant phrases as : 2)urfte or barf id) mir eriauben, etc. 3. 5)J D 5 c n denotes : 1. In its oldest, but now rare sense except in dia^ lect, " ability " and ** jiower." This it has given up to „fonncn." Compare its cognates " may" and "can" in Eng.: 3|r SfnbM gibt ben Sngein enn feiner ftc ergritnben mag, (F. 247-8), " although no one is able ..." 2. Concession, no interference on the part of the speaker : S)cr 93urf(^e ma(i m^ ^aufe ge^n (It lies with him, I have no objection), SBer mix ben Seeder !ann njteber jeigcn, er ntag i:^n be^alten (Sch.). 3. Possibility, the action does not concern or influence the speaker ; fonnen means a possibility that lies in the ability of another person or object. 255a^ fitr ©ritnrocE^ mogen baC fcin (Sch.). Sr mag bae> o^i^a^t ^aben, er ntag ba§ t:^un, It is possible he said so, he may do it. T)a^ Zkx mag jie()n 3abre alt fein* With this force it supplants the potential and concessive subjunctives ; if it stands itself in the subjunctive of the present or preterit, it supplants also the opta- tive subjunctive. S(^ tt)unfc^e ha^ bie ganje SSelt un^ ^oren mag, ^oxm moge, 9)loc^te and) bod^ bie ganje Sett un^ ^oren (Le.). 4. From 2 springs the force of " inclination," " liking," " wishing." 2Ba^ ftc^ ijcrtragt mit nteiner 9)fli(^t/ mag ic^ t^r gern gett)a^rcn (Sch.). 3d} moc^te, bap er c^ md)t mieber erfit^re* 3c^ eJTe tt>a^ id) ntag unb letbe toa^ id) mujj (Prov.). 4. 9JJitff en, + must, denotes : 1. In its oldest sense, " to have occa- sion, room," "to be one's lot," *'it is the case." A trace of this is left in the following uses : 5D^cin §unb n?ar c^ne SD^auIforb l^inau^gelaufen, 5?un ntupte and) gerabe ein 3?oUji'|l ba^er fomnten (as luck would have it, a police- 267] SYNTAX OF THE YERB — MODAL AUXILIARIES. 101 man came along), ©er Bufall mu^te i§n grabe ^in I^ringen. Bum sweiten Mai foil mir fcin ^iaUi} crfd)allen, er mit^te benn (unless it should) kfonberu Sinn kgriinben (G., quoted in Sanders' Diet.). 2. Necessity of various kinds : Me Si)lenfd)en muffen \kxbnu 2)er Serine mu§ fd)eiben (Scli.). ©in Dkrl>aupt mu§ fein (id.), ^a^ muf ein fc^led)ter TOUer fein^ bem niemal^ pel ba^ SBanbern ein (Song). (£r mu§ [e^r !ranf gewefen fein; cr if! no(^ fo fc^n)a(^. The force of biirfen : 3d) mu§ nic^t ^crgeffen, " I must not forget." 93raudKi^ + negative generally takes the place of muffeu + negative when it denotes moral necessity. ©aS trau^ft bu nid}t ju tf)un, wenn bu nii^t luiltft. SSol^t bem, bei* mit ber neiicn (3eit) nicTjt me^r brau^t ju tc&en (Sch.). 5. ©ollen, + shall, denotes : 1. Dutj and obligafioii.: '®il follfl ^'c^tj^ beincn ^ervn liekn ^on ganjcm |)crsem i)on ganger ^eeirutfb ^on 9a^:^e\n ©cmtile" (B.), 1)u Mtteil ba fcin foHen, You ought to haVe b«en»tlior^.y «2^ Nec^-j ; sity and destiny: !Diefe %uxd)i foil enbtgen! t^r '^atipr fdl' fallen.' ' 'dd)Mlntl' ' ^^rieben f)ab^n (Sch.). 3^ mi^ nid)t toa^ foU e^ kbeuten (Heine). 2Ba^ foil ba^ ? What (is that) for? T)axin foUte er ft(^ tanfc^en, In that he was bound to be deceived, disappointed. 8. It denotes the statement and claim of another, " is to," " is said to" : 'La^ 3)?eter foK ac^t 2;^aler fofien. ©er 'Bdja^ ber ?^il)elungen foil im SfJ^eine lic(^en, (Siekn Strciflinge foUen entfommen fein. 4. (SoUte approaches the force of the conditional, + " should." ©oKte er nod) fommenr fag^ i^m, id) ^dtte nidu Icinger n^arten fonnen* (Sollte er and) wo^^l franf fein ? Is it possible that he is sick ? 6. Swollen, + will, denotes : 1. The will and purpose of the sub- ject. 2Ba^ njoUtejl bu mit bem Dolc^e ? fprtc^ (Sch.). 3d) will e^ n.>icber ijergef^ fen, voeil ®ie bod) nic^t tt)Dnen,i)a§ id) e^ miffen foil (Q-.). SBolle nur voa^ bu fannfl nnb bu njirjl fonncn n?a^ bu n?illfi, 2. *'Tobe about," "on the point of." (Sin armer SBauer tooUtt |!erkn (Mcolai). (£^ mill regnen. Frequent in stage- directions, „n)itt gc^en," ,,tr>ill abge^n." SCBiE ft($ |)ector etrig »on mir n?enben? (Sch.). 3. The claim and statement of another, who "says" or ** claims to " : ©er Beuge xoiU ben STngeflagtcn gefe^en ^akn. ©u n?illft i^n ju einem guten BweiJe Betrogen ^abcn* Notice the ambiguity of such a sentence as ©er |)err toill e^ get^an ^akn, *' claims he did it," or according to 1, "wills or wishes that it be done." SSolIen is really the most difficult to understand and use. It occurs in a great many more idioms with ever varying shades of meaning. Notice, e. g.^ G§ witi ycvlautcn, " it is spread abroad." 23a§ luitl ba§ fagcn ? = "What does that amount to?" "that is nothing." 3d) iniU e3 ni^t gefeT)cn ^aben, I will act as if I had not seen it or "nobody shall see it," according to 1. SSenn ber (Sd)ulcr bod) biefe 9JegeI lerneii wotlte, " if he only would . . . = conditional. STgoIIte ©ott ba^ . . . , Avould to God that . . . ®iefe ^^ebev Witt nid)t, this pen does not write (well). But it is impossible to give all these meanings. 102 SYNTAX OF THE VEKB— PASSIVE VOICE. 268- Still Eng. " will " is not far behind the German, ©cllen and woUen should not be con- founded with Eng. " shall " and '* will " of the future, see 279, 3. 7. !2affen, sometimes classed here, is really a causative auxiliary and Bever used as such without an inf., which stands as a further object. ^eine ^lage la§t jte fd^aEen (Sch.). Utt^erjuglic^ lie^ er brei 23attcrien aufracrfen (id.). See 202, 1. A second force is " to allow," *' not to hinder." !£)er ©efangenn^cirter lie^ ben ©efangenen entn)ifd)en» iBaffen ®ie ha^ Meibcn (= to leave a thing undone. Saffcn, to look, is a neuter verb. For laffen + reflexive, see 272 ; in the imperative, see 287, 4. Remark.— Verbs of motion can be omitted, particularly when an adverb expresses tlve (tirectiom JEdCrfbu mit ? ^(^ niu^ ^in. ®a§ ^a(Je't fcUte fort (ought to be sent). ^if §ut wu^' in Cie 0^aff;tel. But all except mttffen and biirfen can be used as inde- per^ent veTt)3r i, (?., no ot'.ier verb need be supplied. There is no call for a verb in 2Sa8 . icU ^er i^ut? (Scfi.), "•, W\i3t .i3 tMs hat (here) for ? Notice that fcllen, mogen, and wotten are really the only ones that deserve the term modal auxiliaries, since they assist in expressing the mood. See 287- THE PASSIVE VOICE. 268. The active voice needs no comment. Only transitive verbs form a complete passive. But transitives whose mean- ing admits only of an object of the thing, also in transitives and subjective verbs, form only the third person singular with the grammatical subject e0 or without it. 3^nen tt>irt) c|e!^oIfen* @^ n?irt) gelac^t unt» gefungen. ©eftern tt)urt)e gefpielt» Set un^ jtt $aufe (where I come from) toixl ^iel 2S^ift gefpieft* 269. In the transformation of the active into the passive voice, the direct object in the accusative becomes subject- nominative and the former subject is expressed by ijon + dative denoting the agent and by bur(^ + accusative denot- ing means and instrument. 33aumgarten erfd^Iug ten SBoIfen^ fc^iegen. 5B. murbe ^on S» erf(^lagen* Vtv 23rtef tr>urbe t)urd^ einen I^ienftmann beforgt (through a porter). See prepositions, 304, 2. 270. When a verb governs two accusatives both accusa- tives become nominatives with the verbs of naming, calling, scolding. Sr murte fein greunb genannt* See 179, 2. 273] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — PASSIVE VOICE. 103 1. With le^ren and fragen the accusative of the thing may be retained, particularly if that accusative he a pronoun, e. g., 2)a^ (S(^limmfte,tx)a^ un^ iDiberfiSt^rt, ba^ tuerben tt)ir »om ZoiO, gele^rt (G.). For etti?a^ gele^rt tt>erben it is better to use unterric^tet werben ; for etii>a^ Qcfragt werben, better nad) etma^ gefragt merben* The accusative of the noun now sounds pedantic, though le^ren in M. H. G. always retained the accusative in the passive. See 202, 2. 271. With a verb governing an accusative, a genitive, or a dative, the accusative becomes nominative in the passive, but the genitive and dative are retained. S). xoux^t ^e^ ^ot^i^errat^ angeflagt. !Deiner tt?urt)e geDac^t (no grammatical subject) or e^ XQWXU beiner getacbt* 5!Htr tt^urre gefolgt, /was followed. 1. The verbs fclgen, l^elfen, gc^ori^en, fd)met(^eln, wibcrjpre^^n, banfen often form a personal passive in the classics and in the spoken language, but it is very questionable whether this use should be imitated ; certainly not by foreigners who are accustomed to this construction in their own language and are apt to make mistakes in the active and say „i(^ folge bid)" if they hear or say „i(^ werbe gefolgt, gefc()mci(^ctt." Those who defend the personal passive appeal to the older accusative after I)elfen and jc^meic^eln. 272. The reflexive, encouraged by French influence, and man, t^ + active often replace the passive. For (£^ mtrb gefungen, gepoc^t stands ?i}?an ftngt, pod^t* Da offnet jtc^ ba^ S^or, Then the gate is opened. Der (Sd)Iuffel jDtrb jt(^ ftnben, The key will be found. More frequent than the reflexive alone is jtc^ . . . lajTen, e. g., Sr iDtrb ftd^ befttmmen la^'i^xi ju . . . , He will let himself be influenced to . . . , He can be induced to . . . Da^ la§t ftc^ letc^t nta($en, That is easily done. !Da^ Id^t ft(^ pren, That is plausible. See 290, 3, h. It is clear from this that the German passive is less fre- quent than the English. The grammars boast more of the full and long compound tenses than actual usage justifies. 273. Oeigin of the Passive Voice. 1. In O. H. G. fein (5*7?, wesan), werben iwerdan) were used to express the passive. Gothic alone shows traces of anything like a Latin passive, but even there the peri- phrastic form had to be resorted to. In M. H. G. the present is ich wirde gelobet ; pre- terit, ich wart gelobet ; perfect, ich bin gelobet ; pluperfect, ich was gelobet. Worden was added to the perfect from the 13th century downward, but was not considered essential until the 17th century. The passive idea lies originally only in the past or passive participle and not in wevbcn, which means only " I enter into the state of being „geUe6t," ,,gej(^tagen," etc. Compare the future, id) raerbe lieBen, "I enter into the state of loving." The M. H. G. ich bin geliebet, ich was {war) geliebet are by no means lost. Only they are not called tenses now. 3(^ tin getiefet, ba§ ^iw^"^^^ ^(^ gefegt mean ••' I am 104 SYNTAX OF THE VERB — TENSES, [274- in the state; of being loved," " the room is in a swept state," " has been cleaned," " is clean." The participles are felt as adjectives. 3<^ &in gclieljt iDorben, fcas ^intmer ift gefegt worben mean * I have passed into the state of being loved," "the room has passed into the state of being swept." The transition into this state, and not the present state, but the fact or action are emphasized, hence the idea of tense is promi- nent. The fitness of the name of perfect passive for this form and not also for x^ biu geliebt is apparent because x^ bin geliebt njorben is composed of t(| bin (ge)tt5ort)en (the perfect) + geliebt. In O. H. G. fein still formed the present as " to be " now in Eng., but already in M. H. G. werden was the prevalent auxiliary (see above), while sein was prevalent in the perfect. 2. Perhaps the following examples will illustrate the force of the vari- ous forms: 2)ie 3;o(^ter if! V)erIobr, is engaged to be married. S^om ©ife befreit jtnb etrom unb S3ac^e (F. 903). liefer teffel ijl ^on aSergen kgrenjt (Hu.) These three are not passive tenses. But compare : ^u bent !Bac^erli($cn ivirb ein (£ontra'|l ijon S^oIIfommen^eiten unb UnijoEfommen^eiten erforbert (Le.) (present tense). !Diefer 9)un!t ift i)tel bej^ritten n^orben (perf. pass.). The same differ- ence between n?urbe + participle {= imperfect pass.) and h)ar + partici- ple (no tense), e.g., |>ome'r war i)or %\itx^ unjlreitig ficiptger gelefen al^ je^t (Le.). Die ^?>aufer njaren fejllic^ gefc^ntiitft (no tense). Der fRciuber^auptmann i))ar fc^on gefangen genommen iuorben, al^ feine Seute l^erkifamen (pluperfect pass.). Der ©pio^n njurbe o^ne n?eitere^ an einen ^jl gefniipft unb er^angt (imper- fect pass.). Examples of the future and conditional perfects passive are very rare in the classics. Syntax of the Tenses. Simple Tenses. 274. The Present. 1. It denotes an action as now going on. SBie glan^t tie (Sonne, mie lac^t tie glur (G.). 2. It is the tense used in the statement of a general truth or fact or custom, in which the idea of time is lost sight of. •IDreimal trei ift neun. ®^it i\i tie Siebe (B.)- Sorgen m^^t ©orgen (Prov.). 3. The historical present is used in vivid narrative for a past tense. IDag gu ^inj gegeBene Seifpiel ftntet allgemetne 5^ad)^ a^mung; man ^erWt tad 2lnten!en te^ SSerrater^ ; aEe 3lrme'en fatten »on i^m afc (Sch.). 275] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — TEKSES. 105 4. For the English perfect German (also French) uses the present when the action or state continues in the present time, but there is generally an adverb denoting duration of time qualifying it. Ex.: ^m bin i(^ \khn Zao^t feier (G.). S^tod ^age gektt n^ir fc^on ^ier ^erum (id.). 3* Mn all^ier erft furje 3eit (F. 1868). This use is by no means new in German or unknown in English, e.g., *' I forget why." '' The world by what I learn is no stranger to your generos- ity " (Goldsmith, quoted by Matzner). It is closely related to the present sub 2 and 3, and generally translated by " have been " + present participle. 5. The future present, that is, the present with the force of the future, is much more frequent in German than in Enghsh. Ex.: 9Zeirt, mm, i^ ge^e na^ Der (BtaU auriid (F. 820). 2Cer mi^, mx morgen iiBer nn^ befte^It (Sch. ). It is a very old use of the present, from a time when the periphrastic future was not yet developed. 6. The English periphrastic present in " I am writing," " I do write" rarely has corresponding German phrases. For instance, tl)un is dialectic and archaic. Unb t[)U^ tttc^t me^r in 5Borten framen (F. 385). A large num- ber of present participles are looked upon as adjectives and stand in the predicate after fcin; but they do not form a tense (see 273, 1). There is a difference between the simple present and [etn + pres. part. The for- mer, if it occur at all, denotes an act of the subject, the latter denotes a quality of the same or of another subject. Ex.: ^er SWe^icu^ l)ier au^ ber @tal>t ^inau^ ^\im 3lmtmann (connect ,,^inau^" with „^nm/' not with „au^ Uv 'Bta'tt") unt) fant mt(^ an^ Uv (Erbe unter ^otttm Mr(otvn, n?ie elnige auf mir ^erumfrabbelten, an^ere mid) nedten (G.). M^n war ta^ SBort, meil e^ tie 2:^at ni(^t ti?ar (Sch.). Compound Tenses. 276. The Perfect. It is used to denote a past event as a separate act or inde-* pendent fact. The act is completed, but the result of it is felt in the present and may continue in the present. Ex. : 3d) ^abe genoffen M^ trl^ifc^e (31M (Sch. ). ^ott ^at ^ie SCelt erfd^affen = God is the creator of the world, but 3m 5lnfang fdiuf ®ott ^immel unD grte (B.). Xu ^aft^^ emi(^t, Dctai^io (Sch.). See 279, 2. 1. In the best writers this distinction is generally observed, but not in the spoken language, in which the perfect is crowding out the preterit. As an illustration of the exact use of the tenses, particularly of the pre- terit and perfect, may be recommended the introduction to Schiller's ®ef^i(^te be$ ^hfaM ber ijereinigten S'^ieberlanbe. 277. The Pluperfect. It denotes a past action which was completed before another past action began. Ex. : Zili^ I)atte hum feinen Oliidmarfd) ano,c^ txdcn,aU ter ^ontg fein Sager ju ©d)wer)t auf^o6 un^ gegen granlfurt an tcr €)Uv riidte (Sch.). 278. The Future. 1. It denotes an action yet to take place. Ex. : 3Ca6 trtrt) (lU^ bem ^int^Iein trerten ? (B.). Der ,^aifer ti^irt) morgen abreifen. 2. It denotes probability and should then not be translated by an English future as a rule. Ex. : 1)er §unt) trtrt? fec^^ ^a^xt alt fein (= ift \vo^ or mal}rfd)einUd)), the dog may be or is prob- 280J SYNTAX OF THE VERB — ^TENSES. 107 ably, six years old. SBer flopft? S^ mtrl) ein Settler fetn, it is probably a beggar. 3. In familiar language it stands for the imperative implying confident expectation of the result, ^u mirft t)ier Meiben, You shall stay here. Du n)irft t)ici) t)uten, Take good care not to do it. For the present witli the force of the future, see 274, 5. 279. The Future Perfect. 1. It is the perfect transferred to the future. Ser^ekn^ mxM i^x fiir euren gelo^errrt eu(^ geopfert ^aBen (Sch.). More fre- quently than the future, the future perfect denotes probability: SBo toiv^ er l)ie ^a^^it jugebra^t ^ben ? (Le.), Where can he have spent the night? g^ tt)irt) tx>a^ antre^ mbl betieutet ^aben (Sch.), It probably meant something else. 2. As the present can have future fcjrce, so the perfect can have future perfect force. 5Ri(^t e^er ^en! i(| l^iefe^ SSIatt gu brauc^en, bi^ eine 3:^at get^an ift, ^if iinwtterfpreAIic^ ten ipodjijerrat be3eugt (Sch.). 3. In M. H. G., the future perfect is unknown and its force is expressed by ge prefixed to the present, and by the perfect. f a. Guard against confounding the modal auxiliaries in German with the Eng. future. Approach to a future might be felt in JDoHen and foKeiif e.g., Wa^ njotten fie benn ^erau^ijer^oren, mnn ciuer unf(^ulbtg ifl? (G.) IDer ?Rei(^^tag ju 5lug^burg foE |offentU(^ unfere ^xoit'tit pr 9ieife bringen (G.). See 283, 4. 280. The Conditionals. They are future subjunctives corresponding to the preterit and pluperfect subjunctive as the future corresponds to the present. As in all subjunctives, the idea of tense is not empha- sized. Preterit subjunctive and I. conditional, pluperfect sub- junctive and II. conditional are nearly identical in force, but preterit and pluperfect deserve the preference, particularly in the passive. In dependent conditional clauses the preterit or pluperfect subjunctive oidy can stand. In the main sentence 108 STKTAX OF THE VEEB — ^TENSES. [281- there is no choice between them and the conditionals. Ex. : D^ne ^einen diat toixx^t i&j e^ ni^t ^tt^an feaben or t)atte i&i e^ nid^t get^an. ^a^ mxu\t vn an meiner t^ aU tin Za\d)&itx^ gen^efen fei. Xer ^nak Se^auptete, er ^citte e^ nid^t Qtt^an, mnn er ni&it ijon fetnen ®efa^rten la]n ^erleitet morbeit tt>are* Sr fagte an6>, er troUe e^ nic^t mieter ti^nn, mnn man i^m ie^t ijergebe* Der 3^W9^ fonnte nic^t fdjiroren, fca^ er ^en ^(ngeflagten ie gefe^eit ftabe* 1. But this rule is not strictly observed. If the main clause contains, for instance, a past tense, the other clause may take a preterit for the present, a pluperfect for the perfect, or a conditional for the future : ®a^ xodxtn bie ^Jlanetettf fagte mtr ber ^it^rer, fte regierten ba^ ®ef({)i(f (Sch.). Sl)r n)urbet bie^ fRatfel mtr erflaren, fagte jte (id.). W\x melbet (pres. for perf.) er, er Icige franf (id.). If any ambiguity arises, as is not unfrequently the case, this license should not be indulged in. If the main verb is in the pres- ent, it is not well to substitute the preterit or pluperfect in the sub- ordinate clause, because this license is due to attraction of tenses, viz., preterit in one — preterit or pluperfect in the other. Compare : ®r kteuert, er fci bagecnen, he asserts, that he is opposed, dx beteitert, er njctre bagegen mi^ht be construed as meaning er tDurbe bagegen fein, which means ** he would be opposed." ©r beteuert, er fei bagegen gemefen, he had been 283] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — TE:N^SES. 109 opposed ; er xodn bagegen gewefen might moreover be understood as having the force of the II. Conditional. For the mood of the indirect statement, see 285. For further remarks on the use of tenses, see 284, also the General Syntax. 283. Origin of the Compound Tenses. 1. The compound tenses in all the living languages are products of the development of so-called periphrastic conjugation, which uses certain independent verbs denoting existence, possession, transition, or the beginning of an action, in connection with an infinitive, participle, or gerundive. The more the inflectional endings of the simple tenses of the earlier periods weathered, the more favorable were the chances for the growth of analytical and circumlocutory tenses. Compare the Latin amor^ amatus sum or fui ; excusavi, excusatam, -um habeo or teneo with French je suis aime, -ee, je fus aime, -4e ; je Vai excuse, -ee, je I' avals excuse, -ee. The Germanic languages have only two simple tenses. Gothic shows still a mutilated passive. But the future perfect and pluperfect active and passive sprang up within historic times from a com- bination of an independent verb with an infinitive or participle, which were at first felt only as predicate noun or adjective. The participle in O. H. G. could be inflected like any predicate adjective. 2. At different periods of High German there were different verbs which could be thus employed. Besides the modern auxiliaries I)a6en, fein and tcerben, in O. H. G. €igan,+ to own. In Gothic haban + inf. was made to express the future, in O. H. G. »uln (shall) and werdan + pres. part. ; in M. H. G. besides these, wellen, muezen. %^) l^aBe ten §ut aBgenommcn or aufgefe^t means originally I have, possess the hat in some state or position, viz., in my hand (taken off) or on my head (put on). The German order, too, shows this early construction much better than the English " I have taken off my hat." Compare the Latin Excusatum habeas me rogo, "Have me excused, pray," ,,33itte, l^aBe (^alte) mtc^ (fur) entf(i)ulbigt. " ^aben could only be used with tran- sitive verbs, but losing the distinctive meaning of possession, it could combine with verbs having an object in the G. and D. and even with no object, viz., with intransi- tive verbs. §aben required the past participle in O. H. G. in the A., but fein required it in the N. ©ein could not, from the nature of its meaning, form the perf, or pluperf. active of any transitive verb, but only of intransitive? denoting a continuance of a state (Meifccn, fcin) or transition into another state, where it, however, collided with trerben, used in the future. But notice that the idea of transition and change is in most verbs, here in question, due to the prefix, ©ein + past participle could onl3r mean existence in a certain state, at most the beginning or ceasing of an existence. 3. As to verbs of motion, their relation to these verbs is very intimate. When it is not, l)abcn becomes the rival of fein, as soon as the activity of motion is to be brought out and not the result. That yein could be used with a past participle of a verb of mo- tion at all, was partly brought about by its use with a present participle and infinitive. Such forms as vermutenb, wermogenb, nac^gebenb fein, wevmuten fein are remnants of the use oism + pres. part, or inf. in M. H. G. We do not feel the participle or infinitive as such now. They form no tense. 4. SBevben + pres. part, was in M. H. G. more common than werben + inf., but the 110 sy:ntax of the verb — moods. 284- latter was the established future in the 16th century. From " I pass into the state of praising " to " I shall praise " is not a long step. 5. The conditionals formed with raurbe sprang up in the 14th century and were set- tled in the 16th, according to Grimm. In M. H. G. before the 13th century "so^cZe," " wolde " were used as in the other Germanic languages, but these lacked the umlaut, and therefore were not easily distinguishable as subjunctives. THE MOODS. Subjunctive. 284. The indicative is the mood of reality, the subjunctive is the mood of unreality, contingency, possibility. 1. The imperative subjunctive helps to fill out the impera- tive for the third persons sg. and pi. and the first person pi. It is a strong optative, see sub 2. Ex.: ^Ui^ f($tt)ei9e, jeber neige ernilen Sonen nun fetn D^r (Song). (Se^e jeber xo'm er^^ treibe, fe^e jeber mo er Wxht (G.). (Seten ©ie mir tt)ill!o'mmen. £aff en xoxx ba$, let us not do this. ®e|en tt>tr biefen ^aragrap^(en) noc^ mal bur(^, let us go over this paragraph once more. ®e^en ^ie. Slreten bie |)erren gefal^ ligft ein (rare). 2Beite and f ei, feib really subjunctives, are used as imperatives in the second person. SQBerbe munter, mein ©emiite (Hymn), ©ei rair gegvii^t, metn 58erg (Sch.). 2. The optative subjunctive expresses a wish or request. The present subjunctive implies confidence of fulfilment. Only the third person is used. Ex. : !Did) fii^re burc^ ba^ njtlbkttjegte Ce^en etn pcibtge^ ©efd^icf (Sch.). ^ein S'^ame fei »ergeffcn (Uh.). Oott ijernte^re bie ®a&e (G.). The preterit subjunctive implies less assurance, and, like the pluperfect subjunctive, even no expectation of realization. Ex. : D tr>aren xo'xx wetter I o war \^ ju ^au^ (G-.). D fa'^fl bu/ ijoller SOion^ benfc^ein ♦ , ♦ (F. 386). Scire er nur noc^ am SeBen ! (Implying „er ifl aBer tot«)» f^rcmmer (Stab, o ptt^ tc^ nimmer mit bem (Sc^werte bi(^ ijertaufc^t (Sch.). See also F. 392-7. 3. The potential subjunctive expresses an opinion as such, a possibility, a mild assertion of an undoubted fact {dipIomatiG subj.); it stands in questions, direct and indirect; in exclama- 285J SYNTAX OF THE VERB — MOODS. Ill tions. The preterit and I. conditional are the potential sub- junctives of the present ; the pluperfect and II. conditional, of the past. Ex.: 3(^ reime, hd^V i^, bo^ no(^ fo jiemlic^ pfammenf wa^ j^ufammen geprt (Le.). t)a^ gittge nod^, '*that might do yet" (id.). 2Ber iDU§te ba^ nic^t? Everybody knows that, ^atte id) bo(| mmmerme^r gebac^t, ba§ er fo grog toix^ ben witrbe (Le.). 2Bie liege fic^ aCe^ fd^reiben! (G.) (Implying „t^ ijl unmoGU(^")- %a\t ^attc ic^ ba^ S3e|le ^ergeffen (id,). S5eina|e n^are ic^ gegen einen SBaum gerannt. 2)u ^dttejl i>a^ Qemugt? (Implying „ic^ glaube esS nic^t). 9^id)t, bag ic^ tt)iigte, not as far as I know. See also the modal auxiliaries, 267. 4. The concessive subjunctive denotes an admission, yield- ing, and supposition. Generally only in the third person of the present and perfect. It borders closely upon the optative and conditional. Ex. : (£^ fojle m^ e^ tooUt (Le.). (£^ fet, ''(it is) granted." ©efette, bu fei)l ein guter ober fc^Ummer, leg^ bic^ auf^ D^r (Uh.). See mogen, 267, 3. 5. The unreal subjunctive stands in conditional sentences both in the premise and the conclusion, i. e, in the dependent clause and in the main clause, when the premise is not true. The preterit and pluperfect stand in the premise; the preterit, pluperfect, and the two conditionals in the conclusion. The preterit has present and future force, the pluperfect has future force only. Ex. : e^ liege ft(^ alle^ treffltc^ fd^Uc^ten, fonntc man bie a^ ic^ Mn (id.). 2Benn toix ®elb 6ei un^ ge^abt fatten, fo witrben ix>tr ben airmen toa^ gegekn ^akn. The premise omitted or represented by an adverb, etc. : 3c^ t^ate ha^ nid^t an Deiner 'Stelle = menn ic^ an 2)einer ©telle mxt, Sir voaxtn be^ 2:obe^. £)fne 5ll^enftoc! mxt ber SBanberer in bie S:iefe linabgefallen. The conclusion omitted : 3a tt>enn tt?ir nic^t n)drcn, fagte bie Saterne jum Syjonb. Da ging jte au^ (Folk-lore). 285. The subjunctive is the mood of the indirect state- ment, in which the speaker expresses the ideas of another in 112 SYNTAX OF THE VERB — MOODS. [286- his own words without sharing the responsibility for, and belief in, the statement. For the mood in the dependent clause included in the statement notice especially the 3. and 4. sentences of 282 and the last of 328. For examples and tense see 282. Imperative. 286. It expresses a command and occurs only in the 2. p. sg. and pi. For the 1. and 3. p. pi., see 284, 1. Sile mxt 3Beile, Make haste slowly. Seke l)U mid) meine Seute lennen (Sch.). Sintet itm (id.). S3artet i^r, int)em toiv ^oran laufen. 1. The pronoun is quite optional ; only when there is a contrast, as in the last sentence (i^r — tpir), it should stand. In the subjunctive it al- ways stands. The imperative is only used in the present and has future force, but by a license also a perfect imperative occurs : 23efen! S3efcn I (Beib^d getpefen ! says the apprentice when he wants the brooms to cease being watercarriers (G.). 287. Other verbal forms that take imperative force and a very strong one, are : 1. The infinitive : SSlaul (?[J^unl)) ^alten ! Hold your tongue. 5^ic^t anfajjen ! Do not touch. 2. The past participle : T^ie 3;rommel geriibrt (G.). grifc^ auf ^amerat)en, aup^ 9)fert), auT^ 9)fer^ I in t)a^ gelt, in Ut grei^eit geaogen (Sch.). 3. The present and future indicative : Oeorg, bu Hetbfl urn mic^ (G). T)u mx\t ben 3lpfel fc^iegen i?on tern .^opfbe^ ^naben (Sch.). See 278, 3. 4. The modal auxiliaries denoting a necessity, duty, can express imperative force, also lajfen. Du foHft nid^t fte^len (B.). ^ein Mm\6^ mu§ miiffen (Le.), no man ought to be compelled. Since the Eng. " let " shows no inflection, notice the German forms : fia§ un^ ge^en, to a person addressed as bu; plural Saf]! uit^ ge^en. 2a^tn (Bit un^ ne^eit/ to a person addressed as <3ie. 290] SYNTAX OF THE VERB — lis^EIi^ITiVE. 113 Infinitive. 288. It is a verbal noun and the present infinitive has neither voice, tense, nor inflection. The compound infinitive arose Hke the compound tenses (see 283) : gelobt tocxlm, to be praised; geloBt morDen fein, to have been praised; gelobt )^ahtn, to have praised. 1. Notice the marked difference in meaning between the present of some of the modal auxiliaries + perfect infinitive, and the perfect or pluper- fect + present infinitive. Ex. : !l)er ^utfc^er toiU ben ©efaitgenen gefejen |aben = claims to have seen him, but ^at t^n fe^en tuoUen = wanted to see him. 2)er ^aufirer mup i?orbeigegangen fein = must have passed by, but ^at ijorkige^en miiffen; was forced to pass by, etc. 289. We distinguish between the infinitive without ju and with ^n. The former is the older construction. Being a noun, the infinitive always stood in the D. after ju in O. and M. H. G. But in early N. H. G., when it was no longer in- flected, the prepositional infinitive gained ground and gave also rise to the gerundive (see 298). Usage is in many cases still unsettled as to the use of 5u. Its frequent use is the source of much bad style (see Sanders' „t§auptfd}Wicru3feitett" . . . sub Inf.). The cases where the infinitive has taken the place of the present participle are mentioned below under each head. In the gerundive alone the participial form has taken the place of the infinitive. See 298. The Infinitive without ^u. 290. 1. It is dependent upon the modal auxiharies. £)er 33ote mitt eg au^ atter Seute "iS^unD erfa^ren i:)abm. "Man fott feen Zclq ni6.)t ijor Dem 3l6ent) loBen (Prov.). Also upon t^un in quaint and dialect style, e. g., I^a t^dteit fte fi6 trennen (Uh.). See the speeches of Wartime and ?!}?argarete in F., I. Upon 1^ahn in the phrase gut i)ahn. Vn BafI gut reben, it is easy enough for you to talk, dv t^ut ni(^t5 al^ ♦ ♦ . , he does nothing but . . . 2. In certain phrases dependent upon some verbs of motion; also upon :^elfen, ^d^tn (command), lajfen, le^ren, lernen, mac^en, nennen* The verbs of motion are: fpajieren reiten, fa^ren, ge'^en; \6>la\m Qi^m, \i&i ((^lafen legen, etc. ^ei§t mi(^ ni^t re^en, 114 SYKTAX OF THE YERB — li^^FIl^ITIYE. [291- l)ei^t mii^ [(^tx^eigen ; tenti meiit ©e^^eimni^ ift mix ^flic^t (G.). Se^re mi(^ t^utt nadj Deinem 23o^lgefalIen (B.). See Schiller's Tell, 1549. 3. Dependent upon certain verbs of rest: bleiben (most fre- quently), lie^en, fte^en (rarely); and upon verbs of perceiving: ftni^en, fii^len (rarely), :^oren, fe:^en; also ):)abm. ^tcdm Heiben, to stick fast (intr.). (Scblafen liegen. Sir fanten Un ^etc^nam im SBalne liegert* ^ir fa^eit ten gul)rer ixbtv tern 5lbgrunte f(^it>eBen* Der ^vroler ^at gembl)nU(^ get)em am §ute fteden, ter Snglanter Sanger l^erunter^angen. 3d) :^ab^ ei5 ofter^ ru^meu l)cren, tin ^omo^ Ma'nt fijnnf etnen 9)farrer lebren (F. 526-7). a. ie( gu t|un. "La^ ftcl;t noc^ SU iiSerlegen^ !Da treibt'^ i^n, Den foftUAen fvd^ ^n ermerben (Sch.). This is the old and proper use of the infinitive, originally a noun in the D. governed by ju. In N. H. G. urn was added to express purpose, but it was really superfluous, though common in the spoken language. Urn bie (Stromung a^suleiten ^rukn fte ein frifc^e^ Sctte (Platen). 2Bir le^en ni^t 292] SYNTAX OF THE YERB — IKFI:N^ITIVE» 115 wm ju effen,fottbern mir effen urn in leku. The force of ju wasinucli weakened when urn could thus be added. Besides um, anftatt and o^ne can i^recede in : an^iatt m^ ju laufen, !am ber 23ar nd^er ^eran. D|ne jtc^ umpfe^en,Iief ber !I)le6 bai)on. But „um" should never be used except to express purpose. It is used too frequently. See sub 4. 2. It stands as direct object of verbs, often preceded by, or in apposition to, a pronoun or pronominal adverb + preposi- tion. Ex. : %anQ an p ^arfen unt) ju graBen (F. 2355). ^Riemant) In older periods of the language there was no ju in this case. 3. It stands as subject, in the spoken language, more fre- quently than without gu ; there is no choice. ®efal)rlid) ift^^ tien Seu 3U treden (Sch.). Sine fi^one SKenfcfeenfeeie ftnren ift ^eminn (He.). 4. As adjunct of nouns and adjectives, the latter often being qualified by ^u and ^mu^. „Xie ^unft fid) klteBt^u ma&icn," 3^ [tola, I^an! ein^uernten, m ic^ U)tt ntc^t fdete (Le.). Du mvt\t Mint) genug, l^a^ ni4t ein^ufe^n ? ♦ ♦ ♦ Sereit, ^ir ^ur (^^efedfcfeaft l)ier 3U Bleiben (F. 1431). After adjectives „um ju" is now far more common than ju alone. 3c^ bin ju alt, unt nur p fptelett, ^u iuttg, urn o'^tte SBunfd^ ju [ein (F. 1546-7). Quite rare is aU p + infinitive. 5. For the independent use of infinitive, see imperative, 287, 1. With or without ju in elliptical expressions : S©a^ t^m, fpric^t 3eu^ (Sch.). 2Ba^, am fRanh be^ &xaU in litgenl (F. 2961). AcCUSATrVTE WITH THE INFINITIVE. 292. In this construction the logical subject of the infini- tive stands in the accusative. The infinitive stands with or v^ithout ju. Ex.: §ter ru^et Martin gaulermann, tt>enn man ^ett ru^^ett fagettlann, ^cr feinen ^eUa^ ni(^t5 ^^than (Wechherlin, quoted by Blatz). Su^en, Me man Siigen ^u fetn tuei§ (Le.). 1. Accusative with infinitive was not rare in O. H. G. in the translations from Latin and Greek. It is largely due to foreign influence. In M. H. G. it is very rare. In 116 SYKTAX OF THE VEKB — PARTICIPLES. [293- modern German it is discouraged by the best authorities, though Lessing uses it quite frequently. 2. The corresponding English constructions must therefore be rendered freely into German. I believe him to be my friend, 3(^ glaube ba^ er mein greunb ift or 3(J) i)alk il)n fur meinen greunb. German loses thus a compact construction. The Infinitive as a Noun. 293. Some infinitives are felt as nouns only, e, g,, ta^ SeBen, tai Slnfe^en, ta^ SeiDen* The infinitive used as noun generally has the article. £)a^ S^aud^en ift l)ier ^erboten* 33eim Uberfe'^en mu^ man bis an^^ Uniiberfe'^lic^e ^^erangetn (Q.). 'Der Srkn SBeinen ift ein ^eimli(^ ^a6:itn (Prov.). Participles. 294, The participles are really adjectives derived from verbal stems. The present participle retains more of the verbal construction and force than the pas(^, in which the idea of tense only appears in intransitive verbs. The present participle has active force in all verbs and the noun is the subject of the action. T)er Iad5elnt)e (See, W auf^ get)ente (Sonne, ta^ fc^IageniDe ^Better, " fire-damp." Both parti- ciples can be used as nouns, adjectives, and adverbs very much as in English. They stand in apposition, in the predi- cate and as attributes. 1. Participles in which the noun is not the subject of the action, and those in which lies passive rather than active force, are still current, but not so frequent as in early N. H. G. They are not generally countenanced, e. g. , M fc^lafenber 5^ad)t, " at night time," *' when everybody sleeps " ; cine ft^enbe Sebenaart, a sedentary habit of life ; ejTenbe SBaaren, eatables (better (£p^ Jvaaren); cine ijor^abenbe fRd\t, an intended journey. Some of these can be defended: fa^renbe ^aU, movables, chattels (intrans. verb); erjlauncnbe 9?ac^ric^t, astonishing news (trans, verb) ; eine ntelfenbe ^ui^ (intrans. like ,,tttild)en"); bte reitenbe ^o% postman on horseback. Poetic are ber fc^tDtn- belnbe %tU, the giddy rock. fSon be^ ^aufe^ tt)eitfc^auettbem ©teBel (Sch.). 2. In the predicate appear now only such present participles as have be- come regular adjectives : kbeutenb, important ; reijenb, charming ; binrei^enb. ravishing ; kibenb, in pain, ill health ; brtngenbf urgent. See 274. 6. L 296] ST]^TAX OF THE VERB — PARTICIPLES. 117 3. In apposition : ^oc^enb, tt)te au^ Dfena ffta^tn, glii^n bte :2ufte (Sch.). 3^ emt)fange fnieenb bie^ ®e[^en! (id.). 4. The participial clause with the present participle is only in very restricted use in German compared with English. It cannot express an action preceding or following another action, a cause, purpose, etc. It has usually the value of an adjective clause and can often be explained as in apposition. 2)er ^rme, ftc^ an mi(^ ipenbenb, fpra(|j ^aUn 'Bit MitUib, mein ^txx. 295. The past participle of a transitive verb has passive force ; that of a verb which forms its compound tenses with feitt has active force: ^er lauBumfrangte SSec^er (Sch.); ta^ ^erge^ fii^rte ^ol! (id.); tie aBgefegelten @d)tjfe; tier turd^gefadene (unsuc- cessful) Santita't* 1. But not all verbs that have fein in compound tenses can be thus used ; the participle must denote the state produced by the action of the verb. !Dte gefegelten (B(^tjfe, ber gelaufene ^ned)t would not do. !£)er entlaufenc 'BUa'ot means "the runaway slave." This force is clear from the origin of the compound tense with fein (see 273, 283). 2. Seemingly a large number of past participles have active force, but they are either quite wrong or they can be explained as having had origi- nally passive force. Thus : „Ungebetet i§t man ntd)t" (Gerok) ; wungegeffen in S3ette ge^n" are as wrong as their English equivalents: One does not eat unprayed, go to bed uneaten. „S3ebieut" means ** in service," ''invested with an oflace," hence a servant, elrt ^ebienter. w^erbient," one who has merits, mil er jt(^ unt etma^ or jemanb ijerbient gemad)t ^at; etngcMlbet means conceited, taken up with one's self ; etn ^erlogener SD^enfc^, a man given to lying ; ijerfoffener SJJenfc^, given to drinking, and many other compounds with i?er- : ijerweinte 5(ugen, eyes red with weeping. a. That some are now felt as havinj? active force cannot be denied, else the wrong use mentioned could not have sprung up : gott?, pfltcf)tttergc[feii, forgetful of one's duty, of God.; toevfdjlafen, " one who slept too long" ; wermeffen, " presumptuous " j toevlegen, embarrassed ; besides the above. 296. The pecuUar past participles of verbs of motion, which seemingly have active force, stand in a sort of apposi- tion or as predicates with fommen, rarely with ge^en, Ex. : Stam ettt 55ogeI ^eflogen (Song). 3)a fommt be^ ffiegiJ geritten dn fd)muc!er S^elfne^t (Uh.). 118 SYKTAX OF THE ADVEEB. [297- 1. This use is by no means modern, ^omnten and ge^n are felt as auxiliaries. Compare ^crloren ge^en. 2» Special notice deserves the past participle with t)ei^en, fein, and ncnnen, which has the force of an infinitive, but belongs under this head. Da^ ^ei§t fc^lec^t Qtxoox^tn, That is a bad throw. Unter e^rlic^en Seuten nennt man ha^ n^do^m*" %xi^^ setvagt i\i ^al^ getT^onnen (Prov.). 297. The participle appears in au absolute construction. The logical subject is left indefinite (Lessing is very fond of this). The logical subject stands in the accusative and with a few, hke au^genommen, eingefc^Ioffen, abgered)net, even in the nominative. 5l(Ie maren gugegen, ter 5>farrer au^^genommen, Unt) liefer nun auf Saofoon an^tmnUt, fo ift Me (Ba&|^ !(ar (Le.). 1. Closely related to this construction is the absolute accusative + a past participle (see 209) and in some cases there may be doubt as to which is meant. Unb fie jtngt ^inau^ in bie finftcre ^ad)t, ba^ ^luge »Dn 2i3einen getriibct (Sch.). The past participle is in elliptical construction in the imperative, see 287, 2. The Gterundive. 298. It stands only attributively. In the predicate the old infinitive stands, which it has supplanted. Xer noc^ ju t>e.r- faufcnte (9(^ran!, the wardrobe which is still to be sold; but ^cr (Bd)xant ift nod) ^u ^erfaufen, the wardrobe is still to be sold. See 289, 452. Though the form is rather that of the gerund than of the gerundive, in construction it closely resembles the Latin gerundive. Hence the name in German. SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 299. The adverb qualifies a verb, an adjective or another adverb. Ex. : Tn baft ntt(^ mad^tig ange^ogen (F. 483). Die unBegreiflicfe ^el)en SBerfe ftnt) l)errli(^ mie am erften Za^ (F. 249-50). Da^ ift fe^br fcfcon gefd)riekn. 1. The adverbs of time and place often accompany a noun with the force of an attribute : ^ox Seuem brokn fte^t geMicft, ber (jclfen le^rt uub -^ilfe fcl)lc!t (F. 1009-10). ©eorg V. (ber giinfte), einft ^onig ijon ^annoijer, jlarb im 5lu^lanbe. 3011 SYNTAX OE THE PREPOSITIOK. 119 2. The adverb stands as a predicate : !Die f(^onen Beitett »ort 3lraniuc§ finb nun »orukr (Scli.). 1)te Z^ux ijl ju (one can supply „gemac^t")* 2)er or tern ^JliniTter ijl ni^t wo% a. Do not confound cjut and wol^l. Except in a few cases, as in wol}! t^un, to do good, wo^l does not qualify a transitive verb. We do not say in German vdoI^I f^reifccn, ttJD^I antnjDvten, rvc^ anfangeu in the sense of English " well." ©v l)at e§ luo:^! gefd)rteljen means " he wrote it, indeed, (I assure you) " ; or it is concessive and can mean : " to be smre he wrote it, but then — ." In the last sense ircl)l lias no stress. 3. With adjectives or participles used as nouns that are felt rather as substantives than as adjectives or as derived from a verb, the adverb chang^es to an adjective: ein m^ fStxtoawWx > ein na^er il^emanbter; ein intint SBefannter > ein intimer 23efannter» But compare Goethe's famous line : 300. An adverb ma}^ strengthen the force of a preposition by standing before or after the preposition + case. This is always the case when the adverb is the X3refix of a separable compound verb: ring^ urn tie 8tat^t (^erum), mitten t^ur^ im 2Ba(i?, in t>a^ ®orf ^inein, am tern ®arten :^erau^» S^ ritten l^rei Sfteiter ^um Z^oxt ^tnau^ (Uh.). 1. Mark the adverbs which are only adverbs and not adjectives : tt)o|l, fajl, \^on, fe^r, neuUc^f freilic^, fru^ (rare), [pat (rare), balb, and others. 2. The uninflected comparative and superlative of adjectives serve also as adverbs. Notice the difference between au^ + A. and an + D. e n, ^ a U e r, !^ a I b, on account of, + in behalf of. Follows 302] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION — GENITIVE. 121 its case. Frequent in composition : ht^f^al^, therefore ; meittet^alBctt^ on my behalf; ^Iter^ ^albcr, on account of age. Comp. tDcgen and toiUm* 5. traft, according to, by virtue of. traft be^ ©efe^e^ ; fraft be^ ^mte«. Formerljonly ill traft,^.^',, ba§flet^ bcr aebile(©o^n) . ♦ ♦ in ^raft attein be^ fftin^^f ba^ ^aupt, ber gurjl be^ |)aufe^ t»erbe (Le.). Comp. laut. 6. 2aut, from, «nac^ 2aut," laut^ (Lutlierj, means ''according to,' " bj." Saut ©efe^l^# by command ; laui be^ Xeflamentc^, according to the last will and testament. Plural nouns without articles in which the genitive could not be dis- tinguished stand in the dative : laut 33riefenf according to letters. Saut means literally according to a verbal or written statement ; fraft gives a moral reason. 7. ^itttl^, mitteljl (most common), ijetm it telftr by means of, with. 2)?ittel|^ tim^ ^ammtx^, etne^ S3o(}rer^. It is more expressive than mit or burc^. Rarely with the dative. 8. D ^f rare and archaic. With genitive if causal (on account of) ; with dative if local (above), and temporal (during). T)a minttn sufammen bie ©renabter^ tt)ol)l ob ber flctglidjm ^unbe (Heine). Db hmx Salb; nib bem SBalb (Sch., Tell); ob bem 5lltare (id.), 9. 2; r If with genitive and dative, in defiance of, in spite of ; in the sense of **in rivalry with," ''as well as," always with the dative. Zxoi^ be^ ^cftigen 9iegen^ fu^ren n)ir aK ^ie ©dngerin ftngt tro| eincr ^a^tiQaU, as well as a nightingale. Comp. the forms ju or jum ^iroi^e preceded by a dative : ?D^tr jum 2:rc|c fu:^r er fort ju lefen, in defiance of me or to defy me he continued reading. 10. U n a n g e f e ^ e n/ setting aside, unbefc^abet, without detriment to, u n g e a d) t etf notwithstanding (very frequent). The last two also with a preceding dative; bemungea(^tet is felt as an adverb. These are very modern prepositions. Unwett, unfern# not far from, occur also with dative. 11. 2} ermogCf in virtue of, through, in consequence of, by dint of. Denotes a reason springing from a quality of the subject : ^ermoge feiner fReblt(^fctt, through his honesty. We could not say fraft feiner 9i*; ijerntogc (and not fraft) grofer ^Infhrengungett/ by dint of great efforts. (Perhaps from r^nac^ 35ermogen»") 12. Sal^renbr during. Sometimes with the dative: n)a^renbbemf meanwhile. 13. 935 e g e tt, on account of, both preceding and following the noun ; 122 SYNTAX OF THE PKEPOSITIOJST — DATIVE. [303- also with the dative. SBegen denotes also a motive and an impediment. (Seiner ®ro§e wegen fonnte basg ©ii)iiT nid^t burd^ ben Ma^ fc^Iagen, f(^te§en, to strike at, shoot at. 9^ac^ ettua^ fd^mecfen, rted)en; etc., something has the smell, taste of ; m^ etma^ itrteilen, to judge by ; nac^ etwa^ or jemanb f^icfen, to send for. (See ju and gemdf 124 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION" — DATIVE. [303- 11. 91 d (^ ll is the superlative of na^e (nac^), and denotes very close nearness to in place, order, = + *' next to." Bundcbjl lias no different force. ilnb nd(^|l bem Seben n?a^ erfle^ft bu bir? (G.). 12. ^tl\l denotes very loose connection and connects also things and persons not necessarily belonging together; famt, on the other hand, only what naturally belongs together. 5(uf etner (Stange trdgt jte etneu ^ut nebjl einer Saline (Sch.) (a hat and a banner). < nebenf! < L. G. nevens. 13. ©am tf mit famt# jit \amt, " together with." ^id) famt ntctncm gan^en ^eere bring^ ic^ bem |)erjO(] (Sch.). See neb)l. It implies a close union, which does not lie even in mit* 14. © e i t, older jtnt, = + since, denotes the beginning of an action and its duration to the present moment, ©eit biefem S^age fc^metgt mir jeber 9)?unb (Sch.). ©r ift herein feit me:^reren ©tunben (id.), it is several hours since he came in (into the city). . (Sett einigen 3a^ren ja^lt er feine Binfen, For sev- eral years he has paid no interest. 15. 25 H/ *' from," denotes the starting point of a motion or action in time and place. Its case is often followed by another preposition or by Ijer. S^on ber ^anb in ben 9)lunb; ijon 2Borten fam'^ ju ©(^Idgen, from words they came to blows. 23on Dftern U& 9?ftng|len ifl fiinfjig 2;age. Origin : 2Balt{)er »on ber S^ogelmeibe* %vix\t »on SBi^marcf. ^err i?on (B(^uleml)urg» Hence ijon in the names of persons denotes nobility : ^err ijon red)en, etc. ©te fang ju i^m, fie fprac^ ju t^m (G.). Bu ft^ fommcn, *'corae to" ; etraa^ lu fic^ jleto, to put something in one's pocket. (This is its only use in 0. H. G. In M. H. G. its use spread.) In dialect and in poetry it stands before names of cities and towns (= at). 2n ©tra§burg auf ber (Bc()anj (Folk-song). 3^r [etb mcin ®afl ju etten 0litt urn bte 2Belt (Arndt). Unb mn i^n bte ®ro§en ber .^rcne (Sch.). ^er or ^erum often follows the case : 3n einem ^albfret^ jlanben urn i^n ^er fed^^ ober jtekn gro^e ^onig^Mlber (Sch.). It denotes inexact time or number: Um 9J?ttternad)t begral^t ben ;2ei6 (Bii.). Urn brei ^unbert ^orer, an audience of about three hundred. (®egen is rather " nearly," um means more or less.) But „um breiijiertet fitnf" means "at a quarter to five." ''At about" would be ffiingefd^r um'' or ^um ungefd^r," e. g., ungefdBr um 6 U^r. It denotes further exchange, price, difference in size and measure : ^ug"' um 5[uger B^^n um 3a^n (B.). mt^ ifl eu^ feil um ®elb (Sch.). Um ^ei BoH ju flein. ©r ^at ji(^ um jwei 5)fenntge verrec^net* Loss and deprivation : um**^ ;2eBen Bringen, to kill ; um^^ ®elb fommen^ to lose one's money, ^a n?ar^^ um i^n gefd^e^n (G.), He was done for. SBer brad^te mid) brum? (um beine Siebe) (F. 4496), Who robbed me of it? It denotes the object striven for: um etnja^ n?erben, fptelen, frageUf Ibitten, f^retteUf beneiben, etc. The object of care, mourning, weeping ; SBein^ um ben S3ruber, boc^ md)t um ben ©eltebten toeine (Sch.). (Bd)abe tt)dr^0 ViXSi eure ^aare (id.). 9^tc^t um biefe t^ut^^ mir leib (id.). 308] THE PEEPOSITIOK — DATIYE AKD ACCUSATIVE. 127 8. 2B i b e r, ** against," always in the hostile sense. Denotes resistance and contrast : 2Ba^ ^tlft un^ ^t1)x unb SBaffe mbtx ben ? (Sch.). ©^ ge^t i^m tt>iber bie S^latur, It goes against his grain. + Eng. " with " in withstand. Prepositions governing the Dative and Accusative. 305. 2ln, anl ()inter, in, mUn, nUx, unkx, vor, jtuifci^en. 1. In answer to the question whither ? they require the accusative. In answer to the question where? the dative. 3)flan3C tie Siiume ijor t)a^ $au^* tk SSaume fte^^en vor l^em ipaufe. 2. In answer to the question how long and until when ? they require the accusative. In answer to the question when ? the dative : 3«t ^ai^n 1872 murtc ©trapurg toituv aU Deutfdje Uni^erfitat erojfnet* Sir reifert auf v^ier^e^n ^age in^ Sat)* 3. When an, auf, in, ixln, unter, ^or denote manner and cause, then auf and ixbtx always require the accusative, but an, in, unter, ^or generally the dative, in answer to the questions how and why? 2Bir freuen un^ ixUv {= over) and auf (= looking for- ward to) feme 9ln!unfL 2luf tiefe SBeife, but in tiefer ^eife. Der Settler n?einte ijor ^i^euten iiber tie ^errli^e ®at)e. The above general rules, as given in Kraase's grammar, will be found of much practical value. 306. 1. 5ln + Dative. After nouns and adjectives of plenty and want : Syjangel an ®elb, nx^ an ©utern. After adjectives when the place is mentioned where the quality appears : an beiben %}X^tr\ la^m, an einem Sluge Minb. After verbs of rest, increase or decrease, and after those denoting an immediate contact or a perception : %n ber ^mUt fag bcr ^nabe (Sch.). (£0 fe^lt an 33iid)ern. !Der 5lu^tx)anberer lltt am 2Be*feIfteber» t)tx Si^euner fii^rt ben S3dren an einer .R'ette, !Den SJogel er!ennt man an ben i^ebern (Prov.). It denotes an office and time of day : am 2:^eater, an ber Uni^erjttat, am ^mte angefiellt fein, to hold an office at ... ; am Wlox^tn, %knt> ; e^ ijl an ber Beit . . ♦ , it is time .... 128 THE PEEPOSITIOK — DATIVE AI^D ACCUSATIVE. [306- 2. 21 n + Accusative. After htnUn, erinncrn, m^nen and similar ones, and verbs of motion, 2)eufet an ben 9^u^m, nid^t an bie ®efa|r. (Se^en (Bit ft(^ bo(^ an^ %tn^tx (near tlie window). Inexact number : an bie brei mai ^unbert taufcnb Mann (as many as). From its English cognate "on" an differs very much in meaning. *' On " generally is auf. See also 300, 2. 3. 2iuf + "upon." For auf + Dative, see 305, 1, 2, 3. It denotes rest or motion upon the surface, 3luf + Accusative. Stands after verbs of waiting, hoping, trusting, etc., e.g., auf ctn)a^ tt>arten, ^ojTen, fi(^ kftnnen (recall), gefapt fetn, fic^ frenen (see 305, 3), ijerjic^ten^ (e$) auf etma^ wagenf ^oren. Here it stands generally for the old gen. with- out preposition. 3^ tann mx6) auf bie genauen Umftanbe ni^t ibeftnnen, I cannot recall . . . ©er |)unb njartet auf fein ^reffen, SKerfe auf bie ^cxit be^ Se:^rerd. Zxot^t ni(^t auf euer 9^e(iyt (Sch.). After adjectives denoting pride, envy, anger, malice, e.g., eiferfiic^tigf neibif(^, ftolj, Bijfe, txlo\t: eiferfud)ti9 auf feme ©i)re (Sch.) ; jlol^ auf feine Unfc^ulb; erbofl auf ben ©efangenen (it^er would mean cause). Exact time, limit, and measure ; often with ,M^,*' Here belongs the superlative, see 300, 2. S5t^ auf^g SBIut, S3i^ auf Speif' unb 2:ranf (Le.). (£^ tfl ein 2?iertel auf brei, a quarter past two. ^uf bie SD^Jinu'ter ^efu'nbef auf ©c^u§n)ette, at shooting distance. S3i^ auf bie S^Jeige, to the last drop. 5(uf fteben fc^on eine^ mieber (Le.). (Nathan had '* toward " or " as a return for " his seven dead sons one child in Reclia.) 2luf eine Maxf ge:^en l^unbert 3>fennige. 4. $ t n t e r + " behind," opposite of ,fiovJ' See 305, 1, 2. It denotes inferiority : Die franjoftfc^e ^frtitlerie f!anb mlt Winter ber beutf(i)en IwxM (ambiguous, either stood far back of the G. or was much inferior to the G.). Notice the following idioms : fid) Winter etttja^ madjen, to go at with energy. 3(^ !ann nid^t baMnter fommen, I cannot understand it. (S^ Winter ben D^ren ^aben, to be sly (coll.) ; Winter bie D:^ren fd)Iagen, to give a box on the ear ; ft^ et»a^ l^inter bie D^ren f^reikn, to mark well. 5. 3^ + in, into (A.). The German and English prepositions are more nearly identical than any other two. See 305, 1, 2. 306] THE PREPOSITION — DATIVE AlTD ACCUSATIVE. 129 3tt + Accusative. Denotes direction, including transition, change, division : SSettn ber 2iih in @taui) jerfaEen, lebt ber gro^e 9lame noc^ (Sch.). 2)eutf^lattb jenig auf bicfem 0Jei(^^tage in stt)ei Oieligio'nen unb imi ^olitifc^e 5)artei'cn (id.). 6. ^ e b e n, near, by the side of. See 305; 1, 2. < eneben, lit. "in a line with." 7. Uber + over, above. See 305, 1, 2, 3. iiber + Accusative. After verbs denoting rule and superiority over, e.g., l^errfi^enf ftegenf vcrfiigen (dispose) ; laughter, astonishment, disgust, in general an expres- sion of an affection of the mind, e. g., itber etn)as$ la^en, erftaunen, ft(| ♦ ♦ . ^e^ nagen,rtc^ . . ♦ entritjlen, fic^ argern. (For an older simple genit.) ^arlber^ro^e ftcgtc uber bte ©ac^fen. ^a^ 3:e|lament ^erfiigt iiber ein groped 33ermogen. 2Bie fhi^te ber 9)okl iiber bie neuen Si^re^en (G-.). 'Die ©efangenen kflagen ftc^ uber i^re S3e|anblung. fiber fein S3ene^men haU id) nti(^ rec^t gecirgert. It denotes time and excess in time, number, measure : Uber^^ 3a^r, a year hence, only in certain phrases, duration : iiber S^ac^t, bie S^a^t uber, !Den (Sabbat^ iiber tt)aren fie jlille (B.). Uber ein Sa^r, more than a year (ambiguous, either *'more than a year'' or " a year hence "). Uber brei taufenb ^anonen. iiber aUe 33egviffe [d)on, beautiful beyond comprehension. When it denotes duration or simultaneousness, or when the idea of place is still felt, then the dative follows ; when it denotes the reason then the accusative follows. This is clear when the same noun stands in both cases, as in 3c^ bin iiber bem 33u(^e eingefc^Iafen, means " while reading it I fell asleep." ^d) bin iiber ba^ 33uc^ etngefc^Iafen means "it was stupid, therefore I fell asleep." Uber ber S3efd)reibnn9 ha ijergefp id) ben ganjen ^rieg (Sch.). (Sd}abe, ba^ uber bem fd)onen 2Bai)n be^ Cel)en^ ^efle |)dlfte ba^in ge^t (Sch.). Notice »0n ttwa^ and iiber etwa^ fprec^en. Sc^ ^a^e batjon gcfprod^cn/ I have mentioned it. 3d) f)CLU bariiber gefproc^en, I have treated of it, spoken at length. 8. Uttter + under. See 305, 3. In the abstract sense this rule holds good. It denotes protection, in- feriority, lack in numbers (Dative, opposite of iiber), mingling with, con- temporaneous circumstance (D.). It stands for the partitive genit. (= among). Unter bem ©c^u^e. 2)er i^elbwe^el fie|t itnter bem Dfftuer. 2©er tt)itt unter bie ©obaten, ber . ♦ . , he who wants to become a soldier (Folk- 130 SYKTAX OF THE CONJUl^CTIONS. [308- song). ®r t|^ brunter geBUebenr te did not reach the number. Sambrai offnete fetnem (BxMi^oft unter (amid) freubigem 3urufc bie Sl^ore tuieber (Sch.), 2Ber unter (among) biefen (D.) reid^t an unfern i^rteblanb ? (Sch.) (^on biefen would be " of these "). It denotes time when none of the exacter modes of ex- pressing time is used : 2Bir finb geboren unter gleic^en (Sternen (Sch.). Unter ber Olegterung ber ^onigin S5tctoria = in the reign ; n^ci^renb implies not a sin- gle act, but a commensurate duration, = during, ^er ©afrifta'n f(^Uef KDOt^renb ber S^rebtgt, but gtng unter ber ^^rebigt ^tnau^* In «unterbeffen," and other compounds of that class, inbeffen, etc., the gen. is probably adverbial and not called for by the preposition. See jn)ifcl)en. 9. S5 r 4- before, in front of. See 305, 1, 2, 3. SSor + Dative. Introduces the object of fear and abhorrence ; .^etn ©ifengttter f(^u^t »or t^rer Sift (Sch.). S5or 9ett)iffen ©rinnerungen moc^t^ i6) mic^ gem pten (id.). Wlix grant ijor bir. Time before which anything is to happen or has happened : Der ^onig if! gefonnen, ijor 5(knb in 9)labrib nod) einjutrefen (Sch.). 25or brei^ig 3a^ren, thirty years ago. S5or ad)t Za^tn, a week ago. Hindrance and cause : Die ®ro§ntutter mxh i)or Summer jlerkn (Sch.). Den SBalb »or lauter S3aumcn nic^t fet)en (Prov.). S3or hunger, i)or Durjl jler^en. Preference : »or aKen Dingen, above all things ; :^errli(^ ijor alien. 25 or and fur are doublets and come from for a and furi respectively. In M. H. G. fur + A. answered the question whither ? wr + D. the ques- tion where ? In N. H. G. they were confounded, even in Lessing very frequently, but in the last seventy years the present syntactical difference has prevailed. Goethe and Schiller rarely confound them 10. Qn^ii&jtn. " Between " two objects in place, time, and in the figurative sense. 9iein mup e^ Meikn jn)ifd)en mir unb i^m (Sch.). Die ©olfenfaute tarn jtt)ifd)en ba^ ^eer ber S9t)pter unb ba^ |)eer 3^rael^ (B.). See 305, 1, 2 ; also unter = among, sub 8. SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 307. The conjunctions are divided : 1. Into the coordinat- ing, like unb, lenn, etc. ; 2. Into the subordinating, e. g., mil, 1)a, aU, etc. They are treated in the General Syntax, where see the various clauses. 309] GEKERAL SYNTAX — SIMPLE SENTENCE. 131 GENERAL SYNTAX. I. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 308. Subject and verb make up the simple sentence. This sentence may be expanded by complements of the subject and of the verb. The subject may be either a substantive, a sub- stantive pronoun, or other words used as substantives. The attributes of the subjects may be adjective, participle, adjec- tive pronouns, numerals. These are adjective attributes. Substantives, substantive pronouns, and the infinitive are substantive attributes. Their relation to the subject may be that of apposition and of coordination; or they may be con- nected by the genitive, or by preposition + case in subordi- nation. Preposition + case is more expressive than the genitive alone, when the subject is to be defined as to time, place, value, kind, means, purpose. The predicate is either a simple verb or a copula + adjec- tive or substantive or pronoun which may be again expanded like the subject. The complements of the verb are object and adverb. The object is either a noun, substantive pronoun, or other words used as nouns. It stands in the accusative, dative or genitive, or is expressed by preposition + case. The adverb qualifies the verb, adjective, and other adverb. It is either an adverb proper or preposition + case of substan- tive or what is used as such. It may also be a genitive or an accusative. 309. As to form the main sentences may be divided as follows : 1. Declarative sentences, which either affirm something of the subject or deny something with regard to it. Affirmative : ^ura tft Ux Sd^merj unt) mx^ ift Dit SreuDe (Sch.). Du haft 'Eta^ ma'ntm unD 5)erlen (Heine). Negative : Xa^ SeBen ift t»er ©liter ]32 GEN^ERAL SYNTAX— SIMPLE SE;NrTE:N'CE. [309- l)od)fte5 ni&jt (Sch.). ©ie foEen x^n nidfet ^aUn, ten freien teutf^en m^tin (Beck). 1. The double negative is still freqaent in the classics and collo- quially, but it is not in accordance with correct usage now : ^eine £uft S)OU feiner Seite (G-., classical). Man fte^tr t»a^ er an nic^t^ feinen 5(nteil nimmt (F. 3489) (said by Margaret, coll.). After the comparative it also occurs in the classics : ^ir muiTen t>a^ sBerf in biefen ndd)tlen Za^tn miitx forbern, al^ e^ in Sa^ren ntd)t gebiel) (Sch.). 2. After verbs of *'liinderiDg," -'forbidding/' " warning," like i)er=* pten, ijeri^inbernf warnen, ijerMcten, etc., the dependent clause may contain „m(^U: 5^ur ptet euc^, ba§ i^r mir ni(^t^ ^ergiept (G.). S'^imm bic^ in 5lc^t, bag bic^ fHa^t nii^t »erberk (Sch.). 3. When the negative does not affect the predicate, the sentence may still be affirmative. S'ii^t ntir, ben eignen Slugen mogt i^r glauben (Sch.). But nid^t mir stands for a whole sentence. 2. Interrogative sentences: $aft tu ba^ ©(^log pefe^en? (Uli.). 2Ber reitet fo f))dt burd^ 5^a^t unt) 2Cmt) ? (G.). Double question : SBar ber Settler ^erriicft ober tt>ar er betrunfen? (Slaubft bu tai3 ober niftt? SBillft ^u immer wetter fcfctt»eifen ? (G.). 2l>er meip ba^ nid^t ? For the potential subjunctive in questions, see 284, 3. For the indirect question, see 325, 2. 3. The exclamatory sentence has not an independent form. Any other sentence, even a dependent clause, may become exclamatory: D, In S^alb, o i^r Serge bru6en mie feib i^r fo jung geBUeben unb ic^ Hn morben fo alt! (Uh.). I)a^ ijt ta^ £o^ te^ ©d)onen auf ^er grbe ! (Sch.). Sa^ unV (owe) t(^ i^m nidJt aUt^ I (id.). 2Bte ber ^nabe geivac^fen ift ! For the imperative and optative sentences, see 284, 2 ; 280. 310. Elliptical clauses generally contain only the predicate or a part of it, including the object or adverb, ©iiten 3}?orgen ! (53elt ! Truly ! ©etroffen I You have hit it ! Sauiifam I (Sc^neU ! etc. It is very frequent in the imperative, see 287. Proverbs often omit the verb : fSul ©ef^rei unb tventg 2BcIIe. ^leine ^inbcr, Heine 8orgen; gro^e ^inber/ grcpe (Borgen. See 309, 3, in which the last examples are really dependent questions. 313] GENERAL SYNTAX — SIMPLE SENTENCE. 133 Concord of Subject and Predicate. 311. The predicate (verb) agrees with the subject in num- ber and person. Two or more subjects (generally connected by unD) require a verb in the plural : Unter Den 3liwejcnten n^ed^feln gurd)t mil Srftaunen (Sch.). "Lo&i an ttm ^er^en nagten mlr Ux Unmut nrit) tie ©treitbegier (id.). 1. If the subjects are conceived as a unit and by a license greater in German than in English, the verb may stand in the singular ; also in the inverted order if the first noun is in the singular. Ex. : Wa^ x\t ba^ fur eiu ^am, t>a§ i^m 2i5inb unb Mm ge^orfam ift (B.). ©^^ fprcc^e SBelt unb ^a6)^ mlt, etc. (Sch.). !Da fommt ber MHer unb feine ^nec^te* By license : (Ba^m unb Xl^un ijl jweicrlel (Prov.). ©a^ sjjji^trauen unb bie Siferfuc^t . . ♦ ertt)ac^te Mb tDteber (Sch.). 2. The plural verb stands after titles in the singular in addressing royalty and persons of high standing. In speaking of ruling princes the plural also stands. Servants also use it in speaking of their masters when these have a title. Ex.: Sure ((£tr>.) 9)?aieftdt, 2)urc^lau(^t, ©xcettenj kfe^ten? (Seine SJJaiefldt ber ^atfer ^aben geru^t, etc. !Der |)err ©e^eime |)ofrat finb nic^t ju |)aufe. !^ie ^errfc^aft jtnb aus^gegangcn. 312. After a collective noun the verb stands more regularly in the singular than in Eng. Only when this noun or an in- definite numeral is accompanied by a genitive pi., the plural verb is the rule. In earl^^N. H. G. (B.) this plural was very common. IDie ^^en^e flot). Mt ffielt nimmt Jetl (G.). Unb Ui Junge 35oI! ber ©(^nttter ftiegt jum Xan^ (Sch.). 3lIIe SJlenge ^eine^ ipaufe^ follen fterkn (B.). 313. When the subject is a neuter pronoun, e^, Me^, H^, etc., the neuter verb agrees with the predicate noun or sub- stantive pronoun in number: T)a^ tt?aren mir felige ^age (Over- beck). S^ finb tie ^ruc^te i^re^ 2;^un^ (Sch.). S^ jogen trel 3ager ti?ot)I auf t)ie Sirf(^ (Uh.). In this case e^ is only expletive. 2Ser fmt) l)iefe ? 134 GEKERAL SYNTAX — SIMPLE SENTEITCE. [314- 314. When subjects are connected by cntn?et)er — ot>er, nid^t nur — font^ern au(^, irer)er — no(^, fotro^l — aU {au6^), the verb has the person and number of the first subject and joins this one if the subjects are of different persons. The verb for the second subject is omitted. dnimUx t)U Qtl)\t (or gebft In) oDn id)* ZdU tear \6:i f(^ult), ttiU er. Subjects of the same person connected by the above correlatives ; by ot^er, nebft, mit, famt have as a rule a singular verb and the verb joins the second subject. i;)em 3?oI!e tann mux geuer bet nodj 2Baffer (Sch.), Neither fire nor water can harm those people. 315. If the subjects are of different persons, the first has the preference over the second, the second over the third. Moreover, the plural of the respective pronouns is often added. Der la unt> idj, toix ftnt) an^ Sger (Sch.). X)u unt> ter Setter, (t^r) gel)t nac^ ipaufe. The adjective as a predicate or attribute has been sufficiently treated under the adjective, see 210-225. 316. The noun as a predicate agrees with the subject in case ; if the subject is a person, also in number and gender, but in the latter only when there are special forms for mascu- line and feminine. See 167. Ex.: Die S:>eltgef^id^te ift U^ SSeItgen*t (Sch.). Xie 5Rot ift W Gutter ter grfin1)ung (Prov.). £a^ 5iKat(^ett tr>iE je^t Sraie^erin mxUn,^utx\i woEte fie ©c^aufpielerin itjerben. 1. If one person is addressed as ©te or 3^r, the substantive stands of course in the singular. „(Bk finb etn grower Mn\itx tm (Sc^ie^en." Poetic and emphatic are such turns as : Olegierte S^lec^t fo laget t^r i)or mir tnt Staubc ie|t, benn id) bin (Suer ^onig (Sch. , spoken by Maria Stuart). 317. The substantive in apposition has the same concords as the substantive in the predicate, only the rule as to case is frequently found unobserved in the best writers. S3a^ Senu^ bant), t)ie Sringerin te^ Q^iM^, tarn "SHnx^, ter (Bttxn U^ Ungliirf^ 320] GEKERAL SYNTAX — COMPOUND SENTENCE. 135 fcbnea aerreigen (Sch.). 3^r fennet i^tt, ben ®c^b))fer fu^ner §eere (id.). The apposition may be emphasized by namlic^ and aU : S^nen, a\^ einem gereiften Mamt, glauben )»ir. II. THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 318. The compound sentence consists of two or more clauses, which may be coordinate (of equal grammatical value) or subordinate (one dependent upon the other). Coordinate Sentences. We may distinguish various kinds of coordinate sentences, which may or may not be connected by conjunctions. 319. Copulative Sentences. The conjunctions mit), au6>, t)ei:gleid)en, gletd^fall^, ebenfall^, and their compounds, teegleidjen au*, fo aud), eknfo aud^; niAt ttur — fonbem an6:j; m4t allein — fon^ern aud^ ; fottio^l — aU (auc^) ; iceter — no^ indicate mere parataxis. Qvittm, au§ert)em, iiberi^te^, ia, fogar, }a fogar, ijielme^r emphasize the second clauses. Partitive conjunctions are teil^ — tetl^, |aIB — ^alb, pm Sell — ^um ZdL Ordinal con- junctions are erften^ — gnjeiten^, etc. ; juerjl — tann — ferner, enl)lici), 3ule|t; Bait) — Bal^. Explanatory are namltdb, unt) jtt)an Ex. : !Die ^iiV ifl Hetn, t)er @pa^ tft gro§ (F. 4049). §alb 309 fte i:^n, ^alb fang er ^tn (G.). 3d) mttl tretJer (eugnen noc^ befc^ontgen, M^ i4 fie Berebete (id.). 5^id^t attein Me erften SSliiten fallen ab, fonbern anc^ bie griic^te (id.). 1. Notice that the adverbial conjunctions such as balb, lult^t, battn, njcber — noc^, ^alb, tetl^, etc., always cause inversion. Some admit of inversion, but do not require it, e.g., m^, erf!en^, ndmlid^. The ordinal conjunctions and namltc^ are frequently separated by a comma, then no inversion takes place, ©rften^ ifl e^ fo bcr Sraitd^, jweiten^ Witt ntan^^ felber aii(^ (Busch). 320. Adversative Sentences. 1. One excludes the other (disjunctive-adversative) : ober, or, enhreber — ober, fonft (else). 136 GENERAL SYNTAX— COMPOUND SENTENCE. 320- an^ernfad^, otherwise. Ex.: Sr ( SCaHenftein) mu^te entn?ehr gar nid^t befe^len ol'er mit ^odfommener grei^eit tjantdn (Sch.). One contradicts the other (contradictory - adversative) : fontern, X)idmti)x, fontern ♦ . ♦ ijielme^r* The first clause contains ni6^t, ^toaXf freili^, atterbing^, w^L @o wa^kn fie ftc^ ni6>t in Die 5'ldl)e ter geintie, fonbern fe^en unijerrii^teter (Bacfee juriid (Sch.). 2. The second sentence concedes the statement of the first in part or wholly. The first may contain nicfct, etc., as above; the second has aUv, often in the connection abtx ^od), t^ennodj aber, aber g(eic^tt>o^l ; allein, iikigeu^ ; nur* Slllein is stronger than akx. Mark the contrast between abcr and fonbernf Eng. but. ^kr concedes, fonbern contradicts, ©r wax jn?ar md)t franf, aber boc^ md)t baju aufeele^t, "but he did not feel like it." ®r mar nid)t franf^ fonbern er njar nur nic^t baju anf^ gelegt (he only did not feel like doing it), ^kk ftnb krufen abtx n^enige finb au^ermal)let (B.). Den Unge^euern, ben ©igantifd^en l^citte man i^n (eorneille) nennen foUen, aber nic^t ben ©rc^en (Le.). Staffer t|ut'^ freilid^ ni(|t (It is not the water that is effective in baptism), fonbern ba^ 2Bort ®otte^, fo (which) mit unb bei bem 2Baffer ift (Lu.). 3. The second sentence states something new or different or in contrast with the first without contradicting or exclud- ing or limiting the same. It occurs commonly in narrative and may be called " counexive- or contras ting-adversative. " Conjunctions: aber, ^ingegen, tagegen, ubrigene, tro^Dem, gleic^ttjo^l, in^ejfen, etc. ^te Selei^tgung ift grog ; aber greyer ift feine ®naU (Le.). (g^ ftot ein 9latfe( mt) to* ift t^Mn^ (G.). @^ ift Me fd^onfte $offttUttg; toc^ ift e^ nur eine ^offnung (Sch.). 321. Causal Sentences. One gives the reason or cause for the other. Conjunctions: t)(a)rum, te^megett, ta^er, benn, namltdj, etc. The clause containing the reason generally stands second, the one beginning with „tenn'' always. Notice ^mn, "for," always calls for the normal order. Ex.: (Soltaten ttjaren tetter, beitrt W ?0^ettge ge^t ttac^ t)em (SIM (Sch.). (Sitte ©urAIaud)^ ttgfett lagt er ftc^ nenneit; brum muj} er (Sotbaten l^alten fbnnen (id.). 325] GENERAL SYOT?AX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 137 322. Illative Sentences. One sentence is an inference or effect of the other. Closely related to the causaL Conjunc- tions : fo, a'i\o, ]omi't, folglid), mitt)i'tt, U'mna6)j, etc. 9Reine Sftedjte (right hand) ijl gegen ten "Drud t)er 8ie6e uttcm|jftnt)lt(^ ♦ ♦ ♦ fo (then) fetD i^r ®o^ x>on Serlic^ittgen (G.). 2)ie ©onnen dfo fc^einen Utt^ nid)t me^r (Sch. ). SuBOBDn^ATE SENTENCES. 323. We shall distinguish three classes of dependent clauses, according to the logical value of the part of speech they represent: 1. Substantive clauses, with the value of a noun. 2. Adjective clauses, with the value of an adjective. 3. Adverbial clauses, with the value of an adverb. Substantive Clauses. 324. The clause is subject : Za^ eBen ift ter glucfe ter bofen Z^at, tag fte fortma^rent) 23o|'e5 mu^ geBdren (Sch.). ?iKi(^ reuet, tag ic^'^ t^at (id.). Predicate (N.) : Xie ^TOenfcfoen pn^ nid^t immer \va^ fie fc^einen (Le.). Object (A.): ©lauBfl tu ni&jt, tag einc SSarnung^ftimme in Xxaumm i^orbeteutent ju un^ fprtcftt? (Sch.). 2Ba5 man fd)marj auf tr>eig Beft^t, !ann man getroft na&j ipaufe tragen (F. 1966-7). Dative : SCo^l tem, ter m auf tie 9Zeige (to the very end) rein getebt fein Se6en ^at (He.). Genitive : 2Beg ta^ $er3 t^ott ift, te^ gel)t ter WnnX) liBer (B.). Apposition: T)en etein 8tol3,tag tu tir felbft nii^t genitgeft, ^er^eil)^ id) tir (G.). 325. As to their contents the substantive clauses may be grouped as follows: 1. Sag, or declarative clauses, always introduced by „tag*'' (B6^on ©ofrate^ le^rte, tag tie Seele te^ Wlm\6>tn unfterBlicf) fei, or tie $^e|re,tag tie (Seele . . . , or wix glaukn, tag tie @eele . . . More examples in 324. 138 GENERAL SYKTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. [325- 2. Clauses containing indirect questions : a. Questions after tlie predicate always introduced by oh ; in the main clause may stand as correlatives e^, t)a^, l>effen, la'oon, etc. Sr ^attt ni6>t gef^rieBen, ob er gefunD geMieben (Bii.). (See F. 1667-70). 6. Questions after any other part of the sentence, introduced by an interrogative pronoun, by an interrogative adverb, simple or compounded with a preposition, viz., mx, Voa^, trie, W, toann, itiomit, mo^er, n?o^in, etc. Ex. : graget nidjt, tt>arum i^ traure (Sch. ). See F. 1971. Segreifft t)u, mie antcic^tig fd)tt)armen ^iel Ieid)ter al^ gut ^anteln ift ? (Le.). 5^o(^ fel)lt un^ ^un^e, ma^ in Untemalten unt) ^(^^93 gef(^et}en (Sch.). c. The question may be disjunc- tive, introduced by oh — ol)er; ob — oter oB; ob — oK Ex.: 3lber fag^ mir, o6 mir fte^eti o^er o6 mir njeiter ge^en (E. 3906-7). Unt e^ ter 2:ag fi(^ neigt, mu§ ftc^^^ erfliiren, ob i^ t)en greunl), oh ic^ lien 25ater foil entbe^ren (Sch.). Remarks. — 1. The mood in 1 and 2, according to circumstances, is either the indicative or the potential subjunctive. See the examples sub 1 and in 324. 3. In „ba^"-clauses the other two word-orders are also possible, but without t»a§: icllei$t inbem (as) iinr ^offen, ^at un^ Unveil fcf)on Qctroffen (Sch.). 5f?ur ber ©tavfe wirb ba^ 8d)ic!fal jwingeit, menn ber 8(^tt)ac^lm9 mtterliegt (Sch.). UnD mz (as) er jt^t unb tr>ie er lau[d)t, teilt ftd^ bie %hxi empor (G.). SlU be"<3 aftf anj^att ju empfangcn, muftc jal^lcn* (£r rttt fort 333. Comparative clauses denote manner, degree, and measure. Conjunctions: tok, aU, " as," '' than " with the corre- sponding fo, alfo, ebenfo (= so) in the main clause. After the comparative al^, tenn, m^tx, "than." Other forms: gleicfemie — fo ; fo vou — fo ; just as — as, so. 5Bie denotes rather manner and quality, aU the degree and quantity. When both clauses have the same predicate, contraction is common. Then mt denotes likeness, aU identity. Ex. : Sc^ jtnge K)te ber S^oget jingt (Q-.). 1)an!et ©ott fo toarm al^ x^ fur bicfen 2;run! eud) banfe (id.). 2Bie bu mir („t^u)l" understood), fo i^ btr (Prov.). 2)u Mj^ mir nic^t^ me^r aU feitt (Bo^n (Sch.). !Der trdgc ®ang be^ ^riege^ ^at bent ^ontg e^enfo^iel Sc^aben get^an aU er ben OJebeUen S5orteil hac^te (id.), ^atte fi(^ etn 9ftattjktn angemdjl't al^ tote ber !Doftor Sutler (F. 2129-30) (al^ toie is collo- quial). „2Bie ein fRimx," " like a knight " ; „aU (etn) Otitter," " as a knight." enn Saffer ntit i^euer fic^ mengt (Sch.). 2. ^enn is preferable after a comparative when several ^al^" occur. 2Bie is colloquial. ©^ fragt ft(^ ob ^efjtng grower aU Did^ter benn aU 2)?en[(^ genjefen fet. ^idoji in the clause after al^ is no longer good usage, though common in the 17th and 18th centuries. Lessing has it very frequently. 3f^ lebtc [o eingejogen, ali3 i^ in 2)?ei§en nic^t gelebt ^atte (Le.). a. '^flidjtS wenigcr al§ means " anything but," literally "nothing less than that," gen- erally felt by English speakers as meaning " nothing but," e. g., SlCer ic^ barf fagen, ha^ biefe 6inri(^tung ber gabel nicf)t3 lueniger ol^ notwenbig i[t, L e., that this arrangement of the plot is anything but necessary (Le.). In „nt(^t§ aI6" = " nothing but," as after all negative pronouns, ,,niemanb al^ bu" = nobody but you, aU has exclusive force, = " but.'* 3. Other correlatives are fo einer — xok; ber namli^e — tt)ie; berfelbe — tt)ie; fol(^-, )o + positive adjective — tr)ie (quality) and al^ (degree); after 336] GENERAL SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 143 ju, aHju + positive and after ein anberer stand aU + bag or mm, ali and infinitive, e.g., (£r benft ju ebel, aU bag er fo etwa<3 »ott un^ emarten fonntc* (£r ijl ber namlic^e n)te er immer tuar* Sure S^erfo^nung tear ein wenig ju fc^nett^ al$ bag fte bauer^aft ^dtte fein foUen (Gl-.). Notice the potential subjunctive after ^aU ha^*" 334. Under this head comes really the proportional clause, which expresses the proportion of the decrease or increase of what is asserted in the main clause. The conjunctions are the following correlatives : }e — tefio, urn fo (or urn tefto, rarely); {c — it, = the — the; je nat^bem (or nac^tem or mie, rarely), according as. If the main clause stand first, its correlative is dispensable. Ex. : 3e tne^r ber S^^orrat fc^molsr beflo fc^redlti^er \ou^^ ber ^m^tx (Sch.). 3e langer, je Uekr (Pro v.). 3e me^r er ^at, je me^r er tt>\U. (3e) m^hm einer ringt, nac^bem \W gelingt (G.), "The success depends upon the effort." 1. 3e = ever ; beflo, " on that account," " hence," see 442, a. Notice the dependent order in the first, the inverted generally in the second. 335. Consecutive clauses express the result or effect of the predicate of the main clause. Conjunctions: t)a§ (foba§), that; in the main clause, if any correlative^ fo, fo fe^r, bergeflalt, terart, fo((^* Ex. : (So ^eraBfd^eut ift t)ie %\^vanmi\ ^ag jte fein S^erfjeug ftnt>et (Sch.). Sr filing, tia^ laut l^er 3Ba(t) erfiang unb alle^ gifen in (Biixdtn fpraitg (Uh.), 1 The result may also be expressed in the form of a main clause or of an infinitive clause : ^o(^ itbernd^m^ {6) gem no(^ ei'nmal aHe ^(age, fo UeB njar mtr ba^ ^inb (F. 3123-4). 3(^ Mn ju alt, urn mx ju fpielen, ju iung urn oi^ne SSunfc^ ju fettt (F. 1546-7). 2. Mark the potential and unreal subjunctives of the preterit and plu- perfect which may stand in these clauses : 35ernteint ^f)x ntid^ fo jung unb fc^jDad^, ha^ i(^ mit 0iiefen flritte? (Uh.). 2)a0 3>ferb war fo la§m,bag toir fc^neHer ju ^u§ ^eim gefommctt waren* 336. Restrictive clauses limit the value and scope of the statement of the predicate and border closely upon the con- ditional and comparative clauses. Conjunctions: nur t)a§, only 144 GENERAL SYNTAX— SUBORDIlf ATE SENTENCES. [337- (that), auper t)ap, except that, in fo fern (aU), mofern, in tok fern, in fo or in mie ti?eit; in as far as, in as much as. The negative force is given also by the subjunctive and the normal order with the adverb t)enn or by e^ fei Denn, e^ ivaxt "otnn, tiaf , which is now more common. Ex. : SSir tear en gar nic^t fo iibel bran, nur ba^ mx ntc^te ju trinfen f^attm We were not at all so badly oft', only ... 3n fo fern nun biefe SSefen ^orper ftnb, fi^ilbert bte ^^cefte auc^ ^orper (Le.). Sr entferntc ftc^ niemal^ njeit, er fagt^ e<3 i^r benn (H. and D„ IV. 42-3). 3^ laffe bic^ nic^t, bu fegneft mic^ benn (unless thou bless me) (B.). 0iu^ig (gebenfe ic^ mi^ p ijer|)alten); e^ fei benn, ba9 (unless) er ftc^ an meiner (£§re ober nteinen ©litem Jjergreife (Sch.). 1. This is a very old construction, quite common in M. H. G. The negative force lies not in benn, but in the lost ne + the potential or con- cessive subjunctive. !I)enn < M. H. G. danne, is unessential. Compare M. H. G. den lip wil ich mrliesen, si en werde m%n io%p — my life will I lose, (she become not my wife) unless she, etc. 8waz lebete in dem walde e^ entrunne danne balde, das was zehaiit tot, — 2Ba$ im SSalbe lebte, bai3 n?ar anf ber (Btelte tot, e^ fct benn ha^ e^ balb baijon lief or gelaufen n>dre (quoted by Paul). He disappeared as early as late M. H. G., particularly after a negative main clause. It is left in nur < ne waere = (e^) tt?dre ntc^t bag. See Paul's M. H. G. gram., § 335-40. 337. Causal clauses denote the cause, reason, and means. Conjunctions: ba, since, mil, because, intern =: by + present participle in Eng. Correlatives, if any: ba'rum, t'a'kr, fo, U^lalh etc, Da'turc^ ba§, t^a'mit ^ap express rather the instrument. 2BeiI expresses the material cause; ta the logical reason; „in^ tern" is a weak causal and borders rather closely upon the contemporaneous „inDem.'' T)enn + normal order expresses a known or admitted reason. It is emphatic. See 321. Ex. : !Dag ©c^Iepptau (hawser) jerrt§, Weil ber ©d^Ieppbampfer (tug) ju fc^nell anjog. fSlii bem bejlen SBilten leiften mx fo toenig, metl un^ taufenb SSillen freujen (G,). Scben anbern in fc^ttfen x\i kffer, ta id^ fo flein Mn (G.). 2)ir blit^t gewip ba^ fc^onfle ®IM auf ©rben, ba bu fo fromm unb ^eitig bijl (Sch.). 9lid^eUeu wu^te fi$ nur babur^ ^u ^elfen, bo^ er ben geinbfeligfeiten ein fc^leunigc^ Snbe mac^te (Sch.), 1. S'^un, bteweil, aUbieweil, magen, fiutemat, and others, are rare and archaic. 339] GEI^ERAL SYKTAX — SUBORDIlirATE SENTEiq^CES. 145 2. The clauses with ba'burc^ bag, ba'mit bag border closely upon the substantive clause. 2)a, says Becker, denotes the real and logical rea- son, tx>eil the logical only when the kind of reason is not emphasized. SSeil stands in a clause that answers the question as to the reason, 2S5arum tuurbe SSaKenflein abgefe^t? SBeil man i^n fitr cinen S[^errdter ^ielt. 338. Final clauses express intention and object. Con- junctions: X)ami't, fca^, "in order that." 9luf tag, unb bag are archaic. In the main clause rarely stand barum, "^^Uf in tcr 3lbftd)t, 3U t)em ^mdt (both followed by Dag)* Ex.: 2)arum eben leil^t er feinem, bamit er flet^ ju ^tUn ^aU (Le.). !Daju ro:r:> i^m ber SJerjlanb, baf er tm innern |)erjen fpiiret, n)a^ er erfi^afft mit feincr ^ano (Sch.). (£§re Skater unb 9)lutter, auf bag bir'^ wo^l ge^e unb bu lange lekji auf (£rben(B.). 1. The reigning mood of this clause is the subjunctive. If the object is represented as reached, the indicative may also stand. Urn ju + inf. forms a very common final clause ; 9)?an lebt nic^t urn ju effen, [onbern man i§t um ju leben. 339. Concessive clauses make a concession to the contra- diction existing between the main clause and the result ex- pected from it in the dependent clause. They are called also adversative causal clauses. Conjunctions : oBglet'd) (06 ♦ ♦ ♦ glei(!^), obfc^o'tt (ob ♦ > > f(^on), obwo^l (ob . ♦ ♦ n?o()l), ob aud), oB jn;)ar, wenn and), mnn gleic^, ob, all = "although." The main clause may contain De'ttnodj, boc^, nit^t^beftotveniger, gleid)tt)O^I, but fo only if it stands second. Relative clauses with indefinite relative pronouns and adverbs, it>er . * ♦ au^ (immer,nur), tt)ie ♦ ♦ ♦ au(^, fo ♦ ♦ . an6) (nod)) ; inverted clauses and those with the normal order, con- taining the adverbs fci^ott, glei(^, gwar, tt)o|I, freilid), ttO(^ have also concessive force. Ex. : 3jl ea Qleic^ ^a^t, fo Ieu(i^tet unfer fRt6^t (Sch.). (Compare Dbgletd^ ea 9?a(^t tflr ob e^ gleic^ ^ad)t if! . . ♦) 2Ba^ ^^euer^wut i^m au^ gcraubt, ein fu§er S^rofl ifl i^m geblieben (id.). ^Jluttg [prad^ er ju SRetnefcn^ beflen (in favor of R.) fo falfd^ au(i^btefer bcfannt war (G.). ©in ®ott ijl, ein l^eiliger SBttte lebt, wtc aud^ ber mcnfc^Ud^e tt>an!e (Sch.). ©rfiitt^ ba^on bein ^erj, fo grog e^ ij^ (F. 345.^). 146 GENERAL SYNTAX — SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. [340- ^an fommt im ©crebe, tt)ic man ftd^ tmmer jlellt (G.). 2)em S55fe»)ic^t tt)trb allea [driver, er t|ue ma<^ er toiU (Holty). 3toax meif ic^ »iel, bo(^ miic^t^ ic^ aUt^ tt)iffen (F. 601). 1. Mark also the form of the imperative and unb + inversion : (Bet nod^ fo bumm, e^ gibt boc^ jemanb(en), ber bic^ fiir weife ^cilt. ^er SDJenfd^ tjl frei gefd^affen, i|l frei, unb njurbe er in tetten geboren (Sch.). 2. Mood : if a fact is stated, the indicative ; if a supposition, the con- cessive and unreal subjunctive. See examples above. 3. When certain parts of speech are common to both clauses, there may be contraction. D^bmo^l »on ^o^ern a|r gewefen unb gerabe, nie fam ei3 bal^in, atte^ jliinbc anber^ (Sch.). 4. Contracted and abbreviated forms : (SntttJorfett BIo^ tjl^^ ettt gememer ^reijel; i)oI(fu§rt ijl:'^ em unj^erblic^ Unternefimen (Sch.). ©enn nic^t, tt)0 nic^t, ttjo tnoglid^ are very common. Sir »erfu(^ten il^tt »)o moglid^ ju bcrul^iQen, ttcnn nic^t ganj ju entfernen. For the tenses see also 275-280. WORD-ORDER. 341. We distinguisli three principal word-orders according to the position of subject and verb: 1. The normal, viz., subject — verb. 2. The inverted, viz., verb — subject. 3. The dependent, viz., verb at the end. (By " verb " we shall understand for the sake of brevity the personal part and by "predicate" the non-personal part of the verb, viz., participle and infinitive.) 342. The normal occurs chiefly in main sentences : "Der 2Bint) tot^L It is identical with the dependent order if there is only subject and verb in the dependent clause. !Die SJlit^le Qi% well Ux aSittt) m% 343. The inverted order occurs both in main and depend- ent clauses: ®e^t W 9RuMe ? m^t t)er SSinD, (fo) ge^t bie mixW. It occurs : a. In a question. b. In optative and imperative sentences. c. In dependent clauses, mainly conditional and after aU + subjunctive when there is no conjunction like mnn, oh, etc. d. If for any reason, generally a rhetorical one, any other word but the subject, or if a whole clause, head the sentence. e. For impressiveness the verb stands first. Examples with adjuncts (objects, adverbs, etc.) added: 148 GENERAL SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER. [343- a. ©c^reibt ^er %vtnnt) ? SIei6t t)er Diener ni(^t lange au^? 2Ba^ [(fereibt t)ir Ut greunt ? But when the inquiry is as to the subject the normal order stands of course. 2Ber fc^reibt einen 23rtef? Sa^ ijl ber langen OJebe furjer *5inn? (Sch.). b. 9Jlbge nit t)er 2:ag erfc^etnen, mnn beg raukn ^rtege^ iporben tiefeg fitlle 3^^al burd^to^en (Sch.). For more examples, see 284, 1, 2. But the inverted order is not required: !Dte Bd^ bcr S^ropfen, bie er ^egt, fei euren STagen pgelegt ! (F. 989-990). c. SCidft tu genau erfa^ren trac^ ftc^ gtemt, fo frage nur Bet eblett grauen an (G.). 2Birt man mo (mtrgen^mo) gut aufgenommen, mu^ man nti^t gleic^ n?ieter!ommen (Wolff). (Sr) (Btrid) brauf ein (Bpange, ^etf un^ ^fling^ aU maren'^ eben ?)fifferling' ; banff nid^t meniger unb ni(^t me^r, aU ob'^ ein ^orb »ol( ^liijje mar' (F. 2843-6). Notice here the inversion after aU alone, but dependent order after aU ob. See 340, 1 ; also F. 1122-25, 1962-3. But for emphasis and to add vividness, the normal is still possible : 2)u lle^ejl jlill, er wartet auf; bu fprid^jl i|n an, er flrebt an bir l^inauf (F. 1168-9). This is mere parataxis. d. Die Sotfc^aft Ijjox' x6^ mot)I, aUtin mix fe^^lt ber glaube (F. 765). (Ernjl ift tag Seben, ^eiter ift bie ^unft (Sch.). 9Ki(^ Ijat mein ^erj betrogcn (id.). 2Bo aBer ein 2Iag ift, ba ijerfammein ft(^ bie ^Ibler (B.). i:eineg (3d\k^ ^ab' i(^ einen §au(^ ^erfpiirt (Uh.). See also F. 860- 1, 1174^5, 1236. iiberfe'^en fann Sa^^Iu^ bie^ ©emalbe nid)t ^altn (Le.). ©efd^rieben fte^t: „3m 2lnfang mar U^ SSort" (F. 1224). See also 236, 3. 1. The main clause, inserted in any statement or following it, has in- version according to this rule. 2)aa, fpric^t er, ijl fein 5lufent^alt/ toa^ forbcrt ^tmmelan (Sch.). SSie feib ibr glucflic^/ ebler ®raf ! l^ub er ijoll 5lrgUjl an (id.). For emphasis the speaker can insert a clause uninverted : 2)enn, i^ tt)ei§ ca, er ijlber ©liter bie er bereinjl erbt, n>ert (H. and D., III. 53). 2. The coordinating conjunctions aber, alfein, benn, mmlx^, ober# fonbernr unb standing generally at the head of the sentence, any adverb with the force of an elliptical sentence (jivar, ja, etc., having generally a comma 345] GEI^ERAL SYiq^TAX— WORD-ORDER. 149 after them) call for no inversion. After cntweber there is option. Ex. : ^Mtx tie ^unjl ^at in ben neueren Beiten ungleic^ tceitere ©renjen erl^alten (Le.). 3voax euer a3art ijl frau^, boc^ ^eM i^r nic^t bte ^k^d (F. 671). ^iirnja^r ! tc^ bin ber einjige ©o^n nur (H. and D., IV. 91). Sa, mir '^at t^ ber @eijl gefagt (id., IV. 95). ®enn bte mUmtx ftnb ^eftig (id., IV. 148). 3. When the dependent clause precedes, the main clause can for em- phasis and very frequently colloquially have the normal order. Ex. : ^atte er bie Urfaci^en biefe^ aHgcmetnen Slkrglaukn^ an <3^a!fpere^i3 ^c^on^eiten audb gefu(^tr er wurbe fte balb gefunben ^akn (Le.). e, §at Me ^onigin to(^ ni(St^ ijorau^ »or tern gemetnen Siirc^ermeiBe (Sch.). ©te^en tt)ie gelfen t)0(^ attjei ^O^dnner gegen einattber ! (H. and D., IV. 229). Generally contains t)0(^. 344. The dependent order occurs only in dependent clauses. The clause begins with a relative or interrogative pronoun which may be preceded by a preposition ; with a relative or interrog. adverb; or with a subordinating conjunc- tion. Ex. : SBenn 14 ttiit %lmn^tv mdre, mocbte i6) n?o^l X^iogene^ fetn* 3^ ttt^fe^ ^^ 6^t, j;e me^r er will (Claudius). (So flol^ id) Bin, mu^ i(^ mir fel6ft gej^el)n : bergleic^ett ^ab' ic^ nie gefe^n (G.). 3Bie fol^e tiefge()rdgte Silver ^o^ ^u ^dkn in un5 fdjlafen fonnen, U^ tin SSort, eitt Saut pe li^edt (Le.). See also F. 2015-18, 2062. 345. The dependent order does not occur in main clauses, but it is not the only order of the dependent clause. 1. The verb precedes two infinitives. One may be the past participle of a modal auxiliary. Ex.: Rann icb t)ergejfen,ttjie^^ l)atte lommert fonnen? (Sch.). X)ap ein 9Kenfc^ t)o(^ einen ?D^enfc^en fo ^erlegen foil mad)en fonnen! (Le.). a. But in this case and in other compound tenses the '* verb " {i. e., the personal part) may also stand between the participle and the other aux- iliary or the infinitive, e. g., mil ber ^aufmann ba^ ^axi^ fod gefaitft f)a1>tn or gefauft foE ^akn (in poetry). ®e!auft f^aUn foil is the common order. 2. The normal order may stand: 1. In dependent clauses containing indirect speech. Sr 150 GENERAL SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER. [346- glaubt, S^alfpere ^aU 33rutu0 gum ipelten te^ (Le.). This is mere parataxis without conjunction. 346. The auxiliaries ^aben and fetn are also frequently dropped in dependent clauses to avoid an accumulation of verbal forms, both in prose and poetry. Lessing, Goethe, and Klopstock, especially the first, drop the auxiliary very freely and skillfully. Ex.: 5Cie unbe^reiflid) i(^ ijon i1^m Beleitigt tt>orten (supply Mn here or before beleitigt) unt) no(^ tt>ert>e (Le.). ^O^o^UA, tap ter Sater tie ^^^ranneH te^5 e t n e n S^ing^ ni^t langer in feinem ^aufe (supply ^at) tulten troUeu (id.). 347. The dependent order in main clauses is archaic and poetic. Ex. : (Bicgfrieb ben jammer n?o|l [djmingen funnt (dialect for fonnte) (Uh.). Ura^ne, ©ropmutter, 5D^utter unb ^inb in bumpfer^tube kifammen jtnb (Schwab).- 348. 1. The inverted order in the conditional clause and in a main clause for the sake of impressiveness has sprung from the order of the question. Compare, for instance: 1. 3ft ber greunb treu y (question). 2. 3ft fcer greunb treu ? (question). (Sut, fo wirb er mir &eiftel)en. 3. 3ft ber ^yreunb treu (conditional clause), fo icirb er mtr 6eiftct}en. 4. 3ft mir ber greunb boc^ treu gefiUeben ! (impressive inversion). 2. The main clause has inversion when the dependent clause precedes, because it generally begins with an adverb like fc, bann, etc. ©e^ft bu ni(^t, fo tl^u^ bu Unrej^t. Without fo, the inversion really ceases. Hence we say, the normal order may still stand for emphasis. But fo, etc., were so frequent that inversion became the rule. Inversion is therefore limited originally to the question and to the choice of placing the emphatic part of the sentence where it will be most prominent. 349. 1. The dependent order was in O. H. G. by no means limited to the dependent clause. Toward the 10th century it begins to become rarer in the main clause. In early M. H. G. it became limited to the dependent clause, so that now we may justly call it the •' dependent -clause order ^ 2. The verb at the end is, no doubt, a great blemish of German style— second only to the separation of the little prefix of separable compound verbs, which may turn up after many intervening parts at the close of the sentence. According to Delbrfick, the dependent order— subject, object, verb — was the primitive one, still in force in Latin. 352] GEi^ERAL SYNTAX — WORD-ORDER. 151 General Eules for the Order of other Parts of the Sentence besides Subject and Verb. Position of the Predicate. 350. The predicate, be it an adjective, a substantive, par- ticiple, infinitive, or separable prefix of a compound verb or the first element of a loosely compounded verb, stands at the end of a main clause in a simple tense. The adjuncts of the predicate, such as objects, adverbs, stand between verb and predicate. Ex.: I)er ©erine mup fcijei^en, t^er (Sommer ijl ^n (Sch.). ^1^x [eiD ein Wdfkx (id.). Sr ^at ijerlor^ne S3orte nur ^efproc^en (id.), ^ein ©d)i{t) fing t)iefen 9rtort)ftreic^ auf (id.). (Straflofe gre(^:^eit j>rld)t t)en ©itten ipo^n (id.), ©eftern fant) ciit ^agner^Sonce'rt ftatt* In tlie dependent clause only the verb changes position, subject and predicate remain as in the main clause, and the adjuncts stand between them. For instance : ®iavLbt ba^ nic^t ! 3^r werbet biefe^ tampfe^ ©nbe nim^ mer erbUtfen (Sch.), becomes ©laubt m($t, bag i^r biefe^ ^ampfe<3 ©nbe je erblicfen njerbet. 351. In the compound tense the separable prefix immedi- ately precedes the participle, be it in a main or in a dependent clause, ^reigic^ 3^^^^ ^ahcn intr jufammen au^gelebt nni: au^ge^alteti (Sch.). "Lit S^olera toiti (is about to) u'ber^ant ne^men* See 137. Order of Objects and Cases. 352. a. Case of a person before a case of the thing. 2lber aud) nod) ^ann ♦ . ♦ ful)r ^er ^aifer fort, im @tdnt)eti ten grie^en au aetgen (Sch.). b. Case of a pronoun before a noun. 'Man Beftimmte pe (them) liem attgemeinen Unn^illen jum Dpfer (Sch.). c. The dative stands before the accusative; if both are per- sons, the accusative may stand before the dative. Sr felbft ^atte i^em T:ienfte ^iefe^ ipaufe^ feine erften Selr»3uc(e genjitmet (Sch.). 152 GEN^EKAL SY]STAX — WORD-ORDER. [353- d. The accusative-object stands before remoter objects, a genitive or a preposition + case. But see also a. 'ilRan mb(^te fagen, 33oltaire ^a6e nn (^efiibl »on Der SBic^tigleit t)iefer 3>er)'onlid^!eit ge^aBt (H. Grimm). Die (^i^iilerin f(^rieb einen 3luffa^ iiber ten ©inter. e. As to pronouns, ftd^ stands generally before e^, and both before every other pronoun. The personal pronoun stands before the demonstrative. The personal and ftcb may stand before the subject, if it be a noun, in the inverted and depend- ent orders. Sr ^ai fic^ e^ angeeicjnet. ^rummau (a proper name) nd^ert ft(^ i^m (Sch.). SSer ttarf (tc^ fo ettt>a5 erlauBen ? 3enem ten 2Beg ju tern Bomifd^en 3:^rone ju i?erf(^ltegen, ergriff man Me SSaffen f(^on unter ^Ulatt^ta^ (Sch.). 5Ba^ i^m tie x>ergroperte ^Ulac^t ter @tdnt)e (estates) ere'» 2Ber!e ftnt) feine 2:ugentle^ren, \xi ^apitet gebrac^t unt turd) retente (Eyempel eridutert (Le.). Position of Adverbs. 354. In general, adverbs stand before the words they qualify. The modal adverbs nidit, etma, gtrar, fc^on, n?ol, etc., and the adverbs of time immer, f^on, {e^t, nie, nimmer stand generally immediately before the predicate or in place of it if there is none, txt^ ^iltuig ift begaubemt fdjbn (Mozart's 3^uber^ 358] GENERAL SYJ^TAX — WORD-ORDER. 15^ flute) ^in fe^r ^eftiger §uften gretft Un ^xankn flat! an* 'Da^ ]6^mvt §era mirD ni6t turd) 5Borte leiAt (Sch.). ©c^on ^iele 2:090 fe^' i(ft e^ fd)meigenD an (id.). ^&i l)abe eu^ noc^ nie erfannt (B.). ^aj^ tu i^n noc^ nid}t Befud^t ? (Notice the opposite of the Eng- lish order in " never yet/' " not yet.") 355. An adverb of time stands before one of place, and both before one of manner. Ex. : 2>ie(e Sauern tt>aren geftern nac^ Ux (BtaU au Wlaxttt gefa^ren* S3ir fasten morgen per (Sifenba^n nad) 3flul»olfta^t» (E5 tanjt pd) auf i^iefem ^latkn gupoDen ni*t fe^r gut* 1. Of several adverbs of time or place the more general precede the more specific. 255ir reifen morgen frii^ urn 6 U^r 59 9)?tnuten ab* 2)er 5^olijtft fanb hm SSetntnfenen auf ber ^^a^rj^rape im 2)rec!e liegen. 2. Adverbs of time precede objects when these are nouns, but pro- nouns precede all adverbs. 2Btr fetcrn halh ben 4ten Suit, ben Slag ber nnab^ l^dnsigfeitaerflarung. 2Bir l^ofen i|n morgen auf bent ^a^n^ofe ju trefen* 356. Only ahtx, namlic^, iet)0(^, and a few others, can sepa- rate subject and verb. Ex. : £)er 9li(^ter abtx fpra(% (Le.). Xit ^ac^tigall jetoA ftngt tt>unt)erf^i3n* 357. As to the position of the prepositions, they, with very few exceptions, precede the noun ; when they follow the noun has been stated under Prepositions. See, for instance, 303, 7, 8, 10. Position of Clauses. 358. Dependent clauses have, in general, the positions of those parts of speech and of the sentence which they repre- sent, i, e,, the substantive clause standing for the subject or object has the position of the subject or the object in the sen- tence, etc. No special rules are needed for them. When there are several dependent clauses, the last often takes for variety the normal order introduced by unt>» The following examples show well-placed dependent clauses : ^ettt ^atfer fann, m^ unfer ijl, »erf(^enfen (Sch.). SJerftegelt ^nV W^ unb »er^rieft, 154 GEJ^EBAL SYNTAX — WOKD-OKDER. [359- ba§ er nieht guter ©rtgcl x\t (id.), ^ie S^rV bie i^m gelJurtr geb^ i(^ i|>m gern; ba^ 9le(^t ba<3 er ftc^ tiimmt, ijcweigrMc^ i^m (id.). $lia id^ iiinger tvar, Uebte id) ni^t^ fo fe^r, dU 0loma'ne (novels) (G.). 9iic^etieu ttuite fid) baburd) ju klfen, bag er ben geinbfeltgfeiten jtcifi^en beiben ein fd>Ie«ni9e^ £nbe mad>te (Scli.). ISRdn guter ©etjl ktta^rte mid) baijor/ bie flatter an ben ©ufen nur ju legcn (mir before bie SiJatter in prose) (id.). 2)er 9J?enf(^ bege^rt, aGe^ an ftc^ ju reigen (G.). 2Bie glucfUc^ tjl ber, ber, urn ftc^ niit bent Sc^idfal in ©inigfeit ju fe^en, nid)t fein ganje^ »or|erge^enbca i?eben megjitwerfen IJrand)t (id.). 359. The rules given can hardly be abstracted from poetry. Even in prose they will be found frequently infringed. Rhythm, rhyme, and, in prose, emphasis control the order of words and allow of much choice. But students translating into German should adhere to the rales very strictly. It will be noticed that the German word-order coin- cides very nearly with the old English, and does not differ after all so much from the modem English word-order. The chief points of difference are the dependent order, the position of adverbs of time, which in English stand generally at the end, and the position of the adjuncts of adjectives, participles, and infinitives, wliich precede the latter instead of following them as in English. 1. The word-order required by certain conjunctions has been frequently mentioned in the General Syntax. See, for instance, 320. LIST OF ABBEEVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS THAT REQUIRE EXPLANATIONS. Ags. = Anglo-Saxon. (B.) = Bible. (Bo.) = Bodenstedt. (Bii.) = Burger. (Ch.) = Cliamisso. D. = Butch or Dative. (F.) = Hart's Edition of Goethe's Faust, Part I. Fr. = French. (G.) -^ Goethe. Go. = Gothic. Gr. — Greek. G. T. = General Teutonic. (H. and D.) = Hart's edition of Goethe's Hermann and Dorothea. (He.) = Herder. H. G. = High German. (Hu.) = A. von Humboldt. I.-E. = Indo-European. L. = Latin. (Le.) = Leasing. L. G. = Low German. (Lu.) = Luther's works excepting his translation of the Bible. M. G. = Middle German. M. H. G. = Middle High German. N. G. = North German or North Germany. N. H. G. = New High German. O. Fr. = Old French. O. H. G. = Old High German. (Prov.) = Proverb. (R.) = Riickert. Rules = the oflBcial rules for spell- ing, see 37. (Sch.) = Schiller. S. G. = South German. (Sh.) = Shakespere translated x>y Schlegel and Tieck. (Uh.) = Uhland. V. L. = Vulgar Latin. < means " derived from," " sprang from," '* taken from." > means ** passed or developed into," ** taken into." + between a German and non- German word denotes common origin or ** cognates." In other positions it means " accompanied or followed by." * before a word means that that form of the word does not actually occur, but is conjectured or reconstructed. : = :, or : as :, means a relation as in a mathematical proportion. I, II, III after verbs indicates the strong verb-classes. — between letters means " interchanges with," e.g.,^ — d) as in ^o^er — ^od) or e — i as in ne^men — nimmjl* SUBJECT-INDEX. The numbers refer to the paragraphs. The umlauts have a separate place, h after a, b after o, u after u. Ablaut : nature of, 393 ; four grades, 394,463,2; 496; 497. Ablaut series : and verb-classes, 132- 139 ; I.-E., 394, 1 ; G. T., > O. H. G. > N. H. G., 395-400; 459-467 ; group- ing of, 459. Abstract nouns : article before, 149 ; no article, 145 ; 155, 2; plural of, 171 ; 62, Rem. Accent: 417,418; degrees of, 419; chief on stem-syllable, 420 • 420, 2; 478, 4; Eng. in Norman-Fr. words, 420, 3 ; in compounds, 421-423 ; sec- ondary, 424; rhetorical, 426; "free" in I.-E., 420, 2 ; in foreign words, 42 7, 420, 1; 424, 4; 493,2; 63, 2; charac- teristic of Germanic Lang., 478, 4; =in- tonation, 392, 1. Accidence : 38-138 ; Historical Commen- tary on, 428-476. Accusative: office of, 198; after verbs, 198-206; two A. after verbs, 199; predicate in passive, 202, 2; cognate, 203 ; logical subject in, 205 ; after re- flexive verbs, 206 ; adverbial, 207 ; dif- ference between A. and G. of time, 208, 1 ; after adjectives, 207, 1 ; 183 ; abso- lute, 209 ; 297, 1 ; by attraction in the pred. after laffen, 202, 1 ; after prepos., 304-306; with Inf., 292. Adjective: decl. of, 69-72 ; 436 ; origin of strong decl., 437; comparison of, 73-76, see comparison, compar. and superlat. ; 438, 439 ; used as nouns, 820, 221, 181 ; gender of same, 160, 3 ; 169 ; 162, 3 ; G. after, 182, 183 ; D. after, 194 ; A. after, 183 ; 207, 1. Attributive use of, 211-217 ; only used attributively, 211 ; uninflected used attributively, 212 ; in the predi- cate, 218, 220 ; as nouns declined strong, 214 ; G. sg. m. and n., 216, 1; declined weak, 213; 217,1; as nouns, 221, 1 ; origin of double decl., 215 ; un- settled usage as to strong and weak decl., 216, 221 ; after indef. pron., 214 ; 216, 4; 181 ; after person, pron., 216,2; two or more adj., 212,3; 217. In the predicate, 218, 219 ; only used in pred., 219; position of adjuncts of, 353 ; accent in certain compounds, 422, 1-7 ; derivation of, 522-528 ; used as adverb, 554. Adjective Clauses : nature of, 323 ; 326- 328 ; 339. Adverbial Clauses : nature of, 323, 329 ; various kinds of, 330-340 ; see tempo- ral, local, clauses of manner and cause (332-340), final (338). conditional, (340), etc. Adverbs : origin of, 551-555 ; < G. of nouns, 187, 552 ; +prepos. supplanting the person, pron., 234 ; syntax of, 299, 300; after prepos. + noun, 300; ad- verbs which are only adverbs, 300, 1 ; 554, 2 ; adjective as, 300, 2 ; 554 ; comparison by, 223, 224 ; relative and absolute superl. of, 300, 2 ; nature of, 301, 1 ; interrogative, 251, 5; relative, 258, 326, 331 ; demonstrative, 327, 3; in local clauses, 331, a- position in a sentence, 354 ; order of adverbs of time, place, manner, 355 ; accent in compound, 423. Adversative Sentences : coordinate, 320. Affricate : 413, 5 ; 408, 1. Alemanic : 483, 1. Alphabet : printed and script, 1, 2 ; ori- gin of the G. letters, 360 ; Latin letters in G., 360, 2 ; relation to G. sounds, 361. Anglo-Saxon, see English. Apposition; < G. of nouns, 181 ; 179, 1; 317. Articles: inflect, of, 38; accent of, 39; contraction with prepositions, 40 ; spell- ing of, 39 ; 41 ; syntax of, 140-158 ; nature of 140 ; general cases of absence of, 141-146 ; before proper nouns, 147 ; before abstract nouns, 149; be- fore names of materials, 150 ; before collective nouns, 151 ; repetition of, 158. See A., def. and indef. Article, Def. : infl. of, 38 ; attraction to preceding words not prepositions, 41 ; contraction with preceding prepos., 40 ; relation to Eng. possessive pron., 154, 243,3; distributive for Eng. "a," 156. Article, Indef. : infl. of. 38 ; aphaeresis of, 41; after certain pronouns, 144, 252; before certain pronouns, 157. Austrian: 483. SUBJECT-INDEX. 267 Auxiliaries: of tense: infl. of, 110 ; use of, 365, 366 ; 383, 2 ; omission of, 346; in passive voice, 373. Modal : see pret. pres. verbs ; special uses of, 367; verbs of motion omitted after, 367, Rem. ; imperative force of, 387, 4 ; + perf. and pres. inf., 388, 1 ; 390.; in future, 3 79, 3, a. Bavarian-Austrian : 483, 2 ; 488, 5, a. Bible: 486; 487. Brecfiung : 405, Rem. Capitals : initial, 364 ; in pronouns of address, 330; in article, 39. Cardinals, see Numerals. Cases : see individual cases, N., G., etc. ; order of cases in the sentence, 353. Causal Sentences : coordinate, 331 ; sub- ordinate, 337. Comparative : see comparison ; use of, 3*/«3 ; by adverbs, 333, 334 ; conjunc- tions after, 333. Comparative Clauses : 333, 1-3 ; with nid)t, 333, 2. Comparison: of adjectives, 73-76; 438; 439; irregular, 76, 1; defective and redundant, 76, 2; the suflixes, 73, 438 ; by adverbs, 333, 334, 333, 1 ; of two qualities of the same object, 334. Compound words : accent of, 431-434 ; irregular accent of certain nouns, adjec- tives, and prefixes, 433 ; secondary ac- cent in, 434 ; 531 : see nouns, adj., etc. ; 516 ; compared with Eng., 531, Compound tenses : 109-115 ; 383. Concessive Clauses : 339. Conditionals : formation of, 115, 383, 5 ; force of, 380, 381, 384, 5. Conditional Clauses : tenses in, 380, 384, 5 ; nature of, 340 ; several forms of, 340, 1 5 word-order in, 343, c. Conjugation : strong and weak, 101-103 ; 446,476 ; weak, 117, 118, 447, 454, 455 ; strong, 130-133, 446,456-469. Conjunctions : classification of, 307 ; ori- gin of, 301, 558. Coordinating: copulative, 319; adver- sative, 330 ; concessive, 330, 2 ; causal, 331 ; illative, 333. Subordinating : in temporal clauses, 330 ; in comparative clauses, 333 ; 334 -J in consecutive clauses, 336 ; in restnctive clauses, 336; causal, 337; final, 338 ; concessive, 339 ; condi- tional, 340. Consecutive Clauses : 335. Consonant-declension, see n-declension. Consonant-stems : become i-steme, 54 ; 438, 2 ; 433, 1 ; 433-435. Consonants: description of, 374-389; open, 374-381 ; shut, 383-385 ; na- sals, 386-388^; compound, 389 ; long, 389, 5 ; cous.-table, p. 1G7 ; see Grimnvs and Vemer's Laws; doubling or length- ening of, 389, 5; 413, 5; 488, 2, c; 535, 1, R. 2. Coordinate Sentences: 318; various kinds of, 319-333. Copulative Sentences : 319. Dauisli: 479, n. Dative: oflice of, 189; as nearer object after intrans. and certain compound verbs, 190 ; as indirect object after trans, verbs, 191; ethical, 193 ; after impers. verbs, 193 ; after adj., 194 ; 190; supplanted by prepos. + case, 195; after prepos., 303, 305, 306. Declension : of articles, 38; of nouns, 43- 68 ; 438-435 ; of foreign nouns, 64, 63,3; of proper nouns, 65-68; ofthe ad- jective, 69-73; of pronouns, 81-100. Demonstrative Pronouns : 88-91 ; use of, 344-350 ; origin of, 443 ; supplanted by l)ier and ba + prepos., 351, 2. Dependent Clauses, see Subordinate. Dependent order of words : 341, 344 ; in main clauses, 347,349; the oldest order, 349, 2. Dialect : and written lansruage, 390 ; in M. H. G., 485, 2 ; in N. H. G., 486, 487; in the pronunciation of the edu- cated, 390 ; and the public school, 393, 5. Diphthongs: pronunc. of, 33 ; analysis of, 373 ; become single vowels, 488, 4 • < long vowels, 488, 5. Dutch : 481, 3 ; 493, 3. East Prankish : 483, 3 ; 486. Elliptical clauses and phrases : 310 ; 384, 5, Rem.; 387; 343, of, 2. English: 479, III. ; 493,4; umlaut in, 403, 2. Euphony: 418,1. Exclamation : G. in, 188, 309, 3 ; order of words in, 343, e ; see interjections. Final clauses : 338. Flemish : 481, 3. Foreign nouns : decl. of, 64 ; gender of, 163; verbs, 538. Foreign wordls : spelling of, 365 ; ac- cent, 437, 430, 1 ; 434, 4 ; in G. word- stock, 493-494. Fractions : 633, 2. Frisian : 481, 1. Future : formation of, 114 ; force of, 378 ; imperative force of, 378, 3 ; 387, 3 ; present with future force, 374, 5 ; condit. for subj. of, 381 ; origin of, 383,4; 379, 3. Gender : of nouns and their distribution among the declensions according to, 43; syntax of, 159-169; grammati- c.il and sex, 159, IGO ; concord ofthe 268 SUBJECT-INDEX. same, 165-168 ; according to meaning, 160; according to endings, 161; doubt- ful and double, 163 ; change of, 161, Eera., 163; of compound nouns, 164; concord of, 165-168; between subject and predicate, 313, 316. Genitive: office of, 180; various kinds of G., 180, 1-7; partitive G. passed into apposition, 181, 351; supplanted by piepos., 181 ; dependent upon adj., 83, 183 ; dependent upon verbs as nearer object, 184; as remoter object, 185; after impersonal verbs, 186; ad- verbial G. of place, time, etc., 187; sup- planted by A., 307, Rem.; difference be- tween A. and G., 308; after prepos., 303; in exclamations, 188. German Dialects : classification of, 480- 483; 484. Gsrman Language : see Sdiriftsprache ; history of, 478-494 ; relation to other Germanic languages, 480-486. German Sounds : analysis of, 366-389. Germanic Languages : relation to other I.-E. languages, 477; characteristics of , 478 ; classification of, 479-484. Gerundive: 107 ; 389, Rem. ; 398 ; 453. Gothic: letters, 360; language, 479, 1. Grimm's Law : 407-415 ; G. T. shifting, 407-410; G. shifting, 413-415; mod- ifications of, 413 ; in dialects, 480 ; in derivative verbs, 535, 1, R. 2. Hessian : 483, 2. High German : explanation of terms, 480, 3, a. See South German. Hildebrantslied : 485, 1. Icelandic : 479, IT ; 339. 1 ; 530. Ilkitive Sentences : co-ordinate, 333. Imperative : 105, 450 ; in strong verbs. 131 ; personal pron. in, 386, 1 ; future with imperative force, 378, 3 ; 387, 3 ; force of, 386 ; other verbal forms with the force of, 387 ; conditional and con- cessive force of 339, 1 ; word-order in, 343, b. Indefinite Pronouns : 94-100, 445 ; use of, 359-363. Indirect Speech : tenses in, 383; mood in, 385; 335,3; 338. Indo-European: 477. Infiuitive: 106, 451; nature of, 388; 390, 3, b ; perfect, 388, 1 ; imper. force of, 387, 1 ; without and with ,11. 389- 391; 391,3-5; without v.t, 389,Rem.; after certain groups of verbs, 390 ; with ju, do., 391, 1 ; as object and subject, 391, 2, 3 ; A. with, 393 ; as a noun, 393 ; governed by prepos. + ^u, 391, 1 ; inf. clause, 335, 2, Rem. 3 ; 333, 1; 335, 1 ; position of two, in dependent clause, 345, 1 ; position of adjuncts of, 353. Insfumental: 194. Interiections: .559, 5G0. IntCxi-ogative Pronouns: 93,444; use of, 351-353 ; D. supplanted by lue(i) + prepos., 351, 2. Interrogative Sentences : 309, 2 ; indirect, 335, 2 ; disjunctive, 335, 2, c ; word- order, 343, a. Inverted order of words: 341, 343; in inserted main clause, 343, 1 ; origin of, in conditional and in main clauses, 348, 1 ; after certain co-ordinating conjimc-. tions, 319 ; in a clause instead of obs 0lei(^, etc., 339. I-stems: 53-55; 439. Iteratives: 531,2. Jo-stems: 46,2; 438; in adj., 437, 3: 496,2; 533. Kanzleisprache : 486,487. Labialization, 367, 1 ; 370, 4, Rem. Language : written. See Schriftsprache, Law of Finals: 478,3. Levelling : nature of, 491, 1 ; in the strong pret., 460 ; in the weak verbs. 454, 455. Low Frankish : 481, 3. Low German Dialects: 480, 1; 481; > H. G., 493, 3 ; their relation to the written language, 393, 1-3 ; 391. Low Saxon: 481,2. Luther: 486,487. Middle Frankish: 483, 1. Middle German Dialects: 480,2; 483; 488, 3, a ; 488, 4. Middle High German : 485, 2 ; transition of sounds to N. H. G., 488-491. Mi-verbs: 136; 449,1,2; 473-476. Modal Clauses : 333. Modal Auxiliaries. See Auxiliaries. Mood : see subj., imper. ; in adjective clauses, 338. Multiplicatives : 531, 1. N-decleneion : of nouns, 47, 61, 62, 433-435 ; of adjectives, 69, 313, 315. Narrowness of vowels : 367,2. Negatives : 309, 1 ; double negative, 309, 1 ; in comparative clauses, 333, 2. New High German : 485, 486. Nominative: 178,179; absolute, 397; predicate. 179; A. for, in pred., 303, 1. Normal order of words : 341, 343 ; in subordinate clauses, 345, 2 ; after co- ordinating conjunctions, 343, 2 ; when the subordinate clause precedes, 343, 3; 348, 2 ; 343, c ; 358. North German : see Low G. Norwegian: 479,11. Nouns: decl. of, 43-68 ; systems of noun* decl., 43 ; distribution of nouns among the three declensions according to gen- der, 43, 433 ; cfeneral rules for noun- decL, 43 ; strong decl. of, 44-60, 438- 431 ; weak decl. of, Gl, 63, 438, 2 ; SUBJECT-INDEX, 269 432 ; mixed decl. of, 63, 435, 1 ; use of cases, see individaal cases ; deriva- tion of, 496-51G; composition, 517- 581. gender of compound, 1G4; ac- cent of, 431, 423. See Number, Proper N., Foreign N.. Abstract N., Compound. Number : Singular and plural of nouns : pi. the basis of classification of strong nouns, 44 ; no sign, 45, a ; umlaut, 45,*; -e, 49-55; -er, 56-60, 431; (e)n, 61-63 ; pi. in -3, 60 ; irregular, 51, 173, 173 ; double forms, 58, 163, 4; 431, 2; of abstract nouns, 171; nouns only in pi., 174. Sing, or pi. after nouns of quantity, etc., 175 ; why sing., 176 ; sing, where Eng. pi., 177; sing. neut. of pronouns refer to masc, fern., and plural nouns, 168, 313. Sin<,^ and pi. of verbs : 311 ; pi. after a collective noun, 313 ; "pi. of majes- ty," 311, 2. Numerals : 77 ; infl. of, 78 : when in- flected, 336, 337; cardinals, 77-79; pi. in -e, 337 ; in -cr, 338, 2 ; ordinals, 80, 311, 530, 533 ; infinitive, 100; derivation of, 5^9-^33. Old High German : 485. Ordinals : see Numerals. Orthography : division into syllables, 36; regulated by government, 37, 36i, 2; historical notes on, 360-365; umlaut- eigns, 363 ; on the marks to show length, 363 ; on use of capitals, 364 ; of foreign words, 365 ; government rules, 37. O-stems ; lose sign of the pi., 47, 51, 438. Participial Clauses : 394, 4 ; 333, 1. Participles : 103, 107, 453 ; use of, 394 -397 ; position of adjuncts of, 353. Past part, without gc-, 108, 113, 453, 2; 470, 538; isolated, 139, Rem.; 131, Rem.; 534, 4 ; imper. force of, 387, 2; passive force of, 395 ; act- ive force of, 395, 2 ; 396 ; dependent upon fommen. l^eiFii, etc , 396 ; of verbs of motion, 396; absolute con- struction, 397. Pres.part.,374,6; 383,3,4; 394,453; in compound tenses, 383,1, 2; 351. Passive : see Voice. Perfect: formation of, 113; force of. 376; with future perf force, 379,2; Eng. perf. — G. pres., 374,4; impera- tive, 386, 1 ; infinitive, 388. Personal Pronouns : 81, 83, 440 ; syn- tax of, 330-335 ; gender of, 81 ; use of, in address, 330-33,3 ; repetition of, 33.3, 2 ; omission of, 333, 1 ; sup- planted by other pronouns and preposi- tions, 334 ; in the imper., 386, 1. Phonology : 360-437 ; orthography, 360 -365 ; analysis of sounds, 366-389 ; as standard of pronunc, 300-393 ; pho- netic laws. 393-417 ; accent, 418-437. Plaitdeutvsch : 481, 2. a ; 484, Pluperfect: formation of, 113; force of, 377; relation to Condit., 380, 381, 384, 5, Plural : see Number. Popular Etymology ; 494, S, 3. Possessive Pronouns : 85-87 ; sjTitax Oi, 339-343 ; origin of, 441 ; compounds with, 87; used substantively, 340; repetition of, 341, 343, 2 ; relation to def. article, 154, 343,3 ; supplanted by demonstr. pron., 343, 1 ; uninliected, 339, 343, 1; after G., 180, 4, Predicate, 308 ; concord of subj. and pred., 311-317 ; number of verb after collective noun, 313 ; when subjects are connected by conjunctions, 311, 314; person of verb when subjects are of dif- ferent persons, 315 ; position of, 350, 351. Prepositions: syntax of, 301-306 ; nat- ure of, 301, 1,2; 556; classification of, according to cases, and treatment of, in alphabetical order, 303-306 • gov- ei-niug the G., 303 ; governing the D., 303 ; governing the A., 304 ; govern- ing D. and A., 305 ; general position of, 357. Present: infl. of, 103: of weak verbs, 118. 447 ; of strong verbs, 131, 456 ; O. H. G., 446 ; of pret.-pres. verbs, 134 ; uses of, 374 ; periphrastic, 374, 6; impcr. force, 387, 3; formation of present-stem, 457. Preterit: infl. of, 103; weak, 454; strong, 458 ; levelling in. 460 ; double subj., 135, 136. 464,3 ; 139 ; of pret.- pres, verbs, 134. 470; force of, 375 ; relation to condit., 380,381,384,5; ind. for unreal subj., 340, 3. Pret. pres. verbs : 134 ; 135 ; 108, 2 ; 367; 470-473 Pronouns: inflection of, 81-100, 440- 445; syntax of, 330-363; concord with noun, 165-168, 335; origin of, 496; position of, in the sentence, 353, e ; neut. pron. refers to masc. or fom. noims, 168 ; neut. pron. one of two accusatives, 199, 1, 2. See reciprocal, possessive, etc., separately. Pronunciation: of letters. 1-37, 366; standard of, 390-393 ; disputed points in standard, 391 ; Hanoveiian and N. G., 390, 4 ; 393, 1-3 ; dialect in, 390, 1-3. Proper Nouns : decl- of, 65-68 ; article before, 147, 155, 1 ; gender of, 160, 2, with Rem. ; 164. Question : see Interrogative Sentences. Reciprocal Pronouns: 84, 197, 306, 338. Reduplication : nature of, 458 ; in VII. CI. 270 SUBJECT-IKDEX. of verbs, 130, 131; in the present, 457,3. Reflexive Pronouns: 83,337; personal for, 33 7, 1. Relative Clauses : see Adjective CI. Relative Prononns : 93 ; use of, 354- 358 ; origin of, 354 ; supplanted by adverbs and conjunctions, 357, 358, 336, 337. Restrictive Clauses : 336. Roundness of vowels; 367, 1: in S. G., 391, 5. Runes, 493, 2. BUckmnlaut : 403, 2 ; 455. Scandinavian, 479, 11. Schriftsprache : 390; 485, 2f 486, 487. Sentence : structure of simple, 308 ; con- stituents o^ 308 ; arrangement of, see word-order: various kinds of main, 3Q9 ; 384, 2 ; 386 : compound, see co- ordinate and subordinate. Shifting of mutes : see Grimm's Law. Shifting of spirants : see Vemer's Law. Silesian : 483, 6. Singular : see Number. Slavic : 477 ; 481, 2, Rem. ; 483, 4-6. Souancy: 376. South Frankisn : 483, 2. South German Dialects : 480, 3 ; 483 ; 488, 5, a ; 489 ; 490, 1, a ; relation to the written language, 391, 393, 4. Suabian : 483, 2. Subject r 308 ; concord of, and predicate, 311-317 ; position of subject and verb, 341, 356. Subjunctive : kinds of, 384 ; potential, 384, 3; 335, 2. Rem. 1 ; 335, 2 ; 338 ; in conditional clauses, 340, 448. Subordinate Sentences : 318, 333, 334- 340; word-order in, 343, c; 344- 346 ; 350, Rem. ; omission of auxil., 346 ; position of, 358. Substantive Clauses : 333-335 ; nature of, 333 ; various kinds of, 335 ; nor- mal order in, 345. Superlative: see Comparison ; use of, 333 -335 ; never uninfiected. 333 ; absolute and relative, 333 ; applied to two ob- jects, 335; of adverbs, 300, 2. Siirdness : 376. Swedish : 479, IL Swiss : 483, 1, a. Temporal Clauses : 330. Tenses : simple, 101, 103, 448 ; use of, 374, 375, 383. Compound: 109, 113-116, 376- 381 ; origin of, 383 ; position of sepa- rable prefix, 351. See the separate tenses. Thuringian : 483, 4. Time : modes of expressing time, 336 ; G. of, 187 ; A. of, 308. Umlaut : signs of, 31, 363 ; as a sign oi the pi., 45, b\ 48 ; in comparis(m oi adj., 74; in pret. subj. of strong verbs, 131 ; in the pres. of strong verbs, 137, Rem. ; 139, Rem. ; 130, Rem. ; 131, Rem. : 404 ; nature of, ^01 ; in Eng., 403, 2 ; spread of, 488, 1 ; in derived verbs, 535. Upper Saxon : 483, 5. Variatives: 533. Verb : principal parts of, 103 ; infl. of, \i)6 ; personal suffixes of 104, 118, 121, 449; classification of, 364 ; ir- regular weak, 119, 454, 455; weak vebs are derivative, 117, 1. Reduplicating: 130, 131,458; non- thematic, see mi- verbs ; anomalous, 134-136. Compound : 137 ; D. after, 190 ; A. after, 198, 547-550; accent in, 421. Reflexive, 138 ; 197; 306; 336,2: 364. Impersonal : subject of, 336, 1, 2, 5; cases after, 186, 193, 305 ; G. after, 184-180 ; D. after, 189-193 ; D. or A. after, 196, 300 ; A. after. 198 ; two A., 199, 301 ; neuter, 179 ; trans., 191, 364 ; intrans., 364. V. of motion : comp. tense of, 365, 4; 366 ; 383, 3 ; 390, 2 ; past part, of, 396; see Number, Predicate, auxil., pret. pres. verbs ; person of, in relative clauses, 336 ; position of, 341, 350^ Rem. ; derivation of, 534-550. Verner's Law : 411, 413, 416. Voice : passive, infl. of, 116 ; constmc- tion in, 179,2; 303, 2; 368-373; replaced by reflexive construction, 3 73 ; origin of, 373 ; in Go., 383, 1. Vowel-declension : see Noun, strong ; 438-431. Vowels : quantity of, 33-35, 488, 2, b ; analysis and description of, 367-373; vowel-table, p. 162 ; general remarks upon, 373; doubling of. 33,363,4; connecting v. in conjugation, 118; 449, 2 ; 454, 2, 3 ; in ablaut, 393- 400 ; in umlaut, 401, 403, 404 ; in- terchanges of, 403-406 ; lengthening of, in W. H. G., 488, 2 ; ^hortening o^ 488, 3 ; diphthongization of long v., 488, 5. Vowel- stems : see Vowel-Declension. Wordformation : 495 - 559 ; substan- tives, 495-531 ; pronouns, 496 ; ad- jectives, 533-533; verbs, 534-550; adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, 551-558 ; interjections, 559. Word-order : 341-350 ; normal, 343 ; inverted, 343 ; dependent, 344. See these separate heads; in poetry and W arose, 359, ord-stock: 493-494. WORD-INDEX AND GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. The first contains a list of the German and English words, prefixes and suffixes specially treated in the grammar. Also the strong and irregular verbs with the princi- pal parts, and the second or third pers. sing, of the pres. ind. and the imperative sing,, if they are at all peculiar. The umlauts have a separate place, a after a, o after o, vi after u. The numbers refer to the paragraphs. I., II., III., etc., mean the strong verb-classes and ablaut series. After the substantives the gender {m., n.,f.) and the plural ending are always indi- cated of the strong nouns, the gender and w. (= weak) are given after the weak nouns. When there is no pi. sign at all, it is indicated by -. When the cognate Eng. word is rare, or when its meaning differs quite widely from the German word, it is placed after the common Eng. meaning. The vocabulary is meant to cover all untranslated single words and illustrative sen- tences as far as § 147, except the foreign words 63, 3; 63, 2; 64. . If weak verbs must have the connecting vowel this is indicated by the preterit. - after a word means a prefix in composition, before a word it means a suflax. a. a, pronnnc. of, 3; description of, 371, 4; quantity of, before r, it, xt, 33, 488, 2 ; in ablauts., VI., 459, 4 ; in ablauts. I.- V., 459. a, in Engl, phrase " so much a pound,'' 156. 9lag, n.^pl. Stfcr, carrion. ah, from, 303,1; 516, 1. aljer, but, 60, + word-order, 343, 2; 356; comt)ared with fenbevn, 330, 2 R H&cr-, 516, 1. ab^anben, lost, 439, 1. aO'fc^rclben, to copy, see f(i>rei6cn. 9l6t, m., !le, + abbot, a A, alas, 60; 559, 1. a^ten, with G., to attend to, in 83; (ad^s tete). oc, as sign of umlaut of a, 363, 2. oeu as sign of umlaut, 363, 2. Sifter-, 516. 2. -age, noun-sufHx ; fern, gender, 161, 2; 163,5. at, pronnnc. of, 33, 373. 1. att.+all, 100; dc'f. art. after. 144; neuter, 168; use of, 361; accent^ 433,5. attcin, conj.^ but; + word-order, 343, c. attcv-,+8uperl., 333; accent, 433, 1, 5. ollcrbincj?, certainly, 553, 1. aUerlie'bft, charming, very lovely, 333 ; 433, + Shakspere^s cUderliefest. allma^ltd), gradually, 536, 3, c. al^, before a predicate noun, 179 ; in ap- position, 3 17; before a relative pronoun, 33 7, 3 ; in temporal clauses, 330, 1; in comparative clauses, 333, 343, c; after comparative, 333, 2 ; after adjec- tives, nid)io, anoer-, 333, 2, a, 3 ; + baft, 333, 3. alt, + old, etym., 453, 1. 5lUev, n., -, age, old age. am < an bent, + on the, 40. -am, noun-suf., 501. 3tmt, w., -er, etym., 516, 3. an, + on, 305, 3; 306,1,2; compared with auf, 300, 2. ail < an ben, 40. an'Oinbcn, to tie, see 6inben. -anb, noun-suflix, 505. onbcr-, + other, 94 ; accent in comp.,433, 1; etym., 445, 3; in comp., 530. anbevt()al() = 1', 530. ' 3lnnuit,/., «oi?^., grace; gender. 164, a. an'i:I;rei6en, to write down, charge, see ^d)reiIJen. 272 WORD-IN^DEX Ai^D GERMAIT-EKGLISH VOCABULARY. anjlatt, + instead of, 303, 1; + ju and inf., 291,1, R.: 333, 1. Hnt-, 616,3. -ant, 505. 2tntn)Drt, /., •z^., + answer; gender, 164, e. Strm, m., -o, + arm. 9lrmut, /., no pi., poverty; gender, 164, a. -at, 511, 2, d\ in neut. foreign nouns, 163, 1. SItem, m., -§>, no pi., breath, 47, 1; 501. atmen, to breathe, 118, 1; (atmete). au, proniinc. of, 32 ; analysis of, 372, 2; origin of, 488, 5; 490, 6. auc^, also, + eke ; in relat. clause, 93, 4; with trenn, ob, 339. auf, + upon, 305, 3 ; compared with an, 300, 2; +ba^, in order that 338. au'ferfte^^en, to rise again, 546, 2. au'frid}ten, to erect, (-ri^tete). 9tuge, n„ -%, -u, + eye, a-umlaut, see a, c. au§, + outof, 303,2. au^er, besides, 303, 3; +ba^, 336. §t5t, /., -, + axe, 491, 2; 512, 2. ft, pronunc. of, 31 ; 362 ; 371, 2, R. 3 ; see umlaut, ft^en, to bait, corrode, + etch, 535, 1, R. 2. ftu, pronunc. of, 32; 372, 3; origin of, 488, 5. au^er-, + outer, 7G, 2. B, pronnnc. of, 4; description of, 385, 2; final, 385, 3; „l)arteg" l\ 383, 1, R.; 392, 2; Eng. correspondents of, 408, 2; 413, 2; 490, 6. 1-, see be-; 557, 1; 414,3. Ba(fen, buf, geba(fen, + bake,VI.,l 29 ; (badft, Bute) ; in comp., 528. 5Bab, n.. -eg, -cr, +bath. 33al!e(n), rti., -, beam, 46, 4. 33anb, /?., 58; m., 162,4; 496. 58anbe, /., w., + band (of robbers, etc.). -bar, adj.suffix, 526, 1 ; accent, 424, 1,6. barmfie'rjig, merciful; accent, 422, 3. ba^, more, very, + better, 76; etym.^ 439. Sauer, m., w., farmer, 62, 3 ; 63; strong, - builder; n., -, cage. 33au, m., -e, see also 51. 33aum, m., — c, tree, +beam. 33 ar, m., w.,+bear. be-, + be-, by, 108, 3; 540, 1; Bee bei. beben, tremble, etym.^ 457, 3. bebarf, see bcburfen. beberfen, to cover, + deck, bebient, etijm., 295, 2. bebingt, past part., conditioned, 125, 1. bebftrfen, + G., to need; for infl. see 135, 2. befeljlen, befall, befo^Ien, to command, IV., 127; (beftc^Ifl, befiebt, be^ol^le). SBefeftigung, /., w., fortification. betleii3en, befits, beftiftcn, I., 122, 1; refl., to apply oneself to ; (bu bcftei^eft, bu or et be[lcipt). befreunben, + befriend; (befveunbete). begeben, refl., + G., to give up, 540,4; see geben. beginiieit, begann, begonnen, + begin. III., 125, 2 ; 454, 3 ; 457, 2 ; (begbnne). bef)aupten, to assert, 540, 4 ; (bel^auptetc). bet, + by, near, 303, 4; in comp., 516,4. beib-, -h both, 100; use of, 228. Sein, w., -e, leg, + bone, beifammen, together, in the presence of. bcipen, btj3r gebifien, + bite, I., 122, 1 ; (bu beipeft, bu or er beipt). beijen, + to bait, cauterize; eiym.^ 535, 1, belejen, past part., well read, 540, 3. beUen, bott, gebDUen,+ to bark, VIII., 133; {w. and bittft). benc^mcu, take away, 540, 4; see ne:^men. bequcm, convenient, comfortable, + becom- ing; 409,3. bergeii, barg, geborgen, hide. III., 125, 3 ; 397; (birgft, birg, barge and bitrge). berittcn, past part., mounted; 524, 4. bevflen, barft, gebDrften, + burst, III., 125,3; (bu birfteft, bu or er btrft, bh'ft or berftc ; borfte or barfte). ^cfagt(er), the afore + said 146, 1. beid^eibeu, modest, past part., 524, 4. beffer, bcft, + better, best, 76, 1 ; 439 ; 300, 2. beyud)t, frequented, 74. bcten, to pray; (betete). ^etrubniS,/. or n.. -ifte, sadness, grief. 93ctt, n., -e§, -en, +bed; 3U— +to — or in — . beuvgen, +bow 488, 5. beircgen, beioog, bewogen, to induce, VEII., 133 ; (bcroegft, beirege). bid, Eng., 396. bicgen, bog, gebogcn, bend, 11., 124, 2; (bu beugft, rare). U^Hene, /"., lu., +bee, 455, 2. bietcn,'bDt, geboten, offer, IL, 124, 2; 396; 408, 2; (er bictet and bent), binben, banb, gebunbcn, +bind. III., 125,1; 496; (er binbet). btnnen, within, 303, 5; 557, 1. 5Binfe, /., w., + bentgrass, 490, 2. 3?irne, /., -z^?., +pear, 435, 3. hi^, till, until, prepos., 304, 1 ; conj., 330, 3; etym.. 557, 1. bitten, bat, gcbeten, ask, + bid; V., 128, 2; 199; 233, 1; 457,1; 466; (er bittet). blanf, shining, 74. blafen, blte§, geblafen, blow, VIL, 130, 1; (bu btafeft, bu or er blaft). blap, pale, 74. Slatt, w., -eS, -i^-er, leaf,+blade. blau,+blue, 74. blattern, to turn the leaves of a book. 33Ict, 71., no pi., lead, bleiben, bitcb, geblicben, remain, I., 122,2; + inf., 290, 3. blei(^en, btidv geblicben, + bleach, I., 122, 1. 9?iate, + blowth, blossom ; etym., 430, 1. '^^it, in,, w., messenger. 93oct, n.,pl. 5Bbte,+boat. ^oyen)i(^t, m., pi. -e ov -er, rascal, 57, 3 ; 59. WOKD-IKDEX AiTD GEEMA]S"-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 273 S3ranntwein, m., -e, +brandy. Braten, briet, gebraten, roast, fry, VII., 130, 1; (bratft, brat), braudjen, need, compared with miiffen, 867, 4. 33raut, /., -c,+ bride. SBrdutigam, m., -c, +bride^room, 439, 1. brec^en, bracf>, gcbrod;eu, + oreak, IV, 137; (bu bri(i)[t, brid)). bvennen, brannte, cjebvannt, + burn, 119, 1; 455; (bvennte). bringen, bradjte, gcbrad^t, + bring, 119,1; 454, 2; (bra(^tc). SSvDttn, m.^ for SSronnen, ^J5runnen, well, spring, + bourn, 489, 4; 46, 4. aSrofam, m., -e, crumb; 23rcjame, /., w., 47,1; 601. 5BrDt, w., -e, sometimes —e,+ bread. a3ruber, m., —, + brother, 46, 48, 411, 415. 93runnen, see 33ronn. 23u(^, n., — cr, + book. 5BuUe,+ bul], see 163,3. bunt, variegated, 74, 5. 58urg,/., w., castle, 397; in comp., 164, c. SBurjdE^, m., -e, and w.^ fellow. c, pronuEC. of, 5; in foreign words,389, 3. 6afu§IeI)re, /., w., theory of the cases (of nouns). causeway, causey, +(S^auftce, 494, 3. d) pronunc. of, 6; 375,4; 378,3; 383, 1; description of, 375; quantity of vowel before, 35; Eng. correspondents of, 410, 3 ; 414, 3 ; 415, 1, 3 ; 490, 8 ; d)— g, 416; d) — T, 493,4; d) - f, 535, 1, R. 2. ch, Ger. correspond, of, 414, 3; 535, 1, R. 2. -dyjn, + -kin, 46, 1; 493, 4; 510; neuter gend., 161, 3; pronunc. of, 6; 375,2. -d)e(u), in verbs, 536, a. 6()Vt[t, m., w.,+Cliristian, 435, 3. choose, + ficicii, 416, 1. *)", d^g, pronunc. of, 39, 383, 1; 490, 3, a. tt, 14 ; 383, 1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 413, 4; 414, 3; cf — c^, 535, 1, R. 2. b, pronunc. of, 7, 385, 3: description of, 384, 2. Eng. correspondents of, 410, 1; 413, 1, a; 415; b — t, 416. -b, 511, 1. ba, + there, adv.\ before a prepos. begin- ning with a vowel, bar; in relat. clause, 358, 33 7, 2 ; in local clauses, 331, a ; = because, since in causal clauses, 3.37; = as, when in temporal clauses, 330, 1, 2; etym.^ 551, 1; after demoustr. pron., 345, 3. ®ad?, 71., -er, roof, + thatch. bactjtc, see benfen, also 417, 1. 1)ame, /., w,^ lady, +dame. banii't, coTv'., in order that, 338. ba'mit, + ba9 = by + part. clause, 337 ®anf, m., -e§ ; -pL of, see 173. barf, see biirfen. bag, + that ; see ber; peculiar use of, 168; for G., 183. \)0,^, + that, comj. ; in substantive clauses, 335 ; + nid)t = without + part, clause, 333 ; in other adverbial clauses, 335, 336, 338. bduc^t, see beiK^t. -be, noun-suffix, 511, 2. ®e^nung^34), 363, 2. 3. bein, G. of bu, 81 ; possessive pronoun, 85. beinev, G., see bem. bemungead;tet, notwithstanding, wrez?., 303, 10. benfen,ba(^te,geba(^t, + think, 119,2; 403, 2; 454, 3; (bdd)te). Inf. as noun, baS ®enfen. CDenfmat, ?i., monument; iox -pi. see 58. benn, + then, for, 301, 1 ; causal conjunc- tion, 331,337; after comparative, 333, 2; in restrictive clauses, 336; origin of, 551, 1. bev, + the, def. art., 38-40 ; demoustr. pronoun 88, 443; lengthened forms in en, ev, 344, 2; relat. pronoun, 93. berart ba^, so that, 335. beren (G. pL), 88, 93. 1; use of. 344, 1. berent-, 87, 89. be'rgeftalt \i, adv., yet, after all, + though, 343, e. ^ottov, m., -§, pi. -o'ren, 63, 2. bDppet-,+ double, 531, 1. Tsrangfal, /., -c, distress. brcf(J^en, braic^ or bvofd)/ gebrofc^en, + thresh, III., 135, 3. 133; (brafc^e or brDfd)e, brifd^eft, bu and er bvtfi^t, bvtfd^, also weak, brefd)cft, bref<^e). bringcn, brang, gcbrungen, to penetrate, III., 135, 1; (brange). brttt-+ third, 410, 1; 530. bvudcn, to print Ir-tr o bracEcu, to press i"^'*^'^- 274 WORD-ITS^DEX AN"D GERMAN-EKGLISH VOCABULARY. bumpf, hollow (sound), + damp, musty (air), 74, 5. buntel, dark, compar. bunfler. fcurc^, + throui^h, 304, 2 ; compar. with ijen, 369; with inittel5 and mit, 302, 7 ; separable and insep. prefix in comp. verbs, 549, 1. ©urcblauc^t, /., w.. Serene Highness, fcitnfen, fciiinfte, gebunft, impers. verb, it seems, + (me) thinks, 119, 2; 454, 3. tUifen, fciirftc, gebuvft, to be permitted; infl., 135, 2; past part, 108, 2; use of, 367, 2; etym., 416. c, pronnnc. of, 8 ; description of, 371, 1- 3; unaccented, 371, 3; 485,2; sign of length, 33, 363. 1; sign of umlaut, 363; before r, rt, rb, 33, 488, 2; sign of plu- ral, 47, 49, 51, 53; in cardinals, 33 7; in the adj.-sufiixes -cl, -cr, -en, 71; con- necting vowels in conjugation, 118 ; in case-suffix, 43, 46 ; derivative e in verbs, 535, 536 ; secondary before r, 491, 2; e - i, ic, 137, 138, 403; c — h, 489,1. -e in imperative, 105; 118, 3. -e in nouns < adj., 498, 1; gender of such nouns, 161, 2. -c in jo-stems. 46, 47, 51, 437, 3 ; 498, 2 ; gender of such nouns, 161, 3. -e in adverbs, 554, 1. ed^t, genuine, etym.^ 488, 3, a. G(fe,/., w., comer, +edge, 413, 4. ebel, noble, 404, 71. el^e, before, + ere, 7G, 2, h ; 439, 2 ; coiij.^ 330, 3. Ci, prouunc. of, 33 ; analysis of, 373, 3; origin of, 488, 5. -ci, noun-suffix, 498, 3 ; gender of such nouns, 161, 2. Gibam, m., -c, son-in-law, 47, 1 ; 501. -eien, verb-suffix < French verbs in -ier, 538. civ3en, + own, adj., 470; 471, 6; 534, 4. eigentumli(^, accent and meaning, 433, 2. cilen, to hasten. cim < cincm, D. of ein, q, v., 41, 1. (5imcr, pail, etym., 398. cin, +a, one, indef. art., 38, 41; after wddj, wa§ fiir, 93, 2, 3 ; indef. pronoun, 73, 95, 359, 300; ein par, ein iDenicj, a few, a httle, 100. cin, adv.y + in; — unb au§, + in and out; 538, 7. einanber, + one another; uninflected, 84. eingeSoren, for two meanings see 538, 5, 7. einig-, indef. pron., some, 95 ; at?/., + united. einmal, +once, 39, 41. ei'nncbmen, take possession of, see nelimen. In 85 gcncmmen ein for eingenommcn by poetic license. (Sinobe,/., w., solitude, desert, 511, a. einS, + one, 531, 2; for cognate Ace, 304. einfl,+once, 531, 2; 555,2. ei'nfiubie^rcn, to study well, commit to memory. ein^eln, adv., singly, 555, 3. eitet, vain ; uninflected " nothing but," 313,1. -el, noun-suffix, 46, 438, 5 ; 499; gender of such nouns, 161, 1: 161, 3; adj. -suf- fix, 71, 533, 1; verb-suffix. 106.' elenb, wretched ; etym., 401, among Ex- amples. clf,+ eleven, 77; 539. elk,+(SIc^, Lyientier, 490, 3. -ein, in verbs, 536 ; connecting vowel in -, 118,3. Gltern, parents, + elders, 174, 404. -em in nouns, 501, 533, 2. emp-< ent- 541. emtnef>Icn, cinpiaftl, empfctitcn, recommend. IV., 137; 464,3; (empf el;tc, bu empfie^lft, empfiel)!). -en, noun-suffix, 46; 438, 5 ; 501; 503 ; indicates masc. gend., 160, 1 ; in the n-declcDsion, 61, 63 ; in the pi. of for- eign nouns, 64, 2, 3 ; in D. and A. of proper nonns. 66; in G sg. of adj. for e§, 73; 91, 3; 316, 1; in pronouns, 344, 2 ; 440, 2 ; in mixed declension, 63; in comp. nouns, 518, 1, 2. Adj.-stiffix, 71; 311; 534. In the past part., 107; 453; 503; 534. In the inf., 106; 451. In adverbs, 551. -enb (nb), in the pres. part., 107; in nouns, 505; in the gerund, 107. (Snbe, «., -§, -n, + end. enge, narrow, 408, 4. Gngel, m., -, + angel. -en-^, adv.-suffix, 555, 2 ent-, 541. Gnte, duck, 430, 1. entgegen, + against, *'to meet," 303, G; 557, 1; see gegen. entfagen, to renounce. enta^ebcr (— cbcr), + either — or, 343, d, 2; 558. er, he, 81. ev for §err, gentleman, Mr., 330, 3. -er, noim-suffix, 438, 5; 65, 507; indi- cates masc. gend., 161, 1; 163,3; as sign of plural, 56, 431. Adj.-suffix, 71, 533, 3; 507, 2 ; in ad- verbs, 551; 556; compar. suffix, 79; 438 ; in the G. of pronouns, 83, 88, 344, 2 ; 440, 2 ; in verbs, see -em. er-, 543. Grbe, double gender, 163, 3; neut. pl.Grtc is rare. (Srbe,/., w., + earth, 63, R. -erei, noun -suffix, 497, 3, R. erbaten, lofty, 139. R.; 534, 4. ertalten, to grow cold (.535 2 crtalicn, refl., to caich cold j ' -erlic^, adj.-suffix, 536, 3, c. evloic^en, evlof*, cvIoj(f>en, to go out (candle, fire), VIII., 133; (crli)d;c[t, bu and cv cr-^ U';cl)t, orliicl}). -cm, adj.-suffix, 534, 3; adj. in — , iniin- fleeted, 311. WORD-IKDEX AKD GERMAN-El^GLISH VOCABULARY. 275 -cr(n), verb-suffix, 537, 2 ; connecting vowel in, 118, 3. erieic^en, + reach, attain. er)d)allen, erii^oU, erj^oUen, resound, VIIL, 133 ; (eg erfc^aUt). cricl)vecfeu, erfdjraf, cvidjrotfen, to be fright- ened, IV., 13 7; (evfcljrtdft, erjc^rid); when trans, generally weak. ev[t, first, + erst, 76, 2, 6; 439, 2. eriDa^eu, eriDog, criuogen, consider, VIIL, 133 ; (erra&gft). crira^nen, to mention ; etym.y 457, 2. (Sr3- + arch-, 516,6. Co, + it, N. and A. sg neut., 81; peculiar uses of, 236 ; gender, 168 ; replacing cognate A., 304 ; 336, 6 ; G. of masc. and neuter, 83 ; 183; A. supplanted by prepos., 334, 1; indefinite subject, 336, 1,2,4, 5; grammatical subject and exple- tive = there, 336, 3; 313; position of eg (A.), 353, e ; eg (N.) and inversion, 336, 3, a. eg [ei benn, bail, unless, 339; 340, 2. effen, ap, gecjeffen + eat, V., 138, 1; (bu iffefl or i^t, er i^t, i^) ; pres. part., 394, 1 ; etym., 409, 1; 466. (Sffig, vinegar, + acid, 509. ettid)- some, 96. ctiuao, something, anything, somewhat, 96; 199, 1; 360. eu, pronunc. of, 33 ; analys. of, 373, 3 ; origin of, 488, 5; eu — ie, 406. eucl; + you, D. and A. of i^r, q. t;., 81; refl., 83; reciprocal, 84; 338. euer+your, possessive pron., 85. curev for euer (G.), S3. (S«3.+your, 86; 311,2. T, pronunc. of, 9 ; description of, 380 ; Eng. correspondents of, 410, 2; 414, 2: 415, 1 ; 493, 4; f — b, 416. -fad), -fold, 531, 1. %a^,n.^ -er (and-e); compartment, pigeon- hole; i^aben, m., pi. and meanings, Bee 48, 1. faben, archaic for fangeu, g.v.x 417, 1: 458, 2. fa^ven, ful)r, gefatjrcn, drive, + fare, VI , 139 ; 400 ; 467 ; +fpajteren, 390, 2 ; (fa^rft). ga^rt,/., w., journey, ride, 430, 1, a. taUen, ftet, gefatten, + fall, VII., 130, 1 ; 458,2; (fallft). fatlg, adverbial G. in comp., = case, 91, 3; conj., 340. falfd) + false, 74, 5. fangen, fing, gefangcn, to catch, VII., 130, 1; (tangft). far + fern, 76,2. faff en, to seize, (bu faff eft or fa^t), 118, 4. faft, almost, 300, 1; 554, 1. foutenjen, to be lazy, 539, 3, a. ^o^)xi^,f., W; trade, 430, 1, a. fatten, to fell, 535, 1, a. -faltig + -fold, 531, L fec^ten, fod^t, gefoc^ten + fight, VIIL, 133 ; (bu fid^tft, fi^t, also weak), geber,/., z^., +feather, pen. fe{)Ieu + fail, lack, 494. geinb, fn., -e, enemy, + fiend, 505; partial ac0., 319. Aclb, n.^ -er, field. feft, firm, 554, 1. geuer, w., + fire; pi. of, 173. gi(^telgebirge, n., a mountain range in N. E. Bavaria, < bie %id)tc, fir. finben, fanb, gefunben + find. III., 135,1; 464; (finbcft). ginf, m., w.,+ finch. fifd;en + fish (bu fifc^eft or ftf(^t, erfif^t), 118. gtnfternig, /., -ntffe, darkness. fUi(^, shallow, level, 74, 5. flcc^ten, flodjt, geflDd)ten, to braid, Vin., 133; (bu fti(^tft or flid;ft, er fUdn, fUd>t or fle(^te). i5te5iongIel)re, /., w., accidence. Piegen, flog, geflogcn, + fly, 11., 134, 2 ; (^cugft, fleug are archaic). flief)en, flob, geflD{)en, + flee, IL, 134, 2 ; 490, 3, b; (fteud)[t. fleud) are archaic), ftiepcn, flofj, geftDJ3en, IL, 134, 1 535, 1, a; (bu, er flcu^t, archaic), glo^, n., -e,+raft, 54 ; 439, 1. p[5^en + to float, trans., 535, 1, a. goIgenb(e'^) -hthe following, 146, 1. forlorn, 416, 1. fort + forth, on, 76, 1. fv-, 545; see »er-. fvagen, frug, toask, 139; 457,2; construc- tion after, 199. ^rau, /., w., woman, wife, Mrs. ^•rauenjimuier, n., -, lady; 166. grftulein, n.^ -, young lady. Miss, 166. fret + free, fretlid), to be sure, 300, 1 ; 339 ; 554, 2,6. freffen, frajj, gefreffen, + eat, V., see effcn ; 108, 3; 138, 1. greunb, m., -c, + friend, 505. ber ^rtebe(n), m., no pi, peace, 46, 4; 47,2. frieren, fror, gefroren, to freeze, IL, 134, 2. fro^, cheerful, 74, 5. fromm, pious; harmless, frug, pret. of fragen, 139, 461. fru^, early. 300, 1; 554, 1. f^-aSr-'""' [breakfast, 137,1; 431,t funben, past part, of finben, 453, 3. 5unfe(n), m., spark; see 46, 4. ?vurc^e, /"., 2^;., + furrow, 430, 1. further,' 76, 2. ^n^, m., -eg, -e,-i-foot, 430, 1. 3;Ud^ftn, /., pi. -iunen, + vixen, 504, fut)ren, to guide, 535, 1, a. ptten, colt, + foal, 503, 2. far + for, 76, 2, b ; 304, 3 ; 306, 9 : 516, 5. fiirbaf3, onward, 76, 1. farc^ten, to fear; (fiird)tete); 454, 3. fiivlic'6 ne^mcn, to put up with, 538, 7. gilrft, m., w., prince, 76, 2, b\ 439, 2. 276 WOKD-Iiq-DEX Aiq"D GERMAiq"-E:N'GLISH VOCABULARY. g, pronunc. of, 10; 375, 3, 4; 391, 2 ; in foreign words, 378, 4; 383, 1, Rem.; after u in N. G., 383, 1, a; Eng. corre- spondents of, 408, 3, 4; gcj, 41>3, 4; de- scriptioti of, 383, 2; see gc-. gan — gunnen > gounen, 4 71, 5. ganj, whole. gar, adj.^ done ; adv.^ even, very ; + nid)t, not at all. ©arberobe, /., 2^., + wardrobe, g&ren, gor, gegoren, to ferment, VIII., 133; (garft, rarely gierft, often weak through- out). ge-, g-, 516, 7 ; 543 ; in the past part., 107, 108 ; 453, 2 ; 538 ; in nouns of neuter gend,, 161, 3 ; in p. p. of com- pound verbs, 546, 2. gebaren, gebar, geboren, to bring forth, + bear; IV., 137,398 ; (pret. subj. ge^ bare, bu gebierft, gebier). gebcn, gab, gegeben, + give,V., 138, 1; (gicbfi, gieb); 466; impersonal, 305; 336,4; 399. ©e(f, m.^ w., coxcomb. @eba^t(er), the above mentioned, 146, 1 ; < gebenfcn, q. v. @eban!e(n), m., + thought, see 46, 4 ; 47, 2. gebentcn, gebac^te, gcbad)t, + think of, men- tion; see benfen. gebci^en, gebict), geticr^en, thrive, I., 133, 2. &ebi(^t, n., -c, poem. gebtegen, ac^.^ solid, pure, past part, of ge- bei|en, according to Verners Law, 411; 534, 4. ©efalle(n), m., pleasure (in), favor, see 46, 4; 47,2. gegen + against, 304, 4 ; see entgegen, ju, nad^, um. gcgeniiber, opposite, 303, 7 ge^en, gtng, gegangen, + go, Vn., 130, 1; 136,1; 457, 2; 474; +inf., 390,2; I)astpart., 396; (bu ge^fl, gel;e). SeiM i'^^'' meaning, etc., see 163, 3. ©eifl, m., -er, +ghost; wit. getjen, to be stingy, etym., 539. ©elb unb ®ut, lit. money and property = all one's possessions, gelegen, convenient, 534, 4. getingen, gelang, gelungen, to be successfnl (in), m., 135, 1. gelten, gait, gegctten, to be worth, valid, m., 131, 135,3; impersonal, 305; (golte — gaite, bu gittfl, cv gilt, imper. gelte as a nile). ©emac^, w., " cr, apartment, gema^, according to, 303 8. ©emut, /I., -er, soul, disposition. gen, towards, 304, 4. ©euera'l, m., -e or — e,+general. genefen, gena§, gene^en, to recover, V., 138, 1; (bu gene^eft, er genefl, genefe). gcuteBen, genoB, genoffen, to enjoy, IL, 134, 1; (bu genie^eft or genie^t). gering, small, compar. of, 76, 1. gcfc^aftig, busy. gefd^e^en, gei(^a^, gef^e^en, to happen, V., 138, i; (eS geid)icl>t). ©ef^tcd^t, n., -er, race, generation. ©cfd^mciDe, n., -, set of jewelry, gefd)U)eige, conj.,=saj nothing of, 333. ©efelle, m.^-w., journeyman, fellow, com- panion. ©efeUji^aft, /., w., company, party. ©cnd)t, 71., see 57, 58. ©efpenft, w., -er, spook, ghost. gcifen, past part, of eijen, 138, R. geftalt, shaped, past part. < ftclten, 455, 3. gefunb + sound, wholesome, 74, 5. ©etreibe, /i., -, grain, etym., 511. getroft, confident, 419; past part. < trcften, 455, 3. ©evatter, m., -, + god- father, ©ercanb, 7i.,-c, ^er, garment, 58. geicanbt, active, clever, 74, 5 ; past part, of wenben, 455, 3. ©ewerbe, n., -, trade. ©eiDimmel, ti., -, swarming, gewinnen, geiuann, geiconnen, win, m., 135, 2; (geiDLMine — geicanne). gh, G. correspondents of, 415, 1. geiuip, certain, etym., 413, 2 ; past part., 453, L giepen, gop, gcgc||en, +to pour, 11., 134, 1; (seu^t, geu^ rare, gie^eft or gie^t). ©ift, n.^ -e, poison, + gift ; etym.^ 399 ; 403,1; gender of, 163,3. ©lag, n.^ -I'eo, -fer, +glas8, 493, 3. glauben + to believe. ©laube(n), m., + belief, see 46,4. gleid) + like; for fcgleid)=immediately; +in- verted order, 339. -gleii^en, in comp. with pron., + the like of, 87. glei(^en, glid), geglidjen, to be like, I., 133, 1. gleii'en, w. v.j deceive, 133, 1. glei^en, gU9, geglijien, + glitter, I., 133, 1; bu gletpeft or glei^t, er gleifet), gleiten, glitt, geglitten, + glide, L, 133, 1; (er gleitet). glimmen, glomm, geglDmmen, + to glimmer, Vm., 133. ©nabe, /., w., grace, ©olb, w., nopL, gold. ©ott, m., -eg, ^er, +God, 408, 3. gonnen, not to grudge; etym.^ 471, 5. graben, grub, gegraben, to dig, VL, 139; (bu grabft). gretfen, griff, gegriffen, to seize, L, 133, 1. greinen, gricn, gcgrienen, + grin (generally weak, rare), 1., 133, 1. ©raf, m., w., count, ©rtffet, m., -, style (slate-pencil). grinfen, + grin< greinen, 133, 1. grDp + great; compar. of, 73. ©ro^mutter, /., -, + grandmother. grilpen + greet; (bu gritficft). gut + good ; compar. of, 76, 1 ; compared with roc^I, 399, 2, a; 439. giWben+ golden, 534, 2. WOED-INDEX AND GERMAN-EKGLISH VOCABULARY. 2?7 '^, pronnnc. of, 11 ; description of, 374; Eug. correspondents of, 410, 3; 415, 1; silence of, 33; 363, 2 ; 491, 2; loss of, 415, 3; sign of length, 33, 363, 2, 3; }^ — 6),13; 490,3,6; I; — g, 134, Rem.; 416. J)ahcn + have, infl. of, 110; contracted forms, 111, 1; impersonal, 305; in comp. tenses, 365 ; 383, 1, 2 ; + inf., 390, 1. -t)aft, adj.-suffix, 546, 2. ibageftcl;;, m., w., bachelor; pi. also -e. ^aib, before cardinals, 336, 2; after ordi- nals, 339, 1. -I)alben, f or . . . sake (of), comp. with pro- nouns, 87, 89; prep., 303, 4. Bat6er + half, prep., 303, 4. fatten, I)ielt, ge^aUen,+ hold, VII., 130,1; (bu f}altft, er f;alt). ^anb, /. ^e, +hand, 53; 439, 1. -:^anben, in comp., 439, 1. l^anbeln, to act, trade. l^anbgcmein (reerbeu), to come to blows, 319. ^aiibic^u^, m., -e, glove. :^6ren + Dear, instead of ge^iirt, 108,1; 113; +inf., 390, 3. ^ulb, /., no pl.^ favor, grace, 405 ^unb, /w., -e, dog, + hound. §unbert, n., -e,+hundred, 336 ; 539, 2. §ufte, /., «;.,+hip, 430, 1 ; 513,2. ^ilnbc^en, «., -, little dog, 3. i, pronunc. of, 13 ; description of, 369,1, 2 ; < ie. 488, 4 ; < u, 489, 2 ; < c, 489, 5. t(^ + I, 81. -id}, 509 ; indicates masc. gend., 161,1; 489, 5. -ic^t, 509,1; 535,3. ie, pronunc. of, 33, 3; sect; in redupli- cating verbs, CI. VII., 458, 2; 488, 3, a. ie— eu, 134, 406. -ie, noun-suffix, 489, 4; 493, 2; indicates fem. gender, 161, 2. -teren, verbs in, 108, 4; 493, 2; 538. -ig^ + -y, adj.-suffix, 535^ 1-3 ; 489, 5 ; for -id), 509; 536, 3, c -igen, verb-suf., 539, 4. -tgfcit; 515, 2. -igtic^, adj.-Puf., 535, 2. tl)m, i:^n, i^nen, see er, fie, eS, pers. pron. tf)r, poss. pron., her, their, with cap. your, 85; origin of, 343,2. ti^rer, G. of pers. and poss. pron., see fie, it)r. 3^10, your, 86 ; 441, 8. in + in, 306, 5 ; for in ben, 40. -in, noun-sufflx, 504 ; fem. gender, 161, 2; 167; 430,3. tnbem, a»y., while, 330,1; 333; because, 337. -tng, noun-sufflx, 506. inner + inner, 76, 2. inner^oIS, within, prep.^ 303. 278 WORD-INDEX AKD german-e:n^glish vocabulary. in fofern, in n?iefern, +m so far as, 33G. trbif(|+ earthly. irjenti, any, ^\ ith proii. and adv., 2 GO. Srrtum, m., --er, + error, 56. -ifc^ +-ish, adj. -suffix, 811; 514; 525,4. its, 343,2. 3. j, pronunc. of, 13; 378, 4; description of, 375, 4; disappeared, 491, 2. iagen, hunt, chase; strong pret., VI., 129. Sa^v, w., -e, + year; after numerals, 175. Sdger, m., -, hunter. je + ever ; oo/y. 334 ; before cardinals with distributive force = "at a time"; je nad^rcm = "that depends*' ; +aye. jefc(er), every, each, infl. of, 97 ; 216, 1 ; 445, 1 ; in comp., 97 ; pi. of, 261, 3 ; + either. jebeo, each, 168. lebraeber, every one, each, 97 ; 261, 3 ; 445, 2. jcglic^, every, +each, 97, 445, 1. jemanb, some one, 97; 260; 445, 1. len(er), that, + yon, 90 ; 443, 1 ; G. sing, of, 216, 1; use of, 245, 246. jug, see jagen. lung + young. 3unge, m., w.^ boy; n., w.^ + young of ani- mals. 3ungfer,/., «;., maiden ; eiym.^ 516, 12, a. 3unter, young nobleman, +younker, 516, 12, a. ?iun)e'l, n., -§, -., + midge, 413, 4. itjube, tired. niujien; mu^te, gemu^t, + must, 135, 6 ; 108, 2; 307, 3; 471,3; (bu mu^t, er mup, mupte). 91. n, pronuTic. of, 17; nature of, 386, 387, final n in foreign words, 386, 1, Rem. ; short before sonant stops, 385, 4 ; n = q.y i. e., "• guttural " nasal, 386, and see nt, ncj; before labial, 388, 1; lost in Eng., 417, 1 ; entered the N. of nouns of the n-decl., 435,3; loss of, 435,3,4; 503 ; 506, 1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 490, 5. See -en. na&j, after, 303, 10; see 311 and gei^en, 9?a^6ar, m., -3, -n, + neighbor. 63, 1. nac^bem, corij., after, 330, 2 ; according as, 334. ^a*t, /., ^e,+night, 53, 2; 439, 1. nal)e+n ear, + nigh, 73. 92arr, m., M'., + fool. 5)Jatu^v /., w;.,+nature. nat^ft + next, 73 ; 303, 11. -nb, part.-suffix, 505. *nefor etne+a, 41, 1. ncben, by the side of, 306, 6 ; 557. nebfl, besides, together with, 303, 12; 555, 2. needs, 553, 1. ncl^men, na^m, genommen, take, IV., 137 ; 35unber — , 199, 1. 2 ; (bu ntmmft, nimm). -ne(n), verb-suf., 537, 1; 118, 1, 2. *nenfor einen + , 41, 1 nennen, 119, 1 ; 455 ; constr. with, 301 ; 390, 2; 396,8; 303, 4. -ncr, noun-suf., 503, 1; masc. gend., 161, 1. neu + new. ng, pronunc. of, 17, 383, 1, a ; 386, 1. nic^t, nid)t-3, + not, + naught, 99 ; 199, 1, 2 ; 309, 1 ; position of, 354 ; in compar. clauses, 333,2; 490, 3 ; after verbs of hindering, 309, 2. SPd6)iIi[f, gei»^Iiffcn, to sharpen by grinding, I., 122, 1 ; weak = to raze, fii^lei^en, \^\\% gef(^Iifien, wear off, + slit, I., 122, 1 ; (bu jdjleiyefl or jcMet^t). f^Uicien, f(i^Icff, gcj(^Ioffeu, to slip, II., 124, 2 ; (bu fc^Ieufft, f(J^Ieu_f very rare), jc^llcpen, fc^lo^, gefc^loffen, close, conclude, II., 124, 2 ; (bu j^lie|eft or jc^lie^t; f^leu^t etc., rare). id)Unben, see f^tingen. fd^Ungen, fdjlang, gefe^Iungen, to twine, + sling, devour. III., 125, 1. Scbtucf, m., -e, swallow ; pi., 51. fc^Iilpfen + slip < jdjUefen according to 535, 1, R. 2. (£(i^mac^, /., novl.^ disgrace, 490, 3, h. ^d)ma(^ten, to pine (,fd)inad)tete). fc^nieid}eln, flatter, 536, 2, Ex. fd^metBen, j(^m!i?, gcfd)mi»Kn, throw, + smite, 1., 122, 1 ; (tu fd^mei^cft or fd^mei^t). yc^mcl^^en, ji^melj, gefc^mclscn, +melt. Vni., 133; (bu jd^mtlsjl or jd)mil5t, ei* Ic^mitit, trans, is weak). (Sdjnicra, m., -eS, -en, pain, + smart, 63. jd;nauben, fd^no^, gefd^noben, snort, puff, + snuff, II., 124, 2, also weak; (Du fc^naubft). Sd)neeu)ittd)cn,-i- Snow-white (witt is L. G. for weiB). fd)neiben, (d^nttt, gcfd)n'ttcn, + cut, L, 122,1; 416, 462 ; (bu fd)noibo[t). f^nie&en, see j^naubcn. fd)nl(5en, carve, 535, 1, E. 2. ji^on, already, 339 ; position of, 354 ; form of, 5*54. fd)on, beautiful, 522. fi^rauben, ft^rob, gcf(!^rDben, + screw, II., 124, 2; (bu f(^ranbft) ; also weak. ^i^reden, \^xrcden, to be frightened, see crfd>rcden. S(^red(en), w., fright ; infl., 46, 4. fc^reiben, fj^rieb, gefc^rieben, write, I., 122, 2. fc^reien, fc^rie, gefdjrieeu, cry, + scream, 1., 122, 2. fd)vciten, S^xxii, gc?d)rittcn, to stride, walk, I., 122, 1 ; (bu fc^i-citeft, er fc^reitet). Su^ritt, m., -e§, -e, stride, step ; after numerals, 175. f(^roff, rugged, uncouth, 74. fd)iDeigen, ^(^ir*eg, gcfdranc^.-:, to be silent, L, 122,2 edjirein, n., -e, pig, + sow, + swine, 502,2. fd)icelten, fd)tDoII, gefAnjoUen, + swell, ■snil., 133; (bu ^dyicittil, fd)m!I). f(^njinben, f^wanb, ge^d^iuunben, disappear, III., 125, 1; (bu f(^mnbe)'t, jc^iranbe — fc^wiinbe). j(^tt)ingen, fd^wang, gefc^mungen, + swing, III., 125, 1 ; (idjiuiinge and j(^u>iinge). fd)tcinimen, jd^njamm, gef(^n)ommen, + 6wim, III., 125, 2 ; 464 ; (j^ironune and fc^icamme). fd^Mi^oren, f($»3ur and fdjtcor, gc^cfetroren, + swear, VI., 129 ; VOI., 132 ; 457, 1 ; (bu f(^irorft). ®e. < ecine, His, 311, 2. (See, m., -§, -en, lake ; /., w., + sea, 63. fcr)en, ^ai), ge^eben. + see,V., 128,1 ; instead of gc"cl;cn, 108, 1 ; +inf., 290, 3 ; 410, 3; 411, Ex; (bu fie^, fie^). ^ein, G. s. of ev, e§ : see feiner. fein, his, its, 85 ; not referring to subject, 242, 1 ; 243, 2 ; referring to indefinite subj., 98 ; seemingly for i^r in „ieincr 3ett,'^ 343, 2. fein, to be, 110 ; 473, l ; in comp. tenses, 266, 283,1-3; in passive, 273 ; +inf., 290, 3, a ; +past part, 296, 2 ; +pres. part., 2 74, 6. feiner, G. s. of er, e§, of him, of it, 81. fctt + since, mep.. 303, 14; + since, cc??/, 330,2. feitbem, see fett. fetten-o, on the part of, prep.^ 302. -feito, in comp. with poss. pron., 87, 552. -fet, noun-suf., 46, 1 ; 500, 1 ; mostly ncut. gend., 16, 13. fclb-, icibcr, + self , 91, 2; before numerals, 229, 1 ; 530 ; strengthens refl. pron., 237,2; use of, 249. felbanber, two of them, of us (according to the person of the verb), 229, 1. felbig-, same, 248, 2. felbfl, see feib- -feltg, adj.-suf., 528, 2, a. -fen + -se, verb-suf , 539, 1. fenben, fanbte, gefanbt, + send, 119, 1 ; 455, 1; pret. subj., fenbete. fenfen, fenftc, gefenft, trans., + sink, 535, 1, a. ©effel, m., -, (easy, large) chair, ©cu^e, /., w.., epidemic disease, 396. sh — f(^, 490, 1, d. shall + follcn, 266, 5 ; in ftit., 266, 6 ; 2 79, 3 ; 283, 4. \i&j, A. and D., sing, and pi. of refl. pron., him- and herself, themselves, 83; re- ciprocal pron., 84, each, one another ; supplants pers. pron., 237,1; 243,3, R.J position of, 353, e. fie, N. and A., fem. smg., and pi. of all gen- ders, + she, her, they, them, 81. ©ic, yon in address, 230, 2; 233. fied), infirm, + sickly, 396. fieben, fctt, gcfotrcn, boD, + seethe, 11., 124, 1 ; 416, 1 ; 463 ; (bu ficbcft) ; figur. weak. ©in-, in comp., 494, 3. fingen, fang, gefungen, + sing, m., 125, 1. finten, fanf, gcfunfen, + sink, m., 125, 1. ©inn nnb 95evftanb ~ all reason, lit. sense and reason. WORD-INDEX AND GERM AX-ENGLISH YOCABULARY. ^83 fmuen, fann, gcfonncn, meditate, in., 135, 2; (ffinue and fomie). fint+ since, prep., 303, 14. fintemal, because, 337, 1. figen, fajj, 9eiei7en,+sit, V., 1S8, 2; 457, 1; [bu fi^eft, er W, \Mt)\ -, ^ ^ ^ fo+so: in main clauses preceded by de- pend, claus., 329; 333; 330, 3, a; 348, 2; in consecutive clauses, 335; in compar. clauses, 333, 3; in conces- sive cl., 339; relative adv., 257; =iyeun, 340; +^1X1^ 350,2, ©o^n, m., -c, +son, 405. fDl(^ + snch, 91, 3 ; 443, 1 ; force of, 350; + ein, 91,3; 144; 157 ; 333,3. fofern, conj.^ +in so far as, 340, ©olba't, m.^ w., + soldier, foUen, joUte, geiottt, + shall, ought, 135, 5 ; 108, 2; 471, 2, 4; force of, 367, 5; 379, 3; 383,2,5. fonber, without, 304, 6 ; 489, 4. fonbern, but, 330, 2, R.; word-order after, 343, c. fonft, at other times, 330 ; 551, 3, fp, pronunc. of, 34; 378, 3; 389, 4; 391, 1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 413, 1. ©pa^, m.^ -c§, -e, joke, fun. fpapen, to joke, 118, 2; (fpa^eft, fpa^te). fpat, adv.^ late, 300, 1 ; 554. 1. ©paten, m., -, + spade. ©pa^, wj., w., also -e§, -c, + sparrow, fpajieren, walk about, with veibs of motion, 390, 2. fpa^en + spy, 494, 1. fpat, late, see also fpat. fpeieit, fpie, gejpieen, + spit, + spew, I., 133, 2. ©peife, /., w., food. fptnnen, ipann, gefponuen, + spin, in., 135, 2; (fpanne and fpornte). ©pion, m., -e, + spy, 494, 1. fplei^en, iptlil, geipUifeu, + split, I, 133, 1 ; (bu fplei^eft or fpleiiit, er jpletpt). ©peril, m., + spur, for infl. see 03, 1. fpred)cn, fprac^, gefprod^en, + speak, IV., 137 ; (ou fprt(^ft, fpric^ ; with A., to see, in § 60. fprtefjcn, fpro^, gefprof^en, + sprout, 11., 134, 1 ; (bu fptie^eft or fprte^t, er fprte^t ; old, fpreu^t, fpreu^). fpttngen, fprang, geforungen, + spring, run, ni., 135, 1 ; (fprange), ©pro^, m., -ffeg, -Re, + 8prout, scion, [t, pronunc. of, 34 ; 378,3; 389,4; 391, 1 ; Eng. correspondents of, 413. ~\i, super! . suffix, 73; 438, 1; in ordinals, 80 ; 530 ; in nouns, 513, 3. ©taat, m„ -e5, -en, + state, government, ©tad^el, m., -, sting, ©tabt, /., % city, 430, 1, a ; 490, 1, b. ©tamm, «z., -, + stem. ftarr, stiff, + staring, 74. flatt + instead of, 303, 1; 490, 1, b. ©tatt, /., no pl.^ place, 4- stead, see ©tabt. ©tatte, /., w,, spot, see above, ftec^cn, [tac^, gcfto(^en, siing, puncture, + stick, IV., 137; 457,2; 405,1; (bu Mm. m). [teden + to stick (not flaf, but weak), ftct)ea, ftaiib (ftunb), gc[tanben, + stand, 139; 136, 2; 457,2; 475 ; (bu fte^ft, [tet)e, ic^ [tunce or [tanbe). ftet;len, [ta^l, gcfto^ien, + steal, IV., 137; 398 ; 465 ; (Cu ftie^Ift, jnelyl or [tel;te, ftoi^le or ftaf^le). fteigen, jtteg, geftiegen, to ascend, mount, I., 133, 2. ©teiu, m.,-c, + stone. ©teimnc^, m., w., also strong, stone-cutter, fteinreicV + stony, very rich, 4:^3, 4. fterben, [tavb, geftovbcn, + to die, IV., 135, *3: ( + starve, [tirbi't, ftur&c, rarely ftarbe). ftieben, ftob, geftobcn, fly, scatter like d:;st, I., 134, 2 ; (bu ftiebit, older fteubft). ^ii^i, gender and meaning see 58. ftinfen, ftan!, geftunfen, + stink, HI., 135,1; (I'tanfe, rarely ftutife). ftoJ^, proud, 74. fto^en, ftiep, geflo^cn, push, thrust, VII., 131 ; 458, 2 ; (bu fto^t, er fto^t). flraff, stretched, tight, 74. ©traud}, 771., -e and — er, shnib. ftre(feu + stretch, in § 79 to die. [treii^en, ftvii^, geftrid^en, -i- strike out, + stroke, L, 133 1. ftreiten, ftvitt, geftrttten, contend, I., 133, 1 ; (bu ftrcitcft) • "strong," 438, 3. ©tiiBc, /., sitting-room ( + stove). ©tu^I, m., — e, chair, + stool, throne, flunb, pret. of fte:^en, q. v. -ftunb in comp., 531, 2. ©tute, mare, + stud, 430, 1. ftufeen, be startled, clip, < same root as flD^cn; see 535; bu [tu^eft, 118, 2. \vi^t\\ + seek, 454^ 3. ©utfet, /., w., passion, mania, 396 ; orig.^ lingering disease ; + sick. -fti(^ttg in comp., 538, 2, b. ©ftben, m., -i-, + south. ©ftnbflut, /., ^y., Deluge, 494, 3. \^, + sweet. I, pronunc. of, 33, 35- t, pronunc. of, 35 ; see t^ ; Eng. corre- spondents of, 408. 1 ; 413 : 413, 1 ; 414, 1; description of, 384, 1; in , 389, 3, 4 ; excrescent, 87 \ 89 ; 91, 2 ; 491,2; 513,2,3; stops mto spirantis before, 413 ; tv, 414, 1. -t, noun -suffix, 513 ; fem. gend,, 161, 2 ; 163,5, -t, in the participle of weak verbs, 453. A, 2. pers. sg. in pret^-pres, verbs, 470, 2. ^afel,/., «;., formal meal ; Get — , at + table. Stag, m., -c + day, taugen, to be fit, + do, 471, 5. Staufenb, w., -e,+ thousand, 336. tch, G. correspondents of, 414, 3. -te, suf. in ordinals, 80, 530. -te, in pret., 117; 454, 1. teil^, in part ; in comp. with poss. pron., 87. 284 WORD-IN^DEX AN^D GERMAN-EIfGLISH VOCABULABY. -tel, in comp., 533, 2. -ter, nonn-sufl, 508. teta, see t^at. Teutones, 493, 3. t^, pronunc. of, 35 ; origin of, 363, 3 ; 384, 1. t^at + did, 374,6; 390; 476,2. Silver, gend. and meaning, 163, 4 ; 408, 1. St^rane, tear, 430, 1. St^ron, m., -c and -€n, + throne, 63, 1. t^un, t^ot, 9et^an, + do, 136, 3; 454,1; 476; as an auxU., 394, 6; 394, 1; (tl^ate). SEBur, /., «r., + door, 408, 1 ; 430, 1. SEpr^cn, w., -, little door. SEier, w., -e, animal (deer). %\S^, m.y -e, table ( + disk, + dish). StDc^ter,/., ^,+dauo:hter, 46, 48, 408, 1. SEob, w., -eg, joZ. of, 173. toU, mad, + dull, 74. tragen, tvug, getragen, carry, VI., 139 ; (bu trcicift). SErant, w., -e, + drmk. trauen (with D.), to trust, treffen, trof, getroffen, hit, IV., 137; (bu triffft, triff). treiben, trieb, getrteben, + drive, I., 133, 2. treten, trot, getreten, + tread, step, V., 138, 1 ; (bu trittfl, er tritt, tritt or trcte). triefen, troff, getroffen, + to drip, drop, II., 134, 1 ; 463 ; (bu trietft, rarely treufi'!). triegen, see tvugen. trinfen, tranf, getrunfen, + drink, m., 135, 1 ; (trcinfe, older txunfe). trocEen + dry, 534, 4. SErcpfCen) m., - +drop, 46, 4. SErcpf, m., -e, fool, orig. "struck with paralysis.*' tro^, in defiance, in spite of, 303, 9. tro^en, to comfort, 535, 1, a ; (troftete). -trunfen, intoxicated, 538. SErtibfal, /., -e, sorrow. SErummcr, a pi., ruins, 59. trugen, trog, getrcgen, to cheat, 11., 134, 2 : 133 ; (bu triigft, older trciigft). %yx^, «., -€§, — er, cloth, shawl, 58, 85. -turn, + -dom, 57, 4 ; mostly neut. gend., 161, 8 ; origin of, 501 ; 515, 5. %, pronunc of, 389, 3 ; 414, 1 ; § — J, f, 535,1,5.2; see J. tt. u, pronunc. of, 36 ; description of, 368, 1, 2 ; < uo, 488, 4 ; u — c, 405 ; +nascUis and liquida sonans^ 459, 8, a. ue, as sign of umlaut, 363, 2. urn + SU, in order to, 391, 1, 4, R. ; 335, 1 ; 338, 1 ; 304, 7 ; in comp. verbs, 549, 4; +jo, 334. untrungen, suiTounded, see rtngen. un- 4- -un, accent, 433, 6 ; 516, 10. unb + and, 319; + inversion, 339, 1. -ung + -ing, 506, 2; gend., 161, 2. un§, D. and A. of wir, + us, to us, 81 ; also refl., 83 ; and reciprocal pron., 84. unfer, G. of luir, 81. unfer, poss. pron., + onr, 85. unirer, for unfer, 83. unter-, adj.^ lower, + under, 76, 2. unter, i>rep., + under, 306, 8, 10 ; in comp. verbs, 549, 5. Unterfd)icb, m., -e§, -e, difference, 458, 3. Untertl)an, m„ w., subject (of a ruler), 63, 1. Uv- + or-, 516, 9. Urol^ne, great grandmother in § 143. urbar, arable, 536, 1. iX, pronunc. of, 31 ; sign of umlaut, 363, 2 ; 368, 4 ; description of, 367 ; 368, 3, 4 ; < ue, 488, 4 ; u — i, 489, 2. uber + over, 306, 7: in comp. verbs, 549, 3. u'berfal)ten, to cross. aber^au'pt, in general, 433 ; 553, 3. », pronunc. of, 37; 380, 1, 2 ; see f; 415,1. SSater, m.. -, + father, 46, 48, 2 ; 411 ; 478.4. SSaterlanb, n., -€§, -e,+ fatherland. Ber- + for-, 516, 11 ; 545 ; in certain par- ticiples, 395, 2 ; 545, 5. perberben, serbarb, uerbcrben, to spoil (intr.), ni., 135,3; (bu »erbirb[t; verbirb, terbiirbe, rarely tcrbarbe). SSerbicnft, gend. and meaning, 163, 3. perbient, deserving, meritorious, 395, 2. perbrie^en, i-^erbro^, perbroffen, to vex, II., 134, 1 ; (bu t>erbrie^eft or »erbvic^t, old »erbreu§t). pergeffeu, werga^, tergefyen, + to forget, V., 138, 1 ; past part, in comp., 395, 2, a ; (bu pergifjeft or rergi^t, er tergipt, J>ergi^). ter^altni^m&|ig, comparatively, terfauren, to sell. Berlaffen, to forsake, see laffen. petlegen, embarrassed, past part., 395, 2, a; 534, 4. perrernen, to forget how to . . ., + unlearn, perlieren, perlor, pcrloren, + lose, 11., 134, 2; 416. ttermoge, by virtue of, 303, 11. »ertt»irren, to confuse, strong past part., uets n)Drren=compIicated, VIII., 133. SSetter, m., w. or mixed decl., cousin, 63, 1. 9Sie^, n., -c§, -e, cattle (+fee), 410, 3. »iet, much, compar. of, 76, 1 ; 100 ; 199, 1, 2; 363. vixen + >vuc()fin, 504. poll- + fuU, 74, 549, 6. PcHcr + full, 319, 1. PDHfonimcn, perfect, 431, 1. SScIf, n.y — er, people, + folk. 3SD'If§etpmDlogie^ + folk-etymology, 494, 2. pom < pon bcm, from the, 40. pon, from, by, 303, 15; compar. with bur(^, 369 ; 304, 2 ; 306, 7, i?. ; +felbft, of . . . self, 349, 2. Por + before, in point of, 306, 9 ; 516, 5 ; compar. with filr, 304, 3. porau'ywerfunbigcn, announce beforehand, 546, 2. Porbcr-, the front one, 76, 2 (short o). WOED-IKDEX AKD GEEMAN-EKGLISH YOCABULARY. 285 SSorfa^r, m.^ w., ancestor, wor'^afcenb, intended, 394, 1. SSormunb, m., -eS, "-er, guardian. XO, pronnnc. of, 38 ; description of, 379 ; 380, 2: loss of, 417, 2; Eng. corre- spondents of, 410, 3 ; 415, 2 ; 490. 6. wadjfen, \v\x^^, geroad.})en, grow, + wax, VI., 139 ; 417, 5, a ; (bu, cr load^ft). SBagcn, m.,+ wagon, + wain, 494,1; 48,2. SBaggo'n, m., pi. in -§, car, 494, 1. wain + 2Bagen, 494,1. voai)X, true, 74. SBa^r^eit, /., w., truth. SSalb, m., -e§, -er, forest, +wold. icatten, rule (roaltete). tcanbein, walk, change, 118, 3. wanbern + wander, 118, 3. wonn+when ; for relat. pron., 358 ; cwy., 330, 1; etym., 551,2. war, pret. of fein, q. v. ; also wesan. warb, pret. sing, of racroen. 111, 2 j 460. ttarum + why, + wherefore, 351, 4 ; 551, 2. tt>a§, interrog. pron., 93 ; 444 ; use of, 351; + G., 351, 1; preceded by p., tnit, 351, 3 ; with fiir and etn, 144, 353; force of luarum, 351, 4; relat. pron., 93 ; 356 ; 356, 2 ; indef. pron., 96; 304; 360. tt)a§, archaic of wesan^ 466, 1. wafc^en, luufd), geiuajj^en, + wash, VI., 139 ; 413 ; (bu njaf(^e[t or waf<^t). SBaffer, /i., -, + water, 414, 1, Ex. ttjigen, see wiegen. wafrenb, during, 303, 11; conj., 330, 1. -wdrto, + -ward, 553, 2. "weak," 438,3. weben, moh, gen)D6ett, + weave, VIII., 133 ; (bu webft) ; weak = to move. weber — no^ + neither — nor ; + whether, 444, 3 ; in compar. clauses, 333, Ex. -njegen, on account of, in comp. with pron., 87, 89 ; prepos., 303, 13. tt)e^ t:^un + D., to pain, see if)mx. SBei6, n., -c§, -cr, + woman, + wife, 166. weic&, soft ( + weak). tt3Ct(^en, miX), geanc^cn, to yield, I., 133, 1 ; weak = to soften. 2]3ei^nacf)teu, Christmas, 439, 1. weit, because, 337; + while, 330, 1. -weife, -wise, 553, 3. weifen, wteS, gciuiefen, show, I., 133, 2. ttei^fagen, prophecy, 547, 3 ; (p. p. gemeiSs wet^, see wtffen. aeld^, interrog. pron., 93, 2 ; 444, 2 ; with ein, 144; 353; relat. pron., 93, 2; 355, 356; indef. pron., 96, 360; etym., 415, 2. njeiti, D. of tuer, q. v. ; 93, 1. wenben, wanbte, gewanbt, turn ( + wend), 119, 1 ; 397 ; 453 ; (bu wenbeft, pret. subj. ttjenbete). jrenig, Uttle, few ; comparison regular or as m 76, 1. wenn, conj., + when, = if in temporal cl., 330, 1 ; = if in concessive cl., 339 ; = if in condit. cl., 340 ; etym.^ 551, 2. wer + who, interrog. pron., 93 ; 351 ; 410, 3; 444; relat. pron., 93, 3; 354; 356; indef. pron., 96; 354; 360; 339. werben, tcarB, geworben, recruit, sue for, in., 135, 3 ; (bu \axxl% mxh, wiirbe or vabxm), werben, warb or wurbe, gcworben, become ( + worth). III., 135, 3; infl. of, 110; 111, 2; 460, 1; in passive, 373 ; in comp. tenses, 383, 2-5 ; + gu, 303,16; (bu wirft, er vcirb, njerbe, iriirbe). werfen, trarf, geworfen, throw. III., 135, 3 ; (bu wirtft, »irf, wxlrfe or xo^x\^). SSerf, 72,., -e§, -e, + work, 60. nje§, tceffen, rce^, 93, 1 ; 356, 4. toefen, wesan, V., 138, 5 ; 411 ; 466. ireg^atb, wherefore, 93, 1. weffent-, in comp., 93, 1. SBi^t, W2., -e, + wight, + whit, iriber, against, 304, 8; in comp. verbs, 549, 7. wibmen, dedicate (wibmete), 118, 2. m^, +how, as, 444, 1 ; in tempor. clauses, 330, 1, 2 ; in compar. cl., 333 ; after comparative, 333, 2. trieber, a(^?;.,again, in comp. verbs, 549,8. iriegen, lucg, geiDDgen, + weigh, VIII., 133; (also irdgen, bu tciegft). icilb + wild. wtU, see iroHen ; 367, 6. willen, for the sake of, in comp. with pron., 87, 89 ; prepos., 303, 14. irinben, tcanb, gei»unben, + wind, III., 135, 1 ; (bu tt)inbeft). ttJtffen, tou^te, getcup, for infl. see 135, 1 ; 413, 2 ; 471, 1 ; 473, 1 ; compar. with fennen, fonnen, 367, 1. with+t»iber; 306,8. SGBittum, fi., -e, jointure, allowance, 501. n)D(r) + where, supplants cases of interrog., and relat. pron., 351, 2 ; 358 ; in local clauses, 331 ; in tempor. cl., 330, 1 ; in condit. cl., 340, 340, 4 ; origm of, 551,2. irofern, coTij., in so far as, 336; 340; 340, 2. WD^t + well, pronunc. of, 381; 339; 489, 1; position of, 354; 399, 2, a. njoMgeboren, (Your) Honor, lit. + well bom. WDUen, wottte, gerooUt, + will, be willing, for infl. see 135, 7, and 108, 2 ; 473, 2; special force of, 367, 6; 379, 3; 383, 5. Womogtic^, if possible, 340, 4. tcorben, past part, of toerben, 108, 5. 2Bort, w., -e and -er, +word, 58. SBunber, n., -, + wonder, see ne^^mcn. wurbe, pret. of irerben. 111, 2. SBurm, m., -cr, and -e, +worm. iDU^te, see wifjcn. SSiirbe, /., w., dignity, + worth. 286 WOHD-I^sTDEX AJS^D GERMAN-EKGLISH VOCABULARY. ^, pronraic. of, 29 ; 389, 2 ; 417, 5, a ; Engl. X as symbol, 395. X), pronunc. of, 31. 3, pronunc. of, 30 ; 389, 3, 4 ; Eng. corre- spondents of, 409, 1 ; 414, 1 ; 490, 2 ; 535, l,i?. 2. 5a:^m + tame, 74, 398. 2a^n, m., -e, + tooth, 409, 1 ; 417, 1. 3art, tender, 74. gasmen + to tame, 535, 1, a, Q'aljxe, /., w., + tear, 430, 1. ge^n + ten, 77, 539. 3eid)en, n.^ -, + token. jeic^ncn, draw, delineate, 118, 1. jeiljen, jicf), gejie^en, accuse, L, 132, 2; 395; 463. -3en, verb-guf., 539, 3. ger- + dis-, verb-pref., 546. 5eu'ci^en, to tear to pieces, see rei^en. 3euge, m.^ w.^ witness. jie^en, jog, gcjogen, draw, II., 134, 2 ; 416; (bu geucJjft, jeud) are archaic). -jig + -tyin numerals, 539, 1. jtttern, tremble, eiym., 457, 3. ju + to, 303, 16; before inf., 391; before adj., 391, 4 ; 333, 3 ; see gegen and 3uber, tub, etym.^ 398. 3uc!er, m., no j??;., + sugar. jufolge, in accordance with, 303, 15. gum < 5U betn + to the, 40. 3unft, /., -e, guild, 398. ^utigc, /., w., + tongue, 414, 1, Ex. 5ur< ^u ber + to the,/(gm., 40. §urii'clbringen + bring back, see tringen. jufammcn, together. jirav, to be sure, 339 ; 555, 3 ; position of, 354. jireen + twain, + two, 79; 539. Awet + two; infl. of, 78; form and gend. of, 79 ; 539. 3WeIt + twelve, 77 ; 539 ; 489, 1. 3n?ie-+ two- 530,1. 5n)ier + twice, 531, 2. jwingen, jtrang, gejiuungen, to force, III., 135,1. Att)ifc^en+ between, 306, 10; compar. with unter, 306, 8; 305, 1,2. gnjD + two, /em., 79; 539. z, Grimm's sign for the sound between z and 6, 414 ; > s, 490, 2. THE STUDENT'S Manual of Exercises FOR TRANSLATING INTO GERMAN WITH FULL VOCABULARY, NOTES, REFERENCES, AND GENERAL SUGGESTIONS Prepared and Arranged to Accompany BRANDT'S GERMAN GRAMMAR BY A. LODEMAN, A.M. PROFESSOR OF GERMAN AND FRENCH IN THE MICHIGAN STATE NORMAL SCHOOL Boston ALLYN AND BACON 1888 Copyright, 1885, by G. P. Putnam's Sons. REMAEKS AND EXPLANATIONS. The following Exercises have been prepared with the twofold purpose of furnishing to the student material for translating into German, and of assisting him in the analysis and translation of the more difficult illustrations in Brandfs German Grammar, That examples from the German classics are the proper kind of illustrations for a text-book of such high order and merit as Professor Brandt's, cannot be doubted. Had the author illustrated his rules by means of sentences especially adapted to the understanding of the young student, the latter, upon completing the course in grammar, would not be well prepared to read and enjoy the works of the great German authors. If the examples found in Brandt's Grammar, in some instances, force the student to greater application, he will feel amply repaid for his extra labor when he takes up the study of the masterpieces of German literature. At all events, the present Exercises will, it is hoped, enable even the beginner to derive the full benefit from the large number of excellent illustrations drawn from the acknowledged masters of German style and embodied in Brandt's Grammar. Should he find any difficulty in translating any one of them. 4 REMARKS AND EXPLANATIONS. he has only to refer, by means of the table given below, to the corresponding English Exercise, and he will find that one or more of the English sentences will greatly aid him in the understanding of the German example. The Grammar referred to throughout the book (including the Vocabulary) is BrancWs Grammar of the German Lan- guage, Paragraphs to be read over merely are put in ( ). In the Exercises, words in [ ] should not be translated, while those in ( ) are required by the German idiom. The cognate mark ( + ) is put, as a rule, only where even the beginner can recognize the common origin of English and German words after having had his attention called to it. When the German word is preceded by the article, the + is placed before the latter. Figures at the end of sentences refer to those sections in the Grammar in which more or less of the material required, for the German sentence may be found. The Vocabulary contains all words not explained in the notes, except such grammatical words (pronouns, prepositions, 3tc. ) as are easily found in the very paragraphs to which the student is referred for each exercise. The notes under the first twenty exercises are so full as to do away with the use of the Vocabulary. TABLE SHOWING IN WHICH EXERCISES ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE VARIOUS PARAGRAPHS OF THE GRAMMAR MAY BE FOUND. Para. Ex, Page Para. Ex. Page Para. Ex. Page 38 1 7 110 5 9 226-29 .. 17 . 33 39 1 . 60 tt . 31 . 45 230 18 . 34 40 2 . 61 111 . 5 . 63 «( 7 . 11 41 1 . 60 112 . 3 . 8 231-32 .. 7 . 65 42 1 7 113 6 . 64 233-34 .. 18 . 34 43 . 2 . 7 114 4 . 9 235-36 .. 19 . 35 44-5 1 7 (( . 5 . 10 237^1 .. 20 . 36 46 . 2 7 115 . 2 . 22 242-43 .. 7 . 65 48 1 .. 9 116 . 4 . 9 244-18 .. 21 .. 36 49-50 . . 3 . 8 " 6 . 11 <( 8 .. 65 51 1 .. 60 117 2 ' .. 7 249-54 .. 22 .. 37 52-3 4 9 118 7 . 65 (( 8 .. 65 56-8 . 5 . 10 119 . 6 . 11 255-63 !. 23 .. 38 59-60 1 .. 60 120-3 . 18 .. 19 " 8 .. 65 61-2 . 6 . 11 124-8 . 19 .. 20 264-66 . 24 .. 39 63-4 7 . 11 129-33 . 20 .. 20 267 25 .. 39 65 . 8 .. 12 134 . 11 .. 15 " 26 .. 40 QQ 1 . 60 135 . 11 .. 15 268-73 ".. 27 .. 41 67 . 8 . 12 (( . 12 .. 15 274:-15 . 38 .. 42 68 1 .. 60 " . 13 .. 16 276-79 . 29 .. 43 69-72 9 .. 13 (( . 14 .. 16 280-83 . cO .. 44 73-5 . 10 .. 14 136 . 15 .. 17 284-85 . 31 .. 45 76 . 11 .. 15 137 . 16 .. 18 286-90 . 32 .. 46 77-8 . 12 .. 15 (( 3 .. 61 291-93 . 33 .. 47 79 . 17 .. 33 138 . 14 .. lf> 294-300 . 34 .. 47 80-2 . 13 .. 16 139-46 1 .. 21 301-3 35 .. 48 83-5 . 14 .. 16 147-50 . 2 7 304 36 .. 49 86-7 . 7 .. 65 151-58 . 3 .. 23 305-7 . 37 .. 50 88 . 15 .. 17 159-63 . 4 .. 24 308-17 . 1 .. 51 89 7 .. 65 164-69 5 .. 24 318-22 . 2 .. 52 90-1 . 15 .. 17 170-77 .. 6 .. 25 323-28 . . 3 .. 52 92-3 . 16 .. 18 178-79 .. 7 .. 26 329-32 . 4 .. 53 94-100 . 17 .. 18 180-83 8 .. 27 333-35 . 5 .. 54 101-2 . 2 .. 7 184-88 .. 9 .. 27 336-40 . 6 .. 55 (( . 3 .. 8 189 .. 10 .. 28 341 16 .. 18 {{ . 5 .. 10 190 .. 10 .. 28 (( 16 .. 32 103 1 .. 7 (( 3 .. 61 u 7 .. 56 ** .. 2 .. 7 191-97 .. 11 .. 29 342-43 .' 16 .. 32 (( .. 5 .. 10 198 .. 11 .. 29 kfr 7 .. 56 " .. 31 .. 45 (( .. 3 .. 61 344 . 16 .. 32 104-5 7 .. 11 199-202 .. 11 .. 29 (( 8 .. 57 106-7 8 .. 12 203-9 .. 12 .. 29 345-49 . 8 .. 57 108 .. 8 .. 12 210-12 .. 13 .. 30 350 . 3 .. 8 '» .. 10 .. 14 213-17 .. 14 .. 31 4( 5 .. 10 109 .. 3 8 218-21 .. 15 .. 32 '* 9 .. 57 110 1 .. 7 222 .. 16 .. 32 (( . 3 .. 61 (( .. 2 .. 7 (( .. 10 .. 14 351-53 .' . 9 .. 57 u .. 4 9 223-25 .. 16 .. 32 354-59 . . 10 .. 58 ABBEEVIATIONS. acc. = accusative. part. = participle. adj. = adjective. perf. = perfect tense. aux. = auxiliary verb. pers. = personal. B. T. = Bayard Taylor. plup. = pluperfect tense. conj. = conjunction. plur. = plural. dat. = dative. poet. = poetical. def. art. = definite article. p.p. = past participle. Ex. = Exercise. prep. = preposition. F. = Faust, Hart's Edition. pret. = preterite. f. and ff. = following. pron. = pronoun. gen. = genitive. pr. pts. = principal parts. Ha. = James Morgan Hart. sep. = separable. imp. = impersonal. str. = strong verb or noun. indef. art = indefinite article. subj. = subjunctive. inf. := infinitive. subord. = subordinating. insep. = inseparable. trans. = transitive. intrans. = intransitive. V. tr. = transitive verb. irr. = irregular. w. = with. lit. = literally. wk. V. = weak verb. * n. = noun. + = of common origin with, nom. — nominative. or cognate. I., II. . . . denote classes of strong nouns or verbs. In the Vck:!Abulary separable and strong verbs are marked i str, respectively ; inseparable and weak verbs are not marked. 9. and FIEST SEEIES. Exercise I. 38, 42, 44, 45 — 103, 110, Present Indicative of loBen, ^altn^ fein — {The first sentence of each of the following para- graphs : 178, 180, 189, 198). 1. The father praises the son. 2. The brother has a house. 3. The bath is in the house. 4. The strength of the sons is great. 5. Have you a trade ? 6. The angels perform miracles. 7. The days are short. 8. Is the thread long or short ? 9. Where is the gardener's spade ? 10. The gardener has the spade. Remark.— Most of the nouns in these Exercises will be easily found in the §§ above referred to. 1. Father + ber ^odtx. To praise, loBen* Son + ber ©o^n; ace. ben ©o|n. 2. Brother ■^-'iitx SBruber. Tohme + ^^^tn. House + ba^ ^au^; gen. -e^, dat. -e, acc.=:nom. 3. Bath + ^a^ Bab. To he, fein. In, in (prep, here w. dat.). 4. Strength, bie ^raft. Of the sons, ber ©o^ne. Great + grog. 5. Trade, ba^ ©ewerbe. 6. Angel +^tx ©ngeU Toperform=do + t|un (3d pers. plur. the same). Miracle, ba^ 2Bunber. 7. Bay + ber Slag. Short, furj. 8. Thread, htx ^ahtn. Long + lan^* Or + ober. 9. Where? roo^. Gardener + ber ©artner. Spade + ber ©paten. 10. Sentences 9 and 10 suggest an easy method of introducing conversation in connection with these Exercises. Exercise II. 43, 46 — 103, 110, Preterite Indicative of loBeit, l!:jCiltn, fein — (117—275, 2, 101, 102). 1. The grain was on the floor. 2. The daughter loved the father more than the mother. 3. The little child was 8 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [I. Series. playing with the little dog. 4. The knight presented a set of jewelry to the daughter. 5, On the rock [there] was a well. 6. I had a thought. 7. The floor rests on the beams. 8. The father and the brother-in-law rested in peace. 1. Grain, \>(X^ ©etreibe. On, auf (prep, here w. dat.). Floor, ber Soben. 2. Daughter + bte 2:od)tcr. To love + Uekn (inflected like lob en). More + mc^r, TMn, al^. Mother + bie 9Kutter. 3. Little child, ba^ ^inbc^en. To play, fpielen (inflected like loben). The German has but one form for the English simple, emphatic, and progressive forms ; hence, was playing = fpielte. Little dog, ba^ ^itnbc^cn. With, mtt (prep. w. dat.). 4. Knight^ ber IRitter. To present, fc^enfen (inflected like loben). Set of jewelry, ba^ ®e»* f^meibe. 5. Rock, ber %t\\txi* Well, n., ber 33rmmen. 6. Thought, n., + ber ©ebanfe. 7. To rest, ru§en (inflected like loben). Beam, ber S3alfe. 8. Brother 4n-laiJ0, ber (Sc^maaer. Peace^ ber ^riebe* Exercise III, 49, 50—101, 102—109, 112--265, 1—350. Remaek.— It is not intended that the rules on the Declension of Nouns, as pre- sented in the Grammar, should be committed to memory. The student, by carefully perusing them, in connection with the written exercises, will learn to observe closely the various forms ; and, in the future, he should learn, as far as possible, the Nam. SiJig., Gen. Sing., and Nbm. Plur. of each noun, as all the other cases can be given when these are known. 1. The dog has caught a badger. 2. My friend has seen two hawks. 3. The youth has been in (the) prison. 4. We have made many attempts. 5. A year has twelve months, a month has thirty days. 6. What have you heard ? 7. I have not heard a sound. 8. The kings on the thrones are not free from tribulations. 9. (The) salmons are larger than (the) herrings. 10. The smith can carry the anvil with one hand. 1. Dog, ber ^unb. To catch, fangeit, str. v. (pr. pts., fanciett, fteng, gefangen). Badger, ber 2)a(^^. 2. My + metn (declined like the indefinite article eln, see 38) Friend -f ber greunb. To see + fe^en, str. v. (pr. pts., fe^en, I. Series. ] GERMA2!f EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 9 fa^, gefcl^en). Two + %xoiu Hawk + ber ^aMc^t. 3. Youth (young man) + ber Sitngling. To he, fein, ivar, gemefen* The compound tenses of [ein are formed with [eittf not with l^akn ; hence, I have been = tc^ Mn getDcfen (see 266, 3). Prison, \>0i^ ©efangnif — in bem may be contracted into tm (see 40). 4. To Tnake + ntac^en* mac^te, gemad^t* Many, »tete. Attempt, ber S3crfuc^» 5. Tisar + ba^ Sal^r* r^re/'oe + jmolf, if(9?i^^ + ber ^onat. Thirty + brct^ig. Da^ + ber %^, ba^ 5)?abd^en (46, 1) ; notice that in German all diminutives are of the neut&r gender, no matter what they signify (161, 3). To wear, tragen, trug, (^etragen. Shawl, ba^ %u^. RibUn, ba^ ^anb. 7. Tie, \)(i^ 33anb. Blood + ba^ «8Iut, gen. -e^. Strong, flarf. 8. i^i^ic + ber f^ud)^, gen. -es3, plur. i^u^fe. To live + leben/ lebte, gelebt. Forest, ber SBalb. 9. Scholar ^+ ber Sd^iiler (46, 1). 2(9 ^nY^, [ci^reikn, fc^rteb, gefc^rieben. PencU, ber S3leifltft (ba^ 33Iei, lead ; ber 8ttft, " small pointed object " ; see 164). With, ntit (w. dat.). 10. To fm^get + ijergeffen, yerga^f ^ergeffen. 11. To find + ftnben, fanb, gefunben (inflected like fingeHf fang, gefungen; see, however, 104, 118, 121 first sentence). Shrub, ber r«ma + ba^ ^rama, 8. Ca?^ (see 135, 3). i^^;^(^ (see Ex. v., 11). Mineral + ba^ SJ^inera'L 9. To ^e^^, fagen, fagte, gefagt. if(g + mtr (dat. of i^). Case + berSafu^. Singular + ber ©tngular (gen. -^). Plural + ber plural (gen. -^). 10. Insect + ba^ Snfe^ct. Its, here feinen, /S^w^, ber etad^el. Exercise VIII. 65, 67—106, 107, 108, 3. 1. The Prussians have a king, the Americans a president. 2. Many Englishmen wander through Switzerland. 3. The students have sung a song on the Ehine. 4. Alsace used to belong to France. 5. The palace of (the) emperor Charles stood in Aix-la-Chapelle. 6. The generals of the great Frederic were heroes. 7. Anna's sister has leffc England. 8. The Fichtel-mountains are covered with snow. 9. The pupils have read of the two Marys. 10. Goethe's works are instructive. 1. Prussian + ber ^reufe. American + ber Slmerifa'ner, President + ber ^rcijibe'nt (62, 3). 2. Many (see Ex. III., 4). Englishman + ber Snglanber. To wander + njanbern, tt)anberte, gewanbcrt. Through + burc^ (w. ace). Switzerland + bie (Scfiweij (see 147, 2). 3. Student (see Ex. VI., 2). C (see Ex. VI., 3). Song, ba^ IHeb. On, auf (here w. dat.). Rhine + I. Series.] GERMAN" EXERCISES 1^ GRAMMAR. 13 ber fH^dn — (^Tn bent 9f?^ettt would mean on the bank of the Rh.). 4. Alsace + ba^ (£lfa^. To helong to, ge^oren ju (w. dat.) ; used to belong, here to be rendered by tbe (present) perfect of ge^oreit* France + i^ranfreic^* 5. Palace + ber ^oXcL'\t* Emperor, ber ^aifer* Charles + Raxh To stand + fle^en, jlanb, gej^anben* Aix-la-Chapelle + 5lad)en. 6. Oeneral + ber ®enera'L Of the great Frederic (see 65, 3, last example). Hero (see Ex. VI., 9). 7. Anna + ^nna* Sister + WB6^xoi^tx. To leave, i)erlaffen, ijerlieg, ijerlaffcn. England + (£nglanb, 8. Fichtel-mountains, ^o,^ i^tc^telgeMrge* I^o c, e^, e. Write, fc^rcibcn, str. v. (122, 2). Me + mtr 14 GEIlMA]!f EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [I. Series. (dat. of id)). Often + oft. 3. Gold + fait. Water + ba^ 2Baffer, ^, - Wholesome y gefunb. 4. To^mg + iung. Pr =bad, fc^Ied)t. Pencil (see Ex. v., 9). Bear in mind 350. 7. Red + rot. Cherry + bie ^trl'd)c. 7iwj«, ^v&\^* Fruit + bie ^5ru(^t, -, -c. 8. City, bie ©tabt, -, -e. On + an, here w. dat. To live + leben^ wk. v. Pretty, Mbfd^, fc^on. Oirl, ba^ 9)?db^ (^en, ^, -. 9. O^cZ + alt. Note that two or more adjectives, limiting one noun, follow the same declension. To lose + 'OixXmiU, str. v. (124, 2). HiSy [ein (declined like ein). Only, adj., + einjig. Son + ber (Sot)n, e^, -e. 10. Late = deceased, sjcrjlorkn. President (see Ex. VIII., 1). Nohle, ebel. Exercise X. 73, (74), 75—108, 1.— 222 {five lines). 1. Henry is younger than Edward. 2. I have bidden the elder brother go. 3. The well has the clearest water. 4. He has sent for the finest dress. 5. We have never had (a) greater fun. 6. The flower is lovely. 7. This tree is the highest. 8. Is the doctor richer than the merchant ? 9. I have heard it said. 10. The straight way is the shortest. 11. Mary has the sweetest voice of the three sisters. 12. We shall come next week. 1. Henry ■¥ ^tm'x^* Young -{- lyxno^^ Than,aU* Edward + (Ehmxh. 2. To bid, ^ei^en, ^ie§, ge^ei^en. G^^^ + ge^en, gieng, gegangen. O^^ + alt. 3. Well, n. (see Ex. II. , 5). Clear + Har. Water + ba^ SBaffer, ^, -. 4. To send for =let {or cause to) come, !ommen laffen. Fine, fc^on. Dress, n., ba^ ^leib, e^, er. 5. Never + nie. Had {p. p.),9e^aM. Great + grop. Fun, ber 8pa§, e^, ©paffe. 6. Flower, bie 33Iume, -, n. Lovely, aGerliebfl. 7. Tree (see Ex. IV., 3). High + ^o^. 8. i)oc^a^ ©efdngniff \\t^, ffe. To, here \xC^ (contracted from in ba^). No matter, etc. (see 93, 4). Exercise XVII. 94 to 100. 1. The one is going, the other is coming. 2. Some ladies are dancing in the other room. 3. Nobody is born (as) a master. 4. Everybody ought to know what is best for him. 5. Have you seen anybody in the garden ? 6. People say that you are studying too much. 7. They do not believe him. 8. It is better to do something than nothing at all. 9. Thou 1. SiSBiEs.] GEKMAiq" EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 19 must have a little patience. 10. There were many stones and little bread. 11. All Germany lay in shame and woe. 12. The whole of Germany shall be our fatherland. 1. See Ex. II., 3. 2. Lady, tie ^ame, -, n. To dance + tanjett, wk. v. Room, ba^ Btmmer, ^, -. 3. To he horn + geboren t»erben (see 95). 4. Ought to TcnoWy foUte njiffen. For + fur (w. ace). Best + am beften. 5. Anyhody, iemanb. Garden + ber ©arten, ^, -. 6. People say = one says, man fagt. T7iat, conj., ba^ (bear in n)ind 344). To study + jlubi'eren, wk. V. (see 108, 4). 7. They = one, man (see 98). 8. Somethingy etroas^* Nothing at all, gar nic^t<3. 9. Patience, bie ©ebulb. 10. There were, t^ gab, or, in the inverted order, gab i^f and with elision, gab''<3 (see 100). Stone + ber ie, or ta5) belonging to it. The rules in the Grammar (169, fF.)i however, will be of great service ; some in a practical way ie,g., 159, 161, 3, 164), and others, because they will help the student in getting an insight into the "genius of the language." Wherever a large number of examples are given, as in these paragraphs, it will hardly repay the beginner to learn the meanings of all of them ; the nouns under 160 might be mentioned, with their meanings, by the teacher, letting the pupil state the gender ; while the gender of those under 161 may be determined by their form alone, without reference to their meaning. 1, (The) Queen Louisa was a noble woman. 2. The Danube, the Oder, the Elbe, the Weser, and the Ehine are the largest rivers of Germany. 3. Many prefer beautiful Spain to colder France. 4. The little boy lies in the cradle. 5. Thou art a heathen. 6. The witches were dancing on the heath. 7. The workman has placed his earnings in the bank. 8. The merit of the minister is great. 9. The boy has again lost his knife. 10. Bring me the third volume of Bancroft's history. 11. Is not this blue ribbon too dark ? 12. The knighfc has a shield, the merchant a sign-board. 13. What a fool you are ! 14. In the gate [there] is a small door. 15. The marble of Carrara is white. 16. "Bands of robbers move about. ^' 3. Prefer, ^te^en — vor (see 137 ; 350). 4. Little lay, \ia^ iTnabletn (lei, 3). 5. Heathen, see 162, 3 (435, 3), where also some of the nouns in the following sentences are to be found. 7. Placed, here gebrac^t. Earnings, p. 59. In, here auf, w. ace. 13. What a, see 92, 2, 3. For word-order, see 3. sentence. Exercise V. Syntax of the Gender continued — 164 to 169. 1. Humility and geatleness are Christian virtues ; yet pride is also found even among Christians. 2. On Wednesday the city was illuminated. 3. What is your answer? 4. The girl II. Series.] GERMAK EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 25 has taken leave ; all trace of her is lost. 5. Hermann has chosen the exiled maiden (166). 6. The angel said to Mary: Blessed [art] thou among women (166). 7. The young lady, as a guest, was treated with especial esteem. 8. Mary Stuart said to Elizabeth: I am your hing ; and the Hungarian nobility exclaimed : We will die for our king, Maria Theresa ! 9. They step forward, a lady here, a gentleman there ; they wish to dance. 10. All are running, saving, rescuing (168). 11. '^Then may delight and distress, and worry and success, alternately follow, as best they can.'' 12. He spoke while leaving the room. 13. The bishop was preaching ; all list- ened in silence, each returning to his own thoughts. 14. The fair one descended from her stately castle. 1 5, Bismarck has accomplished great things for Germany. 1. Is also found, translate : one finds also, using the inverted order (after bennod)). Among, here I)ei. 2. On Wednesday, am SiJiittJDod^* The adverbial phrase introducing the sentence, the inverted order is required (343, d) 4. AU trace of her, translate : her trace. 6. Blessed, gekne^ beiet; the k-, in the obsolete verb benebeien, to Uess, is of course no prefix, but the first syllable of the Latin 5e?ie (benedicere) ; hence the prefix ge- in the p. p. (see 168). 7. Touiig lady, ba^ junge 2Kabd)en (see 167). 8. Mary, as a historical name, 9)Zari'a; in other cases usually SJJari'e. 9. 8tep forward may be rendered by ^crijorfommen (see 168 ; 137). 11. B. T.'s version of F., 1756-8 (see 168). To follow alternately, ntU ein^ anber wec^feln (lit. to exchange with each other). 12. While leaving=wh.i\e (tnbem) he left. Bear in mind that inbent introduces a dependent clause (341, 3, and 344). 12 and 13. See 168, last sentence. In silence, fttIl-= fd^tvetgenb. Uac7i returning = while each returned. To his own thoughts = into himself. 14. The words ^olbe ©(^one (gracious fair one) in 169 are perhaps best rendered hj fair one alone. 15. Great things, ®roge^ (169). Exercise VI. Syntax of Singular and Plural — 170 to 177. 1. We are reading the history of Germany under the Henrys and Ottos. 2. Will your grace be present at the 26 GERMAIN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [n. Series. representation of " Wallenstein ^' ? 3. Most of the gentry were in the country. 4. Here is a list of the conflagrations and deaths during the week. 5. We have our vacation about Easter. 6. Nearly three hundred thousand men were besieg- ing tbe city .(175). 7. His father is bent with old age ; he is over ninety years old. 8. Germany lies between the forty- seventh and fifty-fifth degrees, north latitude. 9. The third and fourth verses are usually omitted. 10. Why do these pupils hold their hands before their mouths? 11. Three hundred miners have lost their lives. 12. All raised their hands. 1. Under + wnter, here w. dat. ©te |)etnrt(^e, Me Dttonen. 2. Your grace, (Euer ®naben, usually abbreviated into (Sw. ®naben. To he 'present at, beiwo^nen (sep. comp.), w. dat. In regard to tbe number of the verb, see 311, 2. 3. In the country, auf bem I' ante (as opposed to in the city). 7. Bent with old age, ijor '^Iter o^iHdi (175, 353). 8. Between, jn)ifc|en, here w. dat. (see 177). 9. See 177. Are omitted, translate are not sung (njerben, etc.). 10. Do — hold = hold (see I. Series, Ex. II.. 3). See 177, 343, a. Exercise VII. Syntax of the Cases, Nominative— -11%, 179, 270. 1. The ages of the past are to us a book [closed] with seven seals. 2. To stroll with you, (Sir) Doctor, is honor and profit [uuto me]. 3. The decrees of Heaven are the best for man. 4. Henry will become [a] soldier. 5. Everybody imagines himself to be a wise man ; but this fancy does not make one wise. 6. I come as [a] messenger of the court. 7. Which prince is called the '' silent" ? And which the ** conqueror" ? 8. He is looked upon as a good-for-nothing fellow. 9. I dare not call myself a favorite of Fortune. 10. It is better to be called a thief than to be one. 1 and 2. See 178. 3-6. See 179, 1. 3. For man, fiir ben 3)?enf{i^cn. 4. / shall become, \^ tuerbe tverben. IwiU become, t(^ will wcrben. 5. Wise 11. SERras.] GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. 27 marly to be rendered by the adjective used substantively. Translate : does not make one wise = makes not the wise [man] (162, 3). 7. I7ie " silent" ber ©(^ttjeiger (see 179, 2). 9 and 10. To call, in a bad sense, may be ren- dered by fc^elten, str. III., 3. To be one, einer ju fein. Exercise VIII. Syntax of the Cases continued, Genitive — 180 to 183. 1. The love of God surpasses all understanding. 2. The poets speak frequently of the invisible hand of Fate. 3. Leasing admired the taste of the ancient artists. 4. You are a dead man ! 5. Humboldt found that a certain height of the water was of the same age as certain rude monuments of human industry. 6. The maiden offered them the best of all gifts, the most beautiful of all flowers. 7. Five [members] of the order had fallen the victims of their teraerity. 8. Three Prussians fought their way through a hundred of the enemy. 9. I will show you something beautiful. 10. Does not this forged paper show that they wish to pledge us to no good [purpose] ? 11. Are you not tired of the long quarrel ? 12. The dead are freed from their bodies. 13. Our horses are impatient for the stable. 1. Surpasses, \\t l^o^er al^ (or benn). 2. Of, ijott; w. dat. Fate + baa %aium (180, 4). 3. The use of the possessive pronoun, as in the last sentence, 180, 4, is not to be imitated. 4. A dead man, in this phrase, bee 2;obea (180,5). 5. Height of the water, htx SBalTerjlanb (see 180, 5). The same, here ein* 6. Offer, here barMeten, str. II., 2 (see 180, 7). 8. Fight one's way through, jt(^ bur(^fd)lac;en/ sep. , str. VI. Enemy, use the plural. 9. Something beautiful, see 181, (230). 10. See p. 66, second line. .^^0 good (purpose), ni^t^ ©ute^. 11-13. See 181 and 183. Exercise IX, Syntax of the Cases ; Genitive continued — 184 to 188. 1. Not all those who scoff at their chains are free. 2. Eelease me from a proof of my nobility. 3. In 1848 many 28 GERMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. [H. Series. Germans were exiled. 4. One cannot always banish gloomy thoughts. 5. The shepherd pitied the old nobleman. 6. '' A righteous man regardeth the life of his beast." 7. Early in the morning the birds sing the most sweetly. 8. In the after- noon we usually go out for a walk. 9. '^ Oh the Frenchman/' exclaims Lessing, ^^who had no understanding to consider this, and no heart to feel this!" 10. Oh the unfortunate prisoner, to whom it is not granted to breathe the fresh air ! 2. Belease from, entlajTen, w. gen. (str. VIL, 1). Proof of nobility, bie 5l^nenprok. 3. In I84S (see 226, 1). 4. Banish, here jtd^ entfc^Iagen, w. gen. (str. VI. ; see 185). 5. Nobleman, ber ©belmanttf or (poetically) ber ^o'^e ^err (see 186;. 6. ''Regardeth the life of" = pities, ftd^ erbarmeitr w. gen. 7. Early in the morning, see 187 (under Time). The most sweetly, see 300, 2. Sweet, here fd)on. 8. Go out for a i^a^A;, fpajteren ge^en; ic^ gel^e f»ajteren, etc. (290, 2). 9 and 10. See 188. Exercise X. Syntax of the Cases; Dative — 189, 190. 1. Life's unmixed joy has fallen to the share of no mortal. 2. License, exempt from punishment, mocks at morals. 3. He defends them, instead of accusing them. 4. One can wrench nothing from Nature with levers and screws. 5. Faust cursed everything that ensnares the soul with enticing visions. 6. The governor bore Tell a grudge. 7. Shall we yield to this impulse ? 8. The images of the night receded before the dawning day. 9. Do not defy the king's com- mands. 10. Take care whom you trust ! 11. The minister gives place to the prince. 12. The mother watched the play of her children. 1. Compare with these sentences the German examples under 190, p. 69 (see also 350). Exempt from punishment, jlraflo^. 5. Enticing visions (B. T.), Sod^ unb ©aufelmer!. 6 To hear a grudge, groUen, w. dat. II. Series.] GEEMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. 29 10. Proverb : Zxam, fd^aue mm* (The verbs are in the imperative : Trust, (but) look whom (you trust). 11. Give place to, m<^^i^n, str. VI., w. dat. Exercise XI. Syntax of the Cases ; Dative continued — 191 to 197 — Accusa- tive—!^^ to 202. 1. Hide from me the surging crowd. 2. Nobody should forfeit the right which Nature has given him. 3. The Turks have their swords set with diamonds. 4. It was hard for the emperor in hot and in cold weather. 5. Fortune favored their wishes in the beginning. 6. The black suit is not becoming to him. 7. Will you pay me now ? 8. I have paid the money to your father. 9. How often do we imagine life [to be] other than it is! 10. "You see a man, as others be" (198). 11. Teach me to do what is right. 12. You must send for the physician. 13. He will give you the lie. 14. I feel as though I were born an avenger of my kinsman. 15. The ridicule of the foreigners grieves me to the very heart. 2. Should, pret. of foUen, 135, 5. GweUy here ttergonnt. 3. Sword, ber em S5olfc Beliebt. 4. ITiere is, gieM e^ (followed by the ace; see 205, Rem.). Many a + mand^ cin» Great = high. 5. He who = whoever, 93, 3. In sorrow = with tears. To know, fennen (119). 6. I salute you = be saluted {hj"] me (dat.). Lord, tcr ^err, it/ en. And you, fair ladies, repeat the p. p. gegrit^t (= saluted, you, fair ladies !). 7. To keep on s. a., (Stnem ben 33rotforb '^o^cr ^arigen (see 216, 2, last sentence), lit. to hang the bread-basket higher for any one, 9. To treat to + traftieren mit (w. dat.). 10. By, ijon* Heine, the German lyric poet. 32 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [H. Series Exercise XV. Syntax of the Adjective continued — 218 to 221. 1. My desire is great, but my power is weak. 2. Your faith will save you. 3. Who could hate this kind old man? 4. If I am fortunate enough to get possession of them, I shall send them to you. 5. The soldiers fought hand to hand. 6. Her life was full of sorrows and sickness. 7. People begin with little things and end with great ones. 8. Korners Sword-song begins with the words : " Thou sword at my left [side]." 9. Birds of a feather flock together. 10. She has spoken English from her childhood. 11. How is this in French ? 12. High officials have been discharged. 13. The new servant has an agreeable appearance. 14. He translated the verse into his beloved German (220). 3. 'Who could . . . , tt)er fonnte . ♦ . Hate = be enemy to, fetnb fetn (w. dat.). 4. See 219. To get possession of, ^ab^aft tverben (w. gen.), 5. To fight hand to hand^f^anh^trndn tDerben. 6. Full of, see 219, 1. 7. People, man (one). Little things, great ones, to be rendered by the adjective- substantive in the singular (see 220). 9. Birds, etc. = like loves like = like and like associate gladly (see 220). 10. From childhood, i)on flein an, 9cn Sugenb auf, ijon ^inb auf» 11. In, auf. 12. High — in a high position, ^0(|9e|iellt (see 221, 4). Exercise XVI. Syntax of Comparative and Superlative — 222 to 225 — (341 to 345, tlie largest type). 1. When was the theatre the most crowded ? — When Booth played Richelieu. 2. This fact points to a highly interesting natural phenomenon. 3. The German word "Fiirst" is originally a superlative, and, like the English "first/' signifies the foremost. 4. The noun '^Eltern'^ is a comparative. n. Semes.] GERMAN EXERCISES IX GRAMMAR. 33 5. We study the modern languages. 6. I am more to blame than he. 7. The peasant was more stupid than malicious. 8. The larger of these two houses belongs to my parents. 9. The mill is running. 10. If the wind is blowing, the mill runs. 11. Yesterday the mill was not running, because the wind did not blow the whole day. 12. If I were not Alexander, I should like to be Diogenes. 1. When? (interrogative adv.) + tt>ann? When (subord. conj.) = al^. 2. To point to, beuten auf (w. ace). Natural phenomenon, ba^ 9'^atur*' ereignti3, -\\t^, -ffe. 3. Order : and signifies, like the E. '* first" the foremost. Like, n)te. 6. To he to blame, f^ulb fein. 8. Use the superlative (225). Two,u^Q^ix\)i* 9. 7b rwTi, here ge^en. 11. The whole day, ben ganjen 3:ag. 13. I should like to be, t(^ mijc^te fein (but in what order ?). Exercise XVII. Syntax of the JVumerals-'22Q to 228— 79— (229, three lines). 1. The testimony of two witnesses always establishes the truth. 2. Goethe was born on August 28, 1749. 3. What time is it ? It is a quarter past five. 4. We will meet at a quarter of six, ten minutes before the train leaves. 5. There were twelve of them, when they arrived (227). 6. One says jokingly: Eleven means (the) sin, because it transgresses the ten commandments. 7. It belongs to [the character of] a gi-eat man, both to treat trifles as trifles, and important mat- ters as important matters. 8. Give me eight yards and a half of this cloth. 9. This package weighs two pounds and a half. 10. The transatlantic cable was laid between 1860 and 1870. 11. My friend is a man about fifty years old. 12. Bring me a bottle of the wine of the year 1852. 1. Testimony, ber ^m\), ca> (This term occurs in the proverb under 236.) Translate always by the adjective all, with the German equivalent of truth. To establish, here funb t^un (or mad)en). 3. What time is it f 2Btc Jotel ijl bic Vi)^x ? 4. Before (subord. conj.), e^e. To leave (of a train, etc.). 34 GEKMAiq- EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. [H. Series. abfa^ren^ str. VI., sep. 6. Means — is, i)l. 7. Both — and, beibe^, see 228, 1. 8. Eight and a half, see 229 and 175. 9. Two and a half, see 229 and 175. 10. Between 1860 and 1870, in ben \i^mtx Sa^ven. 11. A man about fifty years old, ein ^iinfjiger. 12. Wine of the year 1852, %^i* je^n^unbcrtjnjeiunbfunfjiger* Exercise XVIII. Remark. — The following Exercises on the pronouns involve mainly what is printed In the largest type in the Grammar ; whenever other topics are involved, special atten- tion is called to it in the foot-notes. Exercises to he written in connection with the paragraphs in smaller type will he found in the Fourth Series. Syntax of the Fronou7is— 230, 1, 2, 233, 234, (231). 1. " Spirit sublime, thou gay'st me, gav'st me all for which I prayed." 2. How old are you, if I may ask? 3. Please, tell me where you are living at present. 4. I have heard nothing of him. 5. No greeting to my sweetheart ! I won't consent to it. 6. When you go to school, be well prepared. 7. What do you think of the matter ? 8. I do not think much of it. 9. This pen is poor ; I cannot write with it. 10. Do not open the cage ; there is a bird in it. 11. This is a useful book ; you can learn a great deal from it. 12. Yonder is his house ; an oak-tree stands near it. 1. For which, voamm (lit. wherefore). 2. May, barf; use — 264 to 266. S^^yltn and ^tin. 1. The groom rode up and down [for] an hour. 2. The pedestrian has been in the city ; he went there and back in one hour. 3. The watch went once, but now it stops. 4. The children have gone to school ; school has commenced. 5. That has pleased him very much. 6. The carpenter fell from the roof ; his assistant probably fell too. 7. The horse has drawn the wagon into the barn, 8. The cranes have gone south. 9. We moved yesterday (266). 10. The travellers have not yet arrived. 11. The rope broke, and the light went out. 12. The apprentice fell asleep and slept [for] three hours. 13. If the fellow had not drunk so much, he would not have fallen into the lake and been drowned. 14. All this has happened before. 15. No consolation has been left me. 1. The compound tenses (perf. or pluperf.) should be used in this and the following sentences. Up and dowrij "^tn unb I)cr/ lit. anf unb niebcr. 2. There and hack, \}\\\ itnb t)er, or ^in unb juriicf ♦ 4 To school, in, w. ace. and def. art. 5. Very much, fe^r. 6. Prohably fell too, to be expressed by the future perfect (279 ; 266). 8. Have gone, perf. tense of jte^en (str. II., 2). South + nad^ ©iiben (266). 13. If, etc., tt>enn, w. plup. subj. To he drowned, ertrtnfen (266, 2). 14. Has happened hefore = has already been there (266, 3). 15. To he left = to remain (266, 3). Exercise XXV. Syntax of the Verb— 267, 1, 2, 3, 135. ^bnnert— IDurfen— 1. He conld not [do] otherwise. 2. They might draw yon into their toils. 3. Do you know Italian ? 4. Do you know this gentleman? 5. Do you know who this gentleman is? 40 GERMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. [II. Series. 6. Then, too, you may show yourself without restraint. 7. JSTobody is allowed to hunt without [a] license. 8. Posterity very likely will hesitate to subscribe to this judgment. 9. The sighfc of the works of God gives strength to the angels, though nobody can comprehend them (267, 3). 10. You may keep the goblet. 11. Who may that fellow in a green coat be ? 12. I like to grant her whatever is consistent with my duty. 13. I should not like to have him hear of it. 14. The child is not fond of soup. 2. Mighty pret. subj. of fonnen. To draw into one's toils, in fetn ®artt jte^en* 3, 4, 5. To know, when practical ability is implied (such as to speak a language) = fonnen ; to know, in the sense of he acquainted with — fennen ; to know, meaning to have learned hy heart = njiffen. Ex. : 3c^ fenne bav ®cb{d)t, I am acquainted with the poem ; t(^ mx^ ha^ ®», I have memorized the poem ; id) !ann ha^ ®., I can recite the poem (the latter two being, in this case, equivalent). SBiffen usually takes a clause or its equivalent for its object : 3($ tod^f too er JDO^nt ; id) n)et§ fein |)au^ (know vrhere it is) ; ic^ f :nne fein |)aua (am acquainted with it, can tell it). 6. This is a free version of the example under 267, 2, 1. Without restraint, fret* 7. License (to hunt), ber Sagbfc^ein, ^, e, 8. See 267, 2, 4. 11. Fel- low in a green coat, ber ©runrocf, ^, -e» 13. To hear (?/(what has been said), wieber erfa^ren (str. VI.). To hxive him hear of it = that he should hear of it (267, 3). 14. To lefond of = to ]ike, moQtn. Exercise XXVI. Syntax of the Verb continued — 267, 4, 5, 6, 7. ^Jlujfen — ©oKen — SCoHen — '^a^m. Special attention is called to the important idiomatic phrases under 267, 6 {small type). 1. You must not let the dog run into the street without a muzzle. 2. No sound shall strike upon my ear a second time, unless ifc should convey a special meaning. 3. A miller, who never thought of wandering, must be a poor miller. 4. A metre of this velvet is to cost eight thaler, 5. The treasure II. Series.] GEBMAI^ EXERCISES 11^^ GRAMMAR. 41 of the Xibelungen is said to lie [buried] in the Ehine. 6. Should you see him, tell him we could not wait any longer. 7. What are you going to do mth the dagger? 8. Jhe prince was about to die when the news arrived. 9. The witness claims to have seen the defendant. 10. The witness is said to have seen the defendant. 11. He claims to have deceived me for a good purpose. 12. The poor woman did not utter a complaint. 1. Bemark. — Of two infinitives the one dependent upon the other, stands first, hence : laufen laffen. 2. Strike upon my ear = resound, erfc^atten (w. dat. of pers. pron.). Meaning, here Sinn. Convey, here Ibegriinben. 3. Wlio never thought of = to whom . . . never occurred, etnfalten (w. dat.). See 267, 4. According to the regular order ftel would stand last. 5. JSfibelungen, the people, or family, in possession of the Nibelungen hoard. 6. We could not wait any longer = we had (subj.) not been able to wait [any] longer ; see the remark under 1, in this exercise. 7. Are you going to do, to be rendered by the present tense of iDoHen. 8. Was about to, see 267, 6. When, al^. 9, 10. (See 267, 5, 6.) 11. For a good purpose, ju einem guten 3tt)e(fe^ 12. Did not utter = let resound no, etc. Exercise XXVII. Syntax of the Verb continued — 268 to 273. Tlie Passive. Special attention is caMed to the use of the reflexive in 272, and to tTie examples under 273, 2, 1. If assistance is rendered them, they can carry on the business. 2. All were happy ; there was much laughing and singing. 3. Yesterday they did not play. 4. The letter was delivered through a porter ; it was read by the whole family (269). 6. We were early taught to respect old age. 6. The girls were taught dancing. 7. Of what was he accused, of theft or of high-treason ? 8. The poor should always be remembered (271). 9. That is easily said, but not so easily done. 10. ^^Keleased from ice are brook and river." 11. The 42 germa:n^ exekcises i:iir gkammab. [n. series. basin is bordered by mountains. 12. A contrast of perfections and imperfections is required to [produce] the ridiculous. 13. This point has been much contested. 14. Homer was without doubt diligently read in olden times. 15. The spy was without ceremony fastened to a branch and hanged. 1. To render assistance = to help + l^elfen, str. III., 3 (w. dat.). 2. There was, etc., to be expressed by the passive. 3. Use the passive with the subject e^r or, placing the adverb first, withoat subject. 5. To teach, It^nn ; use the passive with e^ for subject and the dat. of person. (The construction in the example under 270, 1, is not to be imitated.) 6. T'o teach something, unterrid)ten in ctncr Sac^e. 7. Of what, gen. of toa^. 9. Use lafTen. See 272. 10. See 273, 2. Released, l^efrett. In 10 and 11 no action, but a state or condition, is expressed. 14. In this sentence fein or tperben may be used, with scarcely any difference of meaning, but present usage would favor n)arb. Without doubt, unftretttg ; but no doubt, o^ne Bweifel. In olden times, ijOT Sitter^. (In other instances, the substitution of fein for werben may essentially change the meaning of the sentence, e, g., bte (Btabt »> n r b e ijerbrannt = people were burning it, it was on fire ; bie ©tabt mar »erbrannt = lay in ashes.) 15. Without ceremony, o^ne tt>eiterei3. To, an, w. ace. Exercise XXVIII. Syntax of the Verb continued — 274, 275. Tenses. 1. How bright is the sun, how smiling the field ! 2. He that goes borrowing, goes sorrowing. 3. They imitate the example set at Linz ; the armies desert him ; they curse the memory of the traitor. 4. I have (already) been here seven days. 5. I have only been here seven days. 6. Who knows who will command iis to-morrow ? (274, 5.) 7. He does no longer rummage in empty words. 8. Our friends were for- merly living in the country, but at present they are working in the city. 9. The doctor went out to the steward^s and found the young man on the floor among Charlotte's children ; 11. Series.] GERMAJS" EXEECISES IK GRAMMAE. 43 some of them were crawling over him, others were teasing him. 10. That was a bold word ! 2. Say : To borrow makes sorrows (274, 2 ; 288). 3. Set, gegekn. Linz, a city in Austria. The example set at Linz ; gegebeit, being used attributively, must precede the noun and be declined ; ju )Btnj depends upon gegekn, and therefore must precede it (353). Hence, we have to render tlie phrase ; '* The at Linz given example." 4 and 5. See 274, 4. This use of the present tense is one to which most students find it diffi- cult to accustom themselves. The adverb fc^on, in such cases, implies that the time mentioned seems long^ while the adverb erj^ conveys the opposite idea. Analogous to this use of the present tense is the use of the preterite (in German) for the pluperfect (in English) ; e, g., We had already been there three days, tuir )[i?aren fc^on brei Sra(]e \)a, 7. Exception- ally, the English emphatic form (with do) may be retained in German (see 274, 6). 8. Were living, are working, see 274, 6. In the cmmtryy auf bem :Banbe, 9. Doctor, physician, ber ^Irjt, ber X)oftor (ber SP^ebicu^)* To crawl over, ^erumfra^^eln auf^ here with dat. Exercise XXIX. Syntax of the Verb continued — 276 to 279. Tenses. 1. I have enjoyed the happiness of this earth. 2. Schiller has written a history of the Eevolt of the United Netherlands. 3. The king raised his camp at Schwedt and marched toward Frankfurt on the Oder, when Tilly had scarcely commenced his retreat. 4. What will become of you ? 5. Who is knock- ing ? It is probably the servant. 6. You shall not go to-day (278, 3). 7. The soldiers will in vain have sacrificed them- selves for their general. 8. I shall make use of this paper when a deed shall have been done that bears incontestable evidence of high-treason. 9. What are they going to elicit by their questions, if the man is innocent ? 10. It is to be hoped that the imperial diet at Augsburg will mature our projects. 1. Of this earth = earthly. 2. BewU of the U. N., ber Slbfall ber »er=^ einigten S'lteberlanbe. 3. To commence, antreten (str. V., 1), sep., lit. to enter 44 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [II. Series. on. 4 Of, au^ (w. dat.), 5. Probably y see 278, 2. 8. To make use of, brauc^en, SliaU ham been done may be expressed by the perfect (see 279, 2). To bear evidence of, bejeugen* Incontestable, use the adverb. 9. See 279, 3. To elicit by questions, l^erau^ijer^oren* 10. For a free translation of this sentence, see 279, 3. The German adverb l^offentUc^ has to be rendered by the phrase it is to be hoped. Imperial diety ber fUti^^ia^, t^, c» Exercise XXX. Syntax of the Verb — 280, 281, 282. Te7ises continued. Bxplanation. — In the sentences of this Exercise, the figures at the end of the clauses indicate whether one or two forms of the verb are possi- ble ; the reason, in each case, should be assigned by reference to g§ 280, 281 (for sentences 1-5) and to § 282 (for the remaining sentences). Aside from these variations, the conditional clauses (with if) may be rendered in two ways, either with mm expressed, or by indicating its omission by the inverted order (see 343, c). 1. If you had not advised me so (1), I should not have done it (2). 2. What would you do in my place (2) ? 3. If you had been here (1), my brother would not have died (2). 4. The fever would from now on gradually disappear (1), if the patient would take his medicine regularly (1). 5. Nobody would be- lieve him upon oath (1). 6. The herdsman says the trees are charmed (1). 7. People believe that the hand of him who injures trees will grow out of the grave (1). 8. The herds- man said the trees were charmed (2). 9. Egmont affirmed that the whole matter was nothing but a jest made at the dinner-table (2). 10. The boy says he has not done it (1). 11. The boy said he would not have done it (2), if he had not been misled by his comrades. 12. If they forgave him (2), he said, he would not do it again (2). 13. The witness swore that he had seen the defendant (2). 14. The guide told us, those were the planets (2) which control destiny (2). 15. We thought you would explain the mystery (1). 1. Translate so by the pronoun e^. 2. In my place, an metner ©telle* 4 From now on, von biefer <3tunbe an. 5. Upon oath, auf etnen Sib. 11. Series.] GERMAN^ EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. 45 6. Charmed, geknnt* 7. People, bie £eute* That the hand, etc., = tliat whoever (wer) injures . . . his (= to him the) hand, etc. Will grow, pres. subj. 8. The herdsman, in making the statement, used the present tense ; hence, in this indirect speech, the present subj. is correct (282) ; but also the preterit subj. (282, 1). 9. The whole matter, ba^ ®anje« Nothing hut, nic^ta al^* Jest . . . table, ber 3:afelfc^erj, e^^ e» 14. Those were, baig, etc. (245, 1). If the pret. subj. ** controlled" is used, the rela- tive clause expresses the guide's opinion only ; ** control " pres. ind. denotes a general statement or fact. Exercise XXXI. Syntax of the Yerl contimied — 284,285 — 103, 110. Moods. 1. Let all be silent, let each incline his ear to solemn tones. 2. Let each one take care how he acts and how he fares. 3. Will the gentleman please enter, 4. May a gi^acious fate lead you through this stormy life ! 5. " full [and splendid] Moon . . . would thy glow for the last time beheld my woe ! " 6. harmless staff, would that I never had exchanged thee for the sword ! 7. I make rhyme tolerably well, I should think, what belongs together. 8. How is it possible to write everything ? 9. Whether you are a good or a bad fellow, go to bed. 10. Everything might be excellently settled, if things could be done over again. 11. You would be a dead man. 12. Yes, said the lantern to the moon, what would men do if we were not [there] ? Thereupon it went out. 1. All + SrHea (see 168). 2. To take care, fe^en, str. V., 1. Translate : " Let each one see how he manages it, let each one see what become of him." What become of him = where he remain. 3. Third person plur. pres. subj. of eintreten, str. V., 1. Please, gefdlligjl, adv. 5. Full [and splendid] moon, cotter 3J?onbenf(^ein. Thy glow = thou. To behold, fe^en auf (w. ace). Would is to be expressed by the pret. subj. of the principal verb. 7. To make rhyme, jufammenrcimeti, sep. 1 should think, pret. subj. of to think. 8. Use the pret. subj. of laffen, with the reflexive pronoun (see Examples under 284, 3). 9. Whether, to be omitted (284, 4). To 46 GERMAN EXERCISES IK GRAMMAR. [II. Series. go to bed, here colloquially, ft(^ auf^ D^r legen, for the classical : ju S5ett(e) gel^cn. 10. Might be, use the pret. subj. of laijeu, with the reflexive pro- noun. To do over again, jweimal ijerric^ten* 11. J. cJeacZ man, be^ 2^obc^» Exercise XXXII. Syntax of the Verb continued — 286 to 290. Moods — Lnpera- tive, 1. Beat the drum, and take the field ! 2. George, you stay with me. 3. No man ought to be obliged [to do a thing]. 4. He wanted to see the pedlar. 5. He must have seen the pedlar. 6. He claims to have seen the pedlar. 7. He was forced to call the police. 8. One must not count the chickens before they are hatched. 9. Then they separated. 10. You do nothing but complain. 11. Shall we walk out, or drive ? 12. Bid him be silent, and teach him to do what is pleasing to God. 13. They saw him first suspended over the abyss, and afterwards the guide found his dead body lying at the foot of the rock. 14. What has the Tyrolese sticking on his hat ? 15. "Fve often heard it said, a preacher might learn, with a comedian for a teacher.'' 16. That would be tempting God. 1. UsG the past participle. To take the field, \rC^ ^elb jtejen, str. II., 2. 2. With, bei (w. dat.) or urn (w. ace). 3. Use muffen twice in this sen- tence. 4-7. See 288, 1. 7. To be forced, muffen. 8. The German proverb is : " One must (foil or mup) not praise the day before the even- ing," which may be substituted for this sentence. 9. One version of this sentence is found in 290, third example. 11. Walk out (for exer- cise), fpajteren 9e"^en ; in the same way, fpajtercn fa^rcn, reiten (290, 2). 12. What is pleasing to God = according to tlie pleasure (ba^ SSolIge^* fatteit) of God. 13. To be suspended, fc^n)eben. 15. Say : A comedian could teach a preacher. For said here = boasted. 16. Would be, pret. subj. of ^ei§en, VII., 1. II. Sbmes.] GERMAN EXERCISES I:N^ GRAMMAR. 47 Exercise XXXIII. Syntax of the Verb continued — 291 to 293. Moods — Infinitive. 1. That cannot be helped. 2. That remains still to be considered. 3. The youth felt impelled to win the prize. 4. We have dug a new bed in order to turn aside the current of the river. 5. Instead of coming nearer he ran away. 6. They did not delay, but began to hoe and dig. 7. N^obody thinks of granting him the favor. 8. It is dangerous to play with the lion. 9. Lessing was too proud to reap without having sown. 10. My brother is ready to keep you company. 11. If he has done nothing all his life, one can hardly say that he is resting from his work. 12. The countess has diamonds which are known to be diamonds. 13. No smoking here. 14. The student began translating the poem ; but it was almost untranslatable (291, 2). 15. The heirs were weeping ; but their weeping was a secret laughing. 1. Bear in mind that possibility may be expressed by the infinitive (291). 2. Bemains, in this connection, may be rendered by fettlr bleikttr or fle^en. 3. Felt impelled = it (some power) impelled the youth. 7. Thinks of granting = thinks of it, to grant ; of it to be rendered by an adverb. 10. To keep one company^ ©efellfc^aft letjlen (w. dat.) ; Sinem jur ®efettf(^aft ^ier (ba) bleiben. 11. All his life, fetnen SeMag. A clause with ba§ is preferable to the ace. w. the inf. (292). 12. Which are known = which one knows, or, of (ijon) which one knows that ... 13. Smoking is forbidden here. Exercise XXXIV. Syntax of the Verb continued — 294 to 300. Participles. 1. From the gable of the house, which commanded an ex- tensive view, we could see the steeples of the city. 2. The matter is important, but if you are in ill-health we will wait 48 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [H. Series. (294, 2). 3. The air is glowiog as though [it came] from the mouth of a furnace. 4. Give me some boiling water. 5. The ships under sail, with their masts encircled with wreaths, vanished in the distance. 6. A handsome squire came riding along the way. 7. I call that lying (296, 2). 8. Well begun is half done (296, 2). 9. Was the whole family present? All, except the youngest daughter. 10. You have read Lessing^s Laocoon ; if you now apply those principles to works of art you will become a better critic. 11. She spoke of her child, her eyes dim with tears. 12. Faust had powerfully attracted the spirit. 13. "The lofty works, uncomprehended, are bright as on the earliest day." 14. ^^To Him above bow down.'' 15. ^^ The Woman-soul leadeth us upward and on.'' 1. Translate the relative clause by the pres. part, of wettfd^auert (294, 1). 3. Air, the German equivalent is sometimes used in the plural. A8 thougJi, rok. 5. Under sail = p. p. of aBfe^eln + to sail off (295, 1). Encircled with wreaths, laubumfrcinjt. 10. If you now apply, to be ren- dered by the p. p. absolute (297). 11. Dim, etc., = dimmed from weep- ing. 13-15. See 299 ; 299, 1 and 3. Uncomprehended = incompre- hensibly. Bow down = stand bowed ; use flel^en. 15. Woinan-soiUy B. T.'s version of ba^ Stt)ig=*2Beibli(^e. To lead on and upward, l^inanjtekn* Exercise XXXV. Syntax of the Preposition— {ZOl), 302, 303. 1. Instead of songs, a stream of blood rose from his breast. 2. The son became head of the family by virtue of the ring [in his possession]. 3. The grenadiers wept on account of the doleful intelligence. 4. We shall start in spite of the bad weather. 5. For his sake I will explain myself more clearly (302, 14). 6. In company with you 1 defy our whole genera- tion (303, 9). 7. Next to life we implore the blessing of God. 8. The count, together with all his men, offered himself to the duke. 9. Since that unhappy day every mouth is silent II. Series.] GEEMAI^" EXEKCISES I]N^ GRAMMAB. 49 (to me). 10. From Easter to Pentecost is fifty days. 11. The general saw tj|at he was deceived by his officers. 12. A Ger- man song begins with the words : At Strassburg, on the bulwark, etc. 13. They said they would make him presi- dent; but they made only a fool of him. 14. The prisoner had no coffee with his rye bread and sausage. 15. We shall go either at Easter or on Trinity-Sunday. 1. To rise, here :^oc^ auffpringen, str. III., 1, sep. 2. (302, 5.) 3. (302, 8.) 6. To defy, in bie (Sc^rattfcn forbern (lit. to challeage, or summon, into the lists). Generation, ba^ ©efc^tec^t, here ba^ 3a^r^unbert (in this sense a poetical and hyperbolic expression). 8. To offer one's self = to bring one's self. 12. See 303, 16. Etc., u. f. ii?. = unb fo tweitev. 13. To make a fool of one, ©inensum bcilen ^aben. Exercise XXXVI. Syntax of the Preposition continued — 304. 1. The Ii^dian was wounded by an arrow. 2. Scissors are no playthings for children. 3.< Truth does not exist for him. 4. In the war no substitute will take the soldier's place. 5. He did not wish to bind himself (toward me). 6. Against stupid- ity even the gods struggle in vain. 7. In comparison with Eothschild you are a poor man. 8. The lords of the empire were sitting around the emperor. 9. Several portraits of kings surrounded the throne in a semicircle. 10. [According] to you everything is to be had for money. 11. You have made a mistake of six-pence. 12. We never play for money. 13. Do not weep for the fallen heroes. 14. The loss of her fine hair would be a pity. 15. I feel sorry for your aunt. 4. Translate substitute by anbeterf and take the place of by eintreten fiir (str. v., 1). 5. To Und one's self ftc^ ^erpfltc^ten. 8. Lords of the empire, bie ®rD§en ber ^rone. 9. Portraits of kings, ^onig^MIber. To surround, urn ♦ . ♦ \jix jle^en (136). 10. To he had = to be for sale, feil feim 11. To 3 50 GERMAIN EXERCISES ItsT GRAMMAR. [H. Series. make a mistake (in accounts), ft^ i^errec^nen. 14. Say : It would be a pity about her fine pair. To he a pity, fc^abe feim 15. 1 feel sorry ^ e^ t^ut mir leib. Exercise XXXVII. Syntax of the Preposition continued — 305, 306;, (307). 1. The university [of] Strassburg was re-opened in 1872. 2. Is your father out of town ? Yes^, he has gone to a water- ing-place for a fortnight. 3. Medicine is needed for the emi- grant who is suffering from the intermittent fever. 4. The bear is led by a chain. 5. Can you recall the circumstances? •6. The defendant was proud of his innocence, and angry with his accuser. 7. One hundred pence make one mark (306, 3). 8. The hero's name is living, although his body has crumbled into dust. 9. I was going to put on the belt, when it tore into two pieces. 10. The heirs were astonished at the large property of which the will disposed. 11. He is vexed with me. 12. Sometimes a whole life is spent over a fine illusion. 13. Cambrai will, amid rejoicing, open her gates to the arch- bishop. 14. None among the imperial officers came up to Friedland. 15. She would like to guard against certain re- membrances. 16. The boy was not able to see the woods for all the trees. 1. In = in the year. 2. Out of town, ijerretfl. Gone, use retfett (see 266). 3. Is needed, e^ fe^U an (306, 1). 6. To be proud of tro^en anf, ftolj fetn auU 9. Was going to, use vooUtn* 12. To be spent = pass away. 13. Cambrai, the name of a place. 14. To come up to = to be equal to, reid^en an. Friedland — Wallenstein, duke of F. 15. Would like to, use mogen. 16. See 306,9. All the, lauter (see Ex. XIIL, 10). Compare: Not to see the city for all the houses. THIRD SERIES, Exercise I. The Simple Sentence— ZO^ to 317. 1. Life is not the highest of goods. 2. ^' One sees that in nothing no interest he has." 3. You have advanced the work more in these three days, than it has formerly thriven in many weeks. 4. Child, take care that yoa don't spill any- thing. 5. Happiness is so near ; why will you wander farther and farther ? 6. Such is the fate of the Beautiful on earth. 7. '^ Great cry and little wool." 8. Ill-humor and desire for combat were gnawing his mind. 9. Eather let his contempo- raries and posterity judge him. 10. His majesty has been pleased to pension the privy counselor. 11. The master and mistress are gone out. 12. The young band of reapers go into the field. 13. Three huntsmen went a-shooting deer. 14. The world's history is the world's judgment. 15. Neces- sity is the mother of invention. 16. Mars, the star of ill- fortune, has often severed what Venus, the bringer of good- fortune, had united. 1. Use the del art. 3. To ham interest in, 5(nteit nc^mcn an. 3. To take care, ftc^ in $[(^t ne^men. 4. Not . . . anything — nothing. 6. Translate such by that. 7. Great — much. 9. Let, use the pres. subj. of the principal verb. 10. To he pleased (in this connection), geru^en. Pri'Gy counselor, ber ge'^etme (|>oO 9^at. 11. Master and mistress, tie |)errf(i)aft. 13. To go a-shooiing deer, auf tie S3irf(^ jie^en. 16. Bringer^ see 317. 52 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [HI. Series. Exercise II. The Compound Sentence — Co-ordinate Sentences — 318 to 322. 1. In part they drew him, in part he sank down. 2. We will neither deny nor palliate the deed. 3. In the first place, they wish it; and secondly, it is the custom. 4. I will either act with absolute freedom, or not command at all. 5. The fleet did not dare to attack the enemy, but returned without having effected its purpose. 6. Lessing would like to call Corneille "the gigantic" or "the prodigious," but not "the great " (320, 2). 7. He is not a millionaire, but he is rich. 8. He is not rich, but poor. 9. The matter seems so plain, and yet it is a mystery. 10. It was difficult to enlist more soldiers ; for fortune had forsaken the army. 11. Wallenstein had assumed the title of " Highness " ; therefore it was neces- sary for him to keep soldiers. 12. Goetz yon Berlichingen had one iron hand ; thus it was insensible to a kind pressure. 3. In the first place y erjlen^. 4. Absolute, here »ofl!ommen (complete). 5. Without hamng effected its purpose, unijcrri(^teter (Sad^e (adverbial gen.). 6. Would like, use pret. subj. of mogen. 11. Had assumed the title of = had himself called (321). It was necesary for him = he must. To keep, here ^alten, str. VII., 1. 12. Kind pressure, ^rucf ter ^kU (322). To, ge^en, w. ace. Exercise III. The Compound Sentence continued — Subordinate Sentences — Substantive and Adjective Clauses — 323 to 328. 1. The curse of an evil deed is that it brings forth evil (324). 2. The student cheerfully carries home what he has in black and white in his note-book. 3. '' Out of the abun- dance of the heart the mouth speaketh " (324). 4. Can you not understand that it is far more diffiicult to do right than in.SEEiES.] GERMAK EXERCISES IN^ GRAMMAR. 53 to indulge in pious dreams ? (325, 2). 5. Have you [received] information [of] what has happened in Schwyz ? (325, 2). 6. The day is almost spent, and you must explain yourself, whether you will do without me or without your friend. 7. Has the ship sunk? Yes, but they still hope to raise it again (325, 3). 8. Sweet peace, that art from heaven, come into my heart ! 9. The church we visited last week has not yet been dedicated (326, 327). 10. '' See that you most pro- foundly gain what does not suit (in) the human brain " (327, 2). 11. (The) European governments have sometimes sent to the United States people unable to support themselves. 12. The government, a year or two ago, complained of the landing of paupers who were sent over. 2. In black and white, f(^tt)arj auf weip* 3. Say: Of what the heart is full, of that the mouth flows over. To flow over, here ukrge^en (sep.). 4. To do rights gut ^anbeln. To indulge in pious dreams, anbac^ttg fc^warmen. 6. /« . . . spent, use ftd^ neigen. 10. Translate most profoundly by tief^ jtnnigr and gain by faffen^ 12. Ago, see 306, 9. Exercise IV. The Compound Sentence continued — Adverbial Glauses — 329 to 332. 1. When the weak [man] succumbs to his fate, the strong conquers it. 2. ^^ Man, while he strive th, is prone to err " (330). 3. As the king gave a sign with his hand, the [gate of the] prison opened. 4. After the king had left the city, it was found that he had taken the precaution of providing it with a sufficient garrison (330, 2). 5. The beU-founder, before letting the metal flow, spoke a short prayer ; then the workmen rested from their hard work till the bell was cooled. 6. Often, where ideas fail, (there) words [will] offer themselves [as substitutes] (331). 7. The lawyer, casting a furious glance 54 GERMAN EXERCISES IN GRAMMAR. [IH. Series. at his opponent, left the room (332). 8. We never go to town without visiting our old aunt (332, 1). 9. Henry studied German for two years without ever understanding the principles of the language. 10. Instead of paying what he owed, he contracted more debts. 1. Conquer^ here jnjtngcn, str. III., 1. % Is prone to err = errs. 3. To give a sign with one's hand, mit bem i^inger n)infen. 4. It was found, see 272. Taken — had. Of providing, see 291, 4. 5. Say : Before tlie b. let the metal flow, he . . . Short prayer, bcr fromme ©j)rud^. Rested from . . . = let the . . . work rest. 6. To offer one's self here |t(^ ein*= jleUen. 7. Casting = while (intern) he cast. Aty auf (w. ace). 10. To contract debts, ©d^ulben ma(^en. Exercise V. The Compound Sentence — Adverbial Clauses continued — 333 to 335. 1. The slow progress of the war had been as advantageous to the rebels as it had been injurious to the king (333). 2. He had grown as fleshy as Doctor Luther. 3. Goliath was by one head taller than all the rest. 4. His hair stood on end as if the hand of Death had seized him. 5. The scholar seeks knowledge as if he were for ever to live on this earth. 6. There was a hissing as when water comes in contact with fire (333, 1). 7. We lived a more retired life than we had lived in Philadelphia. 8. You are too good to expect such things of us (333, 3). 9. The peace was concluded too hurriedly to be of long duration. 10. Our provisions diminished more and more ; and, of course, the less we had to eat, the more terrible grew our hunger (334). 11. The tyrant was so detested by the Swiss people, that he could no longer find any tool. 12. I would gladly bear the trouble, so important is the matter to me (335, 1). 13. Do you consider him so unprincipled that he should cheat a poor widow ? m. Series.] GERMAK EXERCISES 11^ GRAMMAR. 55 1. To be advantageous = to bring advantage. To be injurious = to do harm. 2. Translate literally ; a version of tliis sentence, in students' slang, is found in F. 2129-30 (see 333). 3. AU the rest = all people. 4 and 5. The subordinate clauses may be given in two ways (see 343, erfenf sep. castle, ba^ (Sc^lo§, @(^loffe^, ©(^lolTer* catechise + !ated)ifteren* cause, 7^., bie Urfad)e, _29^. -n; ber Va^ fprung, -^, -e (origin), cavalry, bie 9ieiterei\ cease, aufboren, sep. celebrate, feiern* certain, — ly, gett>t§» chain, n., + bie ^ctte,^?. -n* chapter + ba^ ta^ji'tel -^, -♦ Charles + ^arL Charlotte + d^arlo'tte, -n^ ; Sotte, -na* charm, tJ., bannen in II. S., Ex. XXX. cheat, «., Betrtigen, «^r. //., 2. cheek, bie SEBange, p^. -n; bie a3adfef ^?. -n. cheerfully, getrofl, 455, 3. cherry + bie ^irfc^e, pi. -n» chest + bie ^ifte, pi. -tt> 70 VOCABULARY. child + bae ^inb, -e^, -er. chisel, n. , ber 5DZet^eI, -^, -♦ cholera + bie S^olera. choose, JDa^lettf emciMen. Christian, ti., + ber Sferijl, -en, -en; church + bie ^trc^^e, pi. -n* circumstance, ber Umftanb; -e^, -e* city, bie ©tabt, jpl. -e. Cleopatra + ^leo'patra* clear, — ly, + Har; beutltd^, climb, jleigen, str. Z, 2. cloak, ber SD'JanteU -^i -♦ close, adj.y bumpf* close, «., fc^liefen, str. II., 1; ijer^ [(^liegen. cloth, baa ^itd), -e^, e» coat, ber 9fto(!, -e^, -e» coffee + ber ^affee, -a* cold + !alt, comp. falter; — weather, bie ^dlte. colonel, ber Dberjl, -en, -en* come + fommen, str. IV. comedian, ber ilommobia'nt, -en, -en» command, n., ber S3efe^l, -a, -e. command, «., kfel)len, str. IV. y w. dot. commandment, \i^^ ®e^ot, -eS, -e. commence, anfangen, str. VII., 1, Sep. commercial, — people, \>0i^ |)anbcla^ ijolf, -e^, -er. commit, I^ege^en (136) ; to be com^ mitted (= to happen), gefc^el^en, str. v., 1. companion, ber ®eno§, ©enoffen, ®e^ noffen* company, bie ®efellf(^aft, pi. -en; (of soldiers) + bie ^ompanie', pi. -en. comparative, ber ©o'mparatiijf -a, -e* comparatively, ioer^dltnipmafiG* compel, jtDingett, str. Ill, 1, complain, flagen ; to — of, ftc^ ^e^ fd^raeren iiber iv). ace). complaint, bie ^lage, pi. -n. comprehend, faffen; = fathom, er*= gritnben. comprise, einfd^liepen, str. II. , 1, sep. compulsion, ber BttJang, -e^* comrade, ber ®efd^rte, -n, -n. concert + ba^ donce'rt, -e^, -e* conclude, fd)lie§en, str. II., 1. conference ^- bie ^onfere'nj, pi. -en* confess, geftetjen, str. VI. conflagration, bie ^euer^brunfi (173). confuse, make confused, verlegen madden* conquer, Bejn>inc|en, str. Ill, 1 ; (a land), erobern; (a people), kftegen. conqueror, ber ©roberer, -a, -. conscious, ben?u§t {w. gen.). consider, iikriegen ; {— estimate), |)alten fitr {w. ace.), str. VII., 1; yermeinen (rare). considerable, bebeutenb. consistent, to be — with, jtc^ Jjer^* tragen ntit, str. VL consolation, ber %xt^^, -e^* consult, I)era'tf(^lagen (547, 2). contemporaries, bie (9)iit) SSelt* contention, ber Ban!, -e^* contest, -y., Beftreiten, str. Z, 1. contrast, n., + ber Sontra'fl, -e^, -e* control, «., regieren* cool, v. intr. , + |i($ aMii^Ien, sep. ; jtc^ ijerfit^len. cooling-, adj. part., + fii^Ienb; frifd). cost, ^., 4- fofien* cough, -y., ^ujlen* count, n., ber ®raf, -en, -en. count, ^., (upon), rec^nen (auf, w, a/x.). countess, bie ®rdftn, pi. -nen. VOCABULARY. 71 country, ba^ Sanb, -c^^ -cr ; in the — , auf bent 2. ; into the — , auf ba^ C. courage, ber WlnU -(e)^* course, of — , natMid^* court (of justice), ba^ ©ertd^t, -esg, -e; (of a prince), ber |)of, -e^, -e* cradle, n., bie SBtege^ pL -m crane + ber ^rani^, -^, -t* create, (er)f(^affenf str. VI. crime, bci^ 3)er^re($en, -^, -♦ critic + ber ^ritifer, -^, -; ber Seur^ t^eiler, -^, -♦ crowd (in motion), ha^ ©ebrdngef -^. crowded, ijoH, crumble, jerfaHen, s^r. Fii! (w. fern). cry, 7^., ba^ ©efd^ret, -e^» culprit, ber ©c^ulbige, -tt, -n, cunning, n.j bie 5lrgU)l. cup, n., ber SSec^er, -^, -♦ current (of a river), bie Stxmun^, pi. -en. curse, 71., ber f5iuer0enr str. III, 3 ; i>erbteitetu earnings, ber S^erbienfl, -e^, -e» earth + bie Srbe, pi, -n* earthly + irbifd^, easily, leic^t* Easter + Djlern (174, &). easy, Iei(^t, eat + effen, str. V., 1. egg + ha^ (£t, -^, -er* Egyptian, adj., + ag^ptifd^. eight + ac^t* either — or, entnjeber — ober. Elbe + bie (£lk* else, fonjl* emigrant, ber STu^njanberer, -^, -♦ emperor, ber ^aifer, -^, -. empty, adj., leer* end, n.. + ba^ ©nbe, pi. -n* end, v., aufloren, sep. enemy, ber i^eiub, -e^, -e» English, adj., + englifd^* enjoy, geniepen, str. II., 1 ; ftd^ er^^ freuen, ^. ^67i. ; fcl)n)el9en in, w. dat. enlist, njerben, str. III., 3. ensnare, umfpannen* enterprise, basg Unterne^'men, -^, -. entire, — ly, ganj* equal (to), gleic^, w. dat. erection + bie ©rrtc^tung, -en* err + irren* escape, itmge'^en (136). especial, kfonber {only used attribttr tively [211]). estates, bie on in II. S. Ex. 36. find + finben, str. HI, 1. finger + ber i^inger, -^, -. fire, n., + ba^ ^euer, -$, -♦ fire, V. {= shoot), fd)iepen, str, ZZi, 1, first, see 532, 1. fix upon, kftimmem fish, v., + fifc^en* fleet, + bte ^^totte, pi. -n^ Flemish + flamif(^« fleshy, bi(f. floor, ber S3obett, -^, - ; ber ijuPobcnj (bie (£rbe)« flow, v., flte^en, s^r. iZ, 1; (^aA^« aux. feinX flower, bie 25lume, pi. -n* following + folgenb, fool, ber ^f)or, -en, -en; ber 5^arr, -en, -en* foot + ber %u^, -e^, -e. for, conj. benn; prep. + fitr (304, 3). forbid + »erMeten, str. II, 2. forefathers, bie 35orfa^ren. foreigner, ber trembling. -<3, -e, foremost, ber erfle» forfeit, v., »erf(^erjen* /orge, -y., falf^en; ijerfdlfd^en. Icrgetful of one's duty, pflfd^t^et*' GclTen (548, 2, a). 74 VOCABULARY. forgive + 'otx^tUn, str. V., 1. former, the — the latter, biefer — formerly, frii^er, forsake, ^erlaffen, str. VIL fortnight, ^ierje^n Slage, fortunate, glucflid)* fortune, bas^ ©IM, -e^, four + ijier; — times, ijiermaU fourth, n,y + \iCi^ fQ'mitX, -^, - (532). France + %x(inixd6^, -^* free, adj,y + frei. free, «., + Befreien* freed (from), lebtg {w. gen.). freeze + frieren, str. II., 2. French, n. , see Frenchman. French, adj., + franjoftfc^. Frenchman + ber ^ranjofe, -n, -xu frequently, oft. fresh + frifd). friend + ber i^reunb, -e^, -e. from, ^oit (303, 15). froth, ber ©c^auntr -e^. fruit + bie ?^ruc^t, pi. -e. full + iJOtt* furious, tDutenb. furnace, ber Dfen, -^, -♦ future, bic 3ufunft. gable + ber ©ie^el, -^, -♦ gaily, lujltg. gain, v., gewtnnen, str, iJJ., 3. garment, ba^ ®ett>anb, -e^, -er. garrison, bie SBefa^uttg, pi. -en. gate, ba^ Ztir>x, -t^, -e. general, n., ber ©eneral, -^, -e; ber f^elb^err, -n, -eit. general, adj., aUgemein. generosity, bie ®ro§muU gentleman, ber ^err, -it, -en* gentleness, bie (Sanftmut. gently, leife* gentry, bie (Sbelleute (172). George + ©eorg. German, n.y ber Deutf(^e, -n, -n. German, adj., beutfc^* Germany, i)eutfc^lanb, -^* gift + bie (3aU, pi. -n. gigantic + gigantifd^* give + gekn, str. F., 1. glad, fro§. gladly, germ glance, n., ber S3U(f, -e^, -t* gloomy, f(|tt)arj. glow, v., + gluten. gnav7 + nagen; to — one's mind, (Sinem am ^erjen nagen* go + ge^en (136); to — out, au^^ ge^en/ sep. ; (out of the room, etc.) Itnau^ge^^en, sep.; (of light, fire, etc.) erlof^en, str. VIII (133). goblet, ber S3e(^er, -^, -♦ godfather, ber 9)at(^)e, -n, -n. godlike, gotta^nlic^* gold + ba^ ®olb, -ei3. Goliath + ©o'Uat^. good, n., + ba^ ®ut, -e^, -er. good, adj., + gut. good-for-nothing (fellow), ber Zan^m^t^, -, -e. good-natured, ptarttg. government, bie Olegierungf pi. -en. governor, ber Canbijogt, -e^, -e. gracious, gnabtg. gradually, aEnta()Ug. grand, gro§, gro^artig. grandmother, bie ®ro§mwtterf pi. -♦ grant, v., gewci^ren; 5?ergonnen. grave, n., + ba^ ®xa^, -t^, -er. great-grandmother, bie Urgrop* mutter* pi. -. greatly, fe^r. greet + griipen. VOCABULARY. 75 greeting + bcr ®Tm§, -e^, -e, grenadier + ber ©rmabier, -^, -e* grieve, [corner jen» groom, n., htx ^BtaUfnt^t, -t^f -e. grow, njad^fettf str. VI. ; (= become), tverben* guard, V, (against), fi(^ pteit VOX, w, dat. guest + ber ®af!, -zi, -€♦ guide, M., ber ^ii^rcr, -^, -♦ guilt, bie (5(^ulb, pi. -en = debts, gush forth, (^ueUen, str. VIII. (133). hair + basJ ^aar, -e^, -e^ half + i^alb; «ee 229* ham, ber 'B^mkx^, -^p -• hand + bie -^anb, ^^. - c. handsome, fc^muc!. hang + er^^angen (of persons). happen, gefc^e^en, str. F., 1. happiness, ba^ ®iM, -e^. hard + ^art; jlreng (of work). hardly, fautn* harm, ber (B^ahtn, -$, " . harmless, uttfc^ulbig; fromm. harmony, bie (^inigfett. hat + ber ^ut, -e^, -♦ hate + ^ajfett* head, ber ^o^f, -e«, -e; {= chief) ba^ hear + pren* heart -f baa ^erj, -en^, ctt; bie ©ruft* heath 4- bie ^eibe, pL -n. heathen + ber |)etbe, -tt, -n. heaven, ber ^immel, -^, -. heavenly, ^immlifc^* heir, ber irte, -n, -n. here + ^ier; here — there, §ier — i>a (bort)« hero, ber ^elb, -en, -en, hesitate, S3ebenfen tragen, str. VI. hey ! + ei ! hide, V. ^erptten* high-treason, ber |)0(^venat, -$. Highness, bie 2)urci^kud^t ; bie 'Bnxi^^ himself, felbfl (249), preceded by a case of er^ hiss, V.J jifc^en; there was a hiss- ing, ea stf(^te» history, bie ®tf(^tc^te, pi. -en» hoe, ^atfen* hold + l^dten, str. VII, 1. Holland + ^ollanb, -^. home, n., + ba^ ^eim, -e^, -c; \)ci^ |)aua, -ea, -er^ home, adv., nad) |)aufc. Homer + |)ome'r, honor, n., bie ^^v.\ honor, ■??., e^ren, honorable, e^rcn^otf^ hope + l^offen* horde + bie |)orbe, pl.y -n, horror, baa ®rauen, -a. horse, baa 9!>ferb, -^a, -e, hot + |ei§ ; — weather, bie ^i^c» hour, bie Stunbe, pi. -n; an — 's walk, eine ^tunbe SBegea^ house + ta^ ^aua, -ea, -er» how? + tt>ie? however, t»ie auc^; J»ie tmmn; — much, n)ie an(^, human, ntenfd^Ud^* humble, bcmitttg^ humility, bie 2)emut» humor, ill — , ber ttnmut, -a, hundred + ^unbert Hungarian, adj., + ungarifc^* hunger + ber ^Junger, -a. hunt, v., jagen; auf bie Sagb gc^cn^ huntsman, ber S^gcr, -a, -♦ 76 VOCABULARY, hurriedly, fc^nell; ciUg, hut + tie ^iitte, pi., -n, ice + ba^ Si^, -c^. idea, ber S^egrif, -e^, -e» idolize, ijergottern. if, tt>mn. ill (= sick), franf* ill-fortune, ba^ Ungliiif, -^» ill-humor, ber Itmnut, -^* illuminate, erleu(|ten. illusion, ber ^anbclBar» impatient (for), begierig (na^). impel, treiben, «^r. Z, 2. imperfection, bie Uuijollfommeti^eitf pi -en, imperial, !ai[erU(|. implore, erfle^en, important, tpid^tig. importunity, bie 3u'bnngli(|!eit. impossible, unmogltc^, impressive, einbr«(f^sjott, imprint (on), eii^jragen (w. dat.), sep. impulse, ber !Drang, -e^* in + tit (305, 1, 5). incline, iteigeiu incomparably, itngletd^. incomprehensibly, itnbegreiflid^. incontestably, unwiberfprec^Uc^, increase, !oergro§ern, independence, bie UnaBl^angigfett, Indian + ber 3nbia'ner, -^, -♦ industry, ber ^leifr-e^^ ber Stm^i^ fletp; -e^. infantry, ba^ i^u^ijotf, -e^. information, bie ^uitbe^ inherit, erBen; ererkn, innocence, bie Unf^ulb. innocent, unf^ulbig, inquire (of), attfragen (6ei); — after, frogeu uac^, insensible, itnem^ftttblic^. in spite of, see 302, 9. instead + anfiatt. instruction, ber Hnterrid)!, -C, intelligence (= news), bie ^unbe. intelligent, !lug, inteKtge^nt. intention, bie §{^ji(|t, pi. -n; ber SBitte, -n^, -n, intercept, auffangen, sir. VII., 1; sep. interest, to take an — in, teilttel^men att, Sftr. IV., Sep. interest, to — one's self for one, jic^ jemanbc^ anne^mem str. IV., sep. interesting, intereffa'm, intermittent, — fever, ba^ SBed^fel*' fiet>er, -^, -♦ into, in, w. ace. invention, bie Srftnbung, pi. -en* invisible, itn|i(^tkr» iron, n., + ba^ ©ifen, -^, -♦ iron, adj.y + eifern, itself, felbfi (249). January + ber Sanuar, -4* jealousy, bie ©iferfui^t, Jew + ber 3ube, -n, -n. jokingly, im Od^erj* journey, bie 9fteife, pi. -n, joy, bie 2u|i; bie i^reube,^^. -n. judge, 71., ber IRx6^tix, -^, -. judge, -p., rid)tem judgment, ha^ Xixttxl, -t^, -e; ha^ ®eri(^t, -e^, -e» keep, fatten, str. VII., 1 ; to — house + lau^^alten, sep. keeper, ber fitter, -^, -♦ VOCABULARY. 77 key, ber ©^luffeX/ -^r -♦ kill, toten^ kilogram + ba^ ^ilogramm, -(3, -e. kind, n,t bie ^xi, pi, -en; ber ©c^Iag, -e^, -e* kind, adj.y gut; freunblid). king + ber ^onig, -^, -e, knead + fneten* kneel + fnieem knife, ha^ 9)ieffer, -^r -♦ knight, ber Skitter, -^f -♦ knock, flopfen* know, tr>tffen (135) ; (= to recognize by), erfennen (an)» knowledge, bie 3Biffenfd)aft. landing + bie !2anbung. language, bie ©prad^e, pi, -n. lantern + bie Caterne, pi. -n, large, gro§. last, nd;., + le^t* last, -p., bauern. late, fpaU latter + ber le^tere; tlie former — the latter, biefer — jener. laugh + tac^en* laughter + ba^ ©elac^ter, -^, -, law, ha^ ®efe|r -c^, -e* lawyer, ber 5lbi?oca't/ -en, -en» lay + legen* lazy, fauL lead, ^., fu^ren* leap up, l^inauffpringen (an), str. III., 1 ; sep. learn + lernen; erfa^ren, str. VL least, at — , tDenigften^* leave, n., ber ^bfc^ieb, -^; to take — , ^^fd^ieb ne^men. leave, v.y Iciffen, str. YILy 1 ; to — over, iibrtg laffen; (a place), »er=^ laffen, ^m^i^.; abfa^ren, str. VI. t sep., intrans. less, weniger^ lesson, bie ^(ufgabe, p^. -n; to give a — , eine e, -n, -n; ber Seu (poeti- cal). list + bie Sifie, pi. -n. listen, i^oren; p^oren, sep., to, dat.; an'^oren, sep., w. ace. little, fletn; a — , ein mnig* lock, n., ha^ ©c^log, e^loffe^, ^c^lof*' fer. lofty, ^0(^* long + lang; no longer, nlc^t me^r; no longer any (w, substantive), fein . . . nte^r; a — time, lange. look, to — upon, betrac^ten. lose, «., + ijerlteren, str, 11,2. Louis + 2ubtt)ig, -^* luxurious, uppig* maiden + ba^ SWabc^en, -^, -. Majesty + bie Mait\id^t, pi. -en. make + madden. malicious, :§cimtu(ftfd). man + ber Mam, -e^, -er; abstract: ber ?Dlen[c^, -en, -en. manage, treiben, str, I., 2. many a, see 262. 78 VOCABULARY. map, bte ^arte, pi. -n, marble + ber 5!?iarmor, -^, march, -y., + ntarfc^ie'ren, riiden in II. S. Ex. 29. mark (coin = 24 cents) + bte 9)^ar!» mark well, see 306, 4. marksman, ber ^&)\x^i, -n, -n* mast + ber 5Wajl, -e^, -en (for -e)» master + ber 3)?eij!er, -^, -♦ matter (= thing), n., bte (Sad^e, pi. -n; ba^ 2>tn5, -e^, -e^ mature, v., m 9leife bringen (119, 2), maxim of virtue, bie 2^ugenble'^re, pi. -n. may + mag {inf, mogen, 135. 4). me + mir, m\6) (81j. meaning, ber ©inn; -e^. meat (food), bie ©peife, pi. -n. meet, i). (o/ persons), jtc^ treffen, s^r. /F. ; to — again, jt(^ wieberfe^en, str. IV.j 1; sep. medicine + bie 3}Zebiji^tt, pi. -en, memory, ba^ 5litbenfcn, -^, -♦ mention in one's conversation, fpred^en (str. IV.) »on; erwa^nen (w. gen.). merchant, ber i?aufmamt, -^, pi. (172). merely, Mo^; \\m\ merit, n.y ba^ S^erbtenjl, -e^, -e. message, bie SBotfc^aft, pi. -en. messenger, ber ©efanbte, ein ©efanb^^ ter {see 220) ; ber 33Dte, -n, -n. metal + ba$ mtta'U, -i^, -e. metre + ba^ 3)Jeter, -€^, -♦ mill + bie 5Witp, ^^. -n. miller + ber SJJitHer, -^, -♦ millionaire + ber 53?iIItonar, -^, -e. mind, ha^ ®cmiit(&), -e^, -er. miner, ber SBergmann, -^, pi. (172). minister + ber 9)iini^fler, -^, -♦ minstrel, ber danger, -^, -• minute + bie 3)?inu'te, pi. -n. mirror, t^., ber Spiegel, -^, -. mislead, ijerleiten* misjudge, ijerfennen (119). misunderstand, mi§^erjle:^en, str. Vl.y 546, 2, i?i56;?. mock at, ^o^n fprei^en, w. dat. model, n.y ba^ S)orbilb, -t^, -er, modest, befc^eiben. modern + mobe^rn ; the — languages, bte ncueren (Bprad^en. Moldavia + bie 3)'?oIbau. moment, ber ^ugenBUcf, -^, -e. monarch + ber 9)Jona'r(^, -en, -en. money, ha^ ®elb, -e^, -er» month 4- ber 3)?onat, -e^, -e. monument, ba^ T)tntmai, -§, -er, moon + ber 2Jlonb, -e^, -c. morals, bie Sitten (pi.). more + nte^r; — and — , tmmerme^r. morning, + ber WloxQ^n, -5, -♦ mortal, jlerMic^. moss + ba^ SWoo^, -e^, -e» most + bie meijlen (pL). mother + bie 3)?utter, pi. -. mountain, ber 33erg, -e^, -e. mouth, ber 2)?unb, -e^, pi. 9J?iinbe, 9}?vtnbe, ?D^itnber; ber Slacken, -^, -. move (change one's residence), um^ jie'^en, str. Il.y sep. ; — about, um== le'rjte^en, sep. much, many, ijtel, »iele» mud, ber ^xtd, -e^. murder, n., + ber !Korb, -e^ (51). murderous + ntorberif(^; — blow, ber 3}^orbftreic^, -e^, -e. muzzle, n., ber 2JZaul!orb, -e^, -e. my + mein (85). mystery, ba^ 0idtfel, -a, -. nation + bie 5?atio'n, pi. -en. nature + bie 9?atu'r, pi. -en. VOCABULAKY. 79 near, na^c {comp. na|er, aup, nac^fl)* w. dat nearly, fajl; Beina^c. necessary, nottg. necessity, bte 9Zot, pi. -e (rare). neck, ber ^oX^f -e^, -e» neighbor — ber 9Za(^barf -^, -n» neither — nor, tceber — noc^» never, nie, nevertheless, benno(^« new + neu, frtfi^. news, bie S'^ac^rtclt, ^?. -en. next + na(^j^» night + bte S^lad^t, p?. -e, nine + neun, no, indef. numeral, fein (95). nobility, ber 5lbel, -^. noble, ebel (71). nobody, niemanb (97). nod, to — to one, jutt)in!ettf w. dat., Sep,; jumden; w. dat., sep. (Ex. XX., II. Series). none, fetner (95). nonsense, ber Unftnn, -a. noon, ber Mitta^, -^, -e. not, nic^t; not at all, gar ntc^t* note-book, ba^ |)eft, -e^, -e. nothing, ni^t^* nothing but, lauter. notice, v., kmerfen* noun, ha^ ^auptivort, -e^, -er» novel, n.y ber Oioma'n, -^, -e» now, ie^t ; + nun* oak-tree + bie (£t($e, pi. -n* obedience, ber ©e^orfam, -(3. obliged, to be — , mitffen (135, 6). obstacle, ha^ ^inbernt(3, -niffe^, -niffe. occupy, kfe^en* o'clock, at . . . ~, urn ♦ ♦ ♦ U|r, Oder 4- bte Dber* of, ijon (303, 15). officer + ber Dfftji'er, -^, -e. official, n., ber S3eanite, -n, -n; ein ^tartiitx, pi. S3eamte. often + oft. old + alt* once, einmal; +einfl (formerly); feiner Beit (443, 2); at—, foglei'c^; fofo'rt. one, indef. pron.y man. only, nur* open, v., + offnen; ft(^ ijffnen* opponent, ber ©egner, -^, -♦ order (= fraternity) + ber Drben, -^f -; in — to, urn lu, w. inf. orderly, geftttet. originally, itrfpritngttcf). ornament, ber ©c^muc!, -e^. orphan, ber (bie) SBaife, -n* -n. other + anber; + anber^ (adv.). otherwise + anber^. over + iikr (306, 7). overcome, itberminben, str. III., 1. overgrown with moss, moo^U^ tDad^fen. owe, fc^ulben; fc^ulbig fein. own, adj., + eigen* package + ha^ ^adt't, -t^, -e, paint, v., ntalen* painting, bas^ ©emalbe, -^, -♦ palace + ber ^aia'% -c^/ -c. palliate, ^efd^omgen. paper + ba^ ^a\}x'tx, -^, -e; sheet of — , baa a3Iatt; -e^, -er» parents, bie ©Item. Paris + 3)ari'a* part, in — , teil^, l^alb» patient, n., ber ^ranfe (220). pass, n., + ber 9)a§, 9)affea, mfK pass away, v., ba^in ge^en. passage (in a book), bte (BttUt, pi. -n. pauper, ber 5lrme (220). pay, v., besa^Icn. 80 VOCABULARY. peace, bcr ^riebe (46, 4). peasant, ber 33auer, -n or -^, -n. pedestrian, ber i^u^ganger, -^r-; ber ©c^nelllaufer, -^, -♦ pedlar, ber ^aufi^-er, -4, -♦ pen, bie ^eber, pi. -n. pence, see penny, penny + ber S^fennig, -^, -e. pension, v,, + penftonieren, Pentecost + ^^ftngjlen, people, t»a^ 2^olf,-e^» -er; bie iCeute; the young — , bie jungen Seute* perfection, bie SJoUfommen^eit, pi. -en* perhaps, »iellei'c^t, permit, v., erlauku. person + bie 9)erfo'nr pi. -en; ber ^m\^, -en, -en. physician, ber 5(rjt, -t^, "e. pianist, ber ^latjt'erfpieler, -^, -; bie ^kijierfpieleritt, pL -ncn» picture, ba^ 23ilb, -e^, -er. piece, n., ha^ ^tM, -e^, -e. pit, 71., bie funb, -e^, e (175). power, bie ilraft, pi. -e; bie 2)iad^t, pi. -e. powerful, — ly, mdc^tig. practise, fic^ iiben. praise, loben. pray, Mtten, str. F.,2. preach + prebigen. preacher + ber 5>rebiger, -^ ; S^farrer, -(3. precaution, bie f^iirforge. precept, bie lOe^re, pi. -n. precious, foflbar. prepare + praparieren. present, at — , je^t; to be — , babei^ fein, Sep. president + ber ^Jrafibe'nt, -en, -en. presumption, bie S^ermeffen^it. pretty, p^fc6; niebUd^. previous, ijor^e'rge^enb. pride, ber ^oc^mut, -a. priest + ber ^^nefler, -a, -. principle + baa ^^rinji'p, -a, -ien; ber ©runbfa^r -ea, -e. prison, ber Btt?tnger, -a, -. prisoner, ber ©efangene, -n, -n. prize, n., ber 9)reta, -ea, -e. prodigious, unge^euer. profit, ber ®ett)inn, -ea, -c. progress, n,, ber ^ortfi^ritt, -ea, -e; ber ®ang, -t^, -e. project, n., + baa 5)roje'ct, -ea, -e. proper, to be — , ftd) jiemen. VOCABULAEY. 81 property, M SJermogen, -^, -. prophesy, tpetffagen* prosperity, tie SBo^lfa^rt proud, fiolj* provide, i?erfe^ettf sir. V., 1. provisions, ber S^orrat, -^, -t* prune, «., Befd^neiben, str. Z, 1. Prussian + ber 9)reuper -n, -n* pupil, ber (B^ixkx, -^, ~. pure, rein, + 1)ur* put, fe|en (upriglit) ; legen ; — on, am^un, sep. (136, 3). pursuit, to send in — of, nad^fenben (119), w. daL pyramid + bie ^^rami'be, pL -n. quarrel, ber ^aber, -^; ba^ ^aberm -<3. queen, bie ^onigittf pi. -nen^ quill, bie ^eber, pi, -n. quite, gait^ rage, tokn. rain, v., + regncn. raise, l^eben; auf^eBen, str. YIIL, f^ep. random, at — , auf gut ®lu(f . rank, to — above, fte^en (136) iibcr* rather, e^er* reach, i?., + retc^en, erretd^en* read, lefcn, str. V.,1. reading {e. g , various readings in several editions), bie Se^artr pi. -en* ready + Bereit* really, eigentUc^* reap, ernten; einernten, Bep* reaper, ber ©d^nitter, -^, -♦ reason, n., ber Berftanb, -e^» reasonably, see 187. recall, t?., |t(^ bejinnen (auf), str.IIT., 2. rebel, ti., ber OieBc'IIr -eur -en* recede (before), »et(^ettr «^r. Z, 1; reflect, nac^benfen (119, sep.) iiber, ^c. reflection, bie UeBerle'gung* refuse, ijertweigern* regularly, regelntci^ig* reign, n., bie 9?egicrung, pi -en; in the — , see 306, 8. rejoicing, ber Subel, -^ ; ber freubige Buruf, remain, Bleikn, str, Z, 2. remember, gebenfen (119, 2), w. gen. ; ftd^ ertnnern, w. gen. 'remembrance, bie Srinnerungr^?.-en» remit, erlaffen, str. VIL re-open, mteber erofnen. repent, reuen* report, -y., beric^ten* representation, bie S^orjleEung, j)^- -en* request, to — something, urn etwa^ Bitten, str, F., 2. require, erforbern* resolve, ft(^ entfc^Iiefen, str. 11. , 1. resound, fc^alten; erft^alten, wk., also str. vni. respect, v,, ac^ten. rest, «., ru^en. retired, to live a — life, juriitf gejogen leBen* retreat, n., ber 9?iitfmarf(^, -e^, -e* retreat, «., jurucftreten, str. F., 1 ; sep. return, «. , juriicf fe^ren, sep. ; wieber" fe^reUf sep,\ fe^ren (poetical), Rhenish + r^etnifd), Rhine + ber SfJ^ein, -c^* ribbon, ba(3 S3anb, -e^, -er. ride, v., + reiten, st7\ Z, 1. ridicule, n., ber ©pott, -e^. ridiculous, lad^erlic^* right, n.y + ba^ fRt^t, -e^, -e» right, adj., + rec^t* 82 VOCABULAEY. righteous + gerec^t; the — (man), t)er ©erec^te (220). ring + ber S^tng, -t^, -e* river, ber gluf, %Mt^, dim* road, hit ©tra§e, pi. -n. rob, to — one of something, Sineit urn tttoa^ Brtttgcn (119). rock, ber gelfen, -«3, -. Roman + ber fRmtx, -^, -♦ Rome + 9iom. room (= space) + ber fftaum, -e^, -e; ber 9)la^, -e^, -e; (= dwelling- room), bie eijer, -^, - ; the — people, ba^ fSolt ber ©c^tDeijer* sword + ba^ (Bi^xotxt, -e^, -er* sword-song, ba^ (i\ bann. thief + ber ^teb, -e^, -e. think + benfen (119, 2); meinen* this + biefer (90). thought, n., ber ®ebattfe,-n^, -n» thread, n.y ber f^abett, -^, -; (with- out umlaut) = fathoms. three + brei* thrive, gebei^en, str. J., 3. throne + ber %'^xm, -t^, -t. through + bur(^ (304, 2). thus, fo, ba^er, till, adv., V\^^ time, bie Beit, pi. -en; several l;imes, nte^rmal^. tired, miibe, * to + ivi, w. dot. toadstool, ber 9)ftfferUn9, -^, -e. together, beifammen. to-morrow + morgen. tone + ber 2:on, -ii, -e» too + JU. tool, ba^ SSerfjeug, -ea, e, touch, ^., ^erii|ren (^. ace.) ; rit^ren an («^. ace). toward, gegen (304, 4). town, bie ©tabt, pi. -e» trace, t^., bie ©pur, ^^. -en. train (railway — ), ber Bug^ -c^r -^ ; on the — , per Sifenba^n. traitor, ber S5errdter, -^, -. transatlantic + tran^atknttfd^. VOCABULAEY. 85 transgress, itberfc^reitett, &tr. Z, 1. translate, uberfe^en. traveller, ber 0leifenbe (220). treason, high — , ber ^o(^»errat, -^. treasure, 7i., ber ©(|a^, -e^, ^e, treat, v., ^e^anbelm trifle, n., bie ^leiniglett, pi, -en, Trinity-Sunday, 'iio.^ S^rtnita^t^fejl {in a popular song : ^^rinitat). triumphal procession, ber Slriumpl^^ pg, -e^, -e. trouble, n., bie ^vi^t, pi. -n ; bie ^\a^i, pi. -n, Troy + %xii\Ci, -^, truth, bie 2Ba:^r|eit, pi. -en. Turk + ber Sitrfe, -n, -n» turn aside, trans, v., aWittn, sep. twice, see 531, 2. tyranny + bie 3^^rannei\ tyrant + ber Sl^ra'nn, -en, -en, Tyrolese + ber Sl^ro'ler, -^, -• unable, unfd^ig* uncle + ber Dnfel, -^, - ; ber D^txm, -^f -e. under + unter (306, 8). understand, i)er|le|ett (136, 2); be*' greifen, str. Z, 1. understanding, ber SJerfianb, -e^ ; bie SDernunft (reason), unequal, unglei(^* unfortunate, unglitcfUc^. union, bie S^erMnbung, pi. -en, unite, ijerbinben, str. III., 1 ; Binben, inlll. S., Ex. 1. United States, bie SJeretnigten a9en, verse + ber S^er^, -e^, -e, very, fe|r ; — much, adv., fe^r, vexed, to be — , t)erbrte§en (imp., w. ace.) ; ji^ argern iikr, w. ace. victim, \)ix^ Opfer, -^/ -, Vienna + SBien, village, ba^ 2)orf, -e^, -er. virtue, bie Slugenb, pi. -en, visit, v., befuci^en, voice, n., bie (Stimnte, pi. -n. volume, ber S3anb» -e^, -e. wagon + ber SGDagen, -^, -♦ wait, tvarten, walk, to take a — , fpajieren ge^en a36). walk, «., ge^ctt (136) ; fc^reiten, str, /., 1. Wallachia + bie SSattad^ct'. wander + wanbern; fd^tt)etfen. wanderer + ber S©anberer, -^, -, want, «. (= wish), motten (135, 7) ; tt)iinfc^en, war, ber ^rieg, -ed; -e, warlike, friegerifd^, ward (of a key), ? er SBart, -c3, -e* se VOCABULAEY. warm, to get — over, ftd) mormen an (w. dat.). watch, n. (time-piece), bie U^r, pi. -en. watch, «. (= look on), jufe^en, sir. F., 1 ; Sep. (w. dat.). watchful, tt)a(^fam (auf, w. ace.). water + ba^ SSaffer, -^, -♦ watering-place, ba^ 33ab, -e^, "er. waver, toanhxL way + ber SSeg, -e^, -e ; bie ^xt, -en. weak + fc^wad^ ; — man, ber (B^m6)^ ling, -^, -e. weather + ba^ SKetter, -^. week + bie SBoc^e, pZ, -n. weep, tpeinen. weigh + iDiegen, sir. 11., 2 {see 133 and 124). welcome, ^., + Bemi^IIfommen. welfare, ba^ 2Bo|lerge^enr -^. well-meaning + tt)o^lmeinenb. Weser + bie SBefer. Westphalian + njejlfoiUfc^. what ? + n)a^ ? whatever, xool^* when ? + njann ? {conj.), al^. wheel, n.y ba^ 9lab, -es^, ^r. where + IDO. which + m\^ (92, 2). while, C6>7y., tr>a^renb; fo lange al^. white + n)ei§. whither ? njo^in ? who (r^^f. pron.), ber; toelc^er (93). whole, ganj. why ? tt)arum ? n>a^ ? vricked, bofe. wide + weiU widow 4- bie SSittroe, p?. -n. will, the last — , ba^ Sleflante'nt, - e^, -e. will, u, 4- WoUen (135, 7). William + Sil^etm. willing + njillig. win, erttjerkn, str. III., 3. wind + ber 2Binb, -e^, -e. wind up, aufwinben, str. III., 1 ; Sep. window, ha^ ^enjler; -^, -♦ wine + ber SBein, -e^, -e. winter + ber SBinter, -^, -. wise + ttjetfe ; — man, ber SBeife (220). wish, n., + ber 2Bunfc^, -e^^ "e; bie wish, v., n)oIIen (135, 7); + wiin^ fd^en. witch, bie |)ere, pi. -n. without, o^ne (304, 5). witness, n., ber Beuge, -n, -n. woe, n., + baa 2Be^, -e^ ; bie ^ein. woe 1 + tr>e^e I (w. dat.). woman, ha^ SBeib, -e^, -cr; bie grau, pi. -en. wool + bie SBoHe. work, n., + ba^ 2Ber!, -ee, -e; — of art, baa ^unflwerf. work, v., arbeiten* workman, ber 5(rbeiter, -a, -♦ V70rks (the — of an author), + bie SBerfe; bie (Sc^riften. world + bie SBelt, pi. -en ; the — 's history, bie SBeltgefc^i^te; the — 's judgment, ha^ SSeltgerid^t. worry, n., ber SJerbru^, S^erbruffea^ worthy + tvurbig. wound, v., + ijermunben, wrench (from), abjmingen, str. III., w. dat. write, f(^reiben, str. Z, 2. yard, bie ©He, pi. -tt» ye + i^r. VOCABULARY. 87 yea, ^ar. year + ba^ 5a^r, -<^, -c» • yearn, ftd^ fe^nen* yesterday + geftern, yet, bo^, bennod) ; of time : nod^; not yet, nod) nic^t* yield (= obey), ge^orc^en; w. dat. yonder, borU you, ©ie, 4- ibr, young + iung ; the — people, bie iungen !2eute ; — of an animal, ba^ Sunge, cin Sunge^, see 220. youth (= young man), + ber Siing^ ling, -^f -e» x00w-7,'39(402.s) THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY iip ^^ ^ 'l >\' \' V I f!^mm ;><•:■•